MP2100A BERTWave MP2101A BERTWave PE MP2102A BERTWave SS Operation …€¦ · 05/02/2010 ·...

Document No.: M-W3349AE-13.0

ANRITSU CORPORATION

MP2100A BERTWave MP2101A BERTWave PE MP2102A BERTWave SS

Operation Manual

For safety and warning information, please read this

manual before attempting to use the equipment.

Keep this manual with the equipment.

13th Edition

ii

Safety Symbols

To prevent the risk of personal injury or loss related to equipment malfunction, Anritsu Corporation uses the

following safety symbols to indicate safety-related information. Ensure that you clearly understand the meanings of

the symbols BEFORE using the equipment. Some or all of the following symbols may be used on all Anritsu

equipment. In addition, there may be other labels attached to products that are not shown in the diagrams in this

manual.

Symbols used in manual This indicates a very dangerous procedure that could result in serious injury or death if not performed properly.

This indicates a hazardous procedure that could result in serious injury or death if not performed properly. This indicates a hazardous procedure or danger that could result in light-to-severe injury, or loss related to equipment malfunction, if proper precautions are not taken.

Safety Symbols Used on Equipment and in Manual The following safety symbols are used inside or on the equipment near operation locations to provide information

about safety items and operation precautions. Ensure that you clearly understand the meanings of the symbols and

take the necessary precautions BEFORE using the equipment.

This indicates a prohibited operation. The prohibited operation is indicated symbolically in or near the barred circle.

This indicates an obligatory safety precaution. The obligatory operation is

indicated symbolically in or near the circle. This indicates a warning or caution. The contents are indicated symbolically in or

near the triangle. This indicates a note. The contents are described in the box. These indicate that the marked part should be recycled.

MP2100A BERTWave

MP2101A BERTWave PE

MP2102A BERTWave SS

Operation Manual 5 February 2010 (First Edition) 6 March 2015 (13th Edition) Copyright © 2010-2015, ANRITSU CORPORATION. All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced without the prior written permission of the publisher. The contents of this manual may be changed without prior notice. Printed in Japan

DANGER

WARNING

CAUTION

For Safety

iii

WARNING

ALWAYS refer to the operation manual when working near locations

at which the alert mark shown on the left is attached. If the advice in

the operation manual is not followed, there is a risk of personal injury

or reduced equipment performance. The alert mark shown on the left

may also be used with other marks and descriptions to indicate other

dangers.

Overvoltage Category

This equipment complies with overvoltage category II defined in IEC

61010. DO NOT connect this equipment to the power supply of

overvoltage category III or IV.

Laser radiation warning

NEVER look directly into the cable connector on the equipment

nor into the end of a cable connected to the equipment. There is a

risk of injury if laser radiation enters the eye.

The Laser Safety label is attached to the equipment for safety use

as indicated in "Laser Safety" later in this section.

To ensure that the equipment is grounded, always use the supplied

3-pin power cord, and insert the plug into an outlet with a ground

terminal. If power is supplied without grounding the equipment, there

is a risk of receiving a severe or fatal electric shock or causing

damage to the internal components.

Only qualified service personnel with a knowledge of electrical fire and

shock hazards should service this equipment. This equipment cannot

be repaired by the operator. DO NOT attempt to remove the

equipment covers or unit covers or to disassemble internal

components. There are high-voltage parts in this equipment

presenting a risk of severe injury or fatal electric shock to untrained

personnel. In addition, there is a risk of damage to precision

components.

Repair

Electric Shock

For Safety

iv

WARNING

The performance-guarantee seal verifies the integrity of the equipment.

To ensure the continued integrity of the equipment, only Anritsu

service personnel, or service personnel of an Anritsu sales

representative, should break this seal to repair or calibrate the

equipment. Be careful not to break the seal by opening the

equipment or unit covers.If the performance-guarantee seal is

broken by you or a third party, the performance of the equipment

cannot be guaranteed.

This equipment should always be positioned in the correct manner. If

the cabinet is turned on its side, etc., it will be unstable and may be

damaged if it falls over as a result of receiving a slight mechanical

shock.

Always set up the equipment in a position where the power switch

can be reached without difficulty.

When replacing the battery, use the specified battery and insert it

with the correct polarity. If the wrong battery is used, or if the battery

is inserted with reversed polarity, there is a risk of explosion causing

severe injury or death.

DO NOT short the battery terminals and never attempt to disassemble

the battery or dispose of it in a fire. If the battery is damaged by any of

these actions, the battery fluid may leak. This fluid is poisonous.

DO NOT touch the battery fluid, ingest it, or get in your eyes. If it is

accidentally ingested, spit it out immediately, rinse your mouth with

water and seek medical help. If it enters your eyes accidentally, do

not rub your eyes, rinse them with clean running water and seek

medical help. If the liquid gets on your skin or clothes, wash it off

carefully and thoroughly.

DO NOT expose batteries to heat or fire. Do not expose batteries to

fire. This is dangerous and can result in explosions or fire. Heating

batteries may cause them to leak or explode.

Falling Over

Calibration

Replacing Battery

Battery Fluid

Battery Disposal

For Safety

v

WARNING

This equipment uses a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). DO NOT subject

the equipment to excessive force or drop it. If the LCD is subjected to

strong mechanical shock, it may break and liquid may leak.

This liquid is very caustic and poisonous.

DO NOT touch it, ingest it, or get in your eyes. If it is ingested

accidentally, spit it out immediately, rinse your mouth with water and

seek medical help. If it enters your eyes accidentally, do not rub your

eyes, rinse them with clean running water and seek medical help. If

the liquid gets on your skin or clothes, wash it off carefully and

thoroughly.

LCD

For Safety

vi

CAUTION

Always remove the main power cable from the power outlet before

cleaning dust around the power supply and fan.

Clean the power inlet regularly. If dust accumulates around the

power pins, there is a risk of fire.

Keep the cooling fan clean so that the ventilation holes are not

obstructed. If the ventilation is obstructed, the cabinet may

overheat and catch fire.

Never input a signal of more than the indicated value between the

measured terminal and ground. Input of an excessive signal may

damage the equipment.

Cleaning

Check Terminal

For Safety

vii

Class 1 indicates the danger degree of the laser radiation specified

below according to IEC 60825-1:2007.

Class 1: Lasers that are safe under reasonably foreseeable conditions of operation, including the use of optical instruments for intrabeam viewing.

Class I indicates the degree of danger of the laser radiation outlined

below as defined by 21 CFR 1040.10:1995.

Class I: Class I levels of laser radiation are not considered to be

hazardous.

CAUTION

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye

hazard.

Laser Safety

For Safety

viii

WARNING

The laser in this equipment is classified as Class 1 according to the IEC

60825-1:2007 standard, or as Class I according to the 21 CFR

1040.10:1995 standard.

The model names of “recommended SFP/XFP” written on label are

listed in following table.

Table 1 Laser Safety Classifications Based on IEC 60825-1:2007

Model Name ClassMax. Optical

Output Power (mW)*

Pulse Width (s)/Repetition Rate

Emitted Wavelength

(nm)

Beam Radiation

Angle

[deg.]

Laser Aperture

G0177A 1 0. 78 CW 850 23.0 Figure 2 [1]

G0194A 1 0.8 CW 1310 11.5 Figure 2 [1]

G0195A 1 1.58 CW 1550 11.5 Figure 2 [1]

G0238A 1 0.8 CW 850 23.0 Figure 2 [1]

G0239A 1 1.12 CW 1310 11.5 Figure 2 [1]

*: Indicates the possible optical output power when each and every

reasonably foreseeable single-fault condition is included.

Table 2 Specifications of Laser Built into MP2100A/MP2101A

Model Name Max. Optical

Output Power (mW)*

Pulse Width (s)/Repetition Rate

Emitted Wavelength

(nm)

Beam Radiation

Angle

[deg.]

G0174A 0.78 CW 850 23.0

G0194A 0.8 CW 1310 11.5

G0195A 1.58 CW 1550 11.5

G0238A 0.8 CW 850 23.0

G0239A 1.12 CW 1310 11.5

*: Indicates the possible optical output power when each and every

reasonably foreseeable single-fault condition is included.

Laser Safety

For Safety

ix

Table3 Labels on Product

Type Label Affixed to: Model Name

1 Explanation Figure 1, A

MP2100A + MP2100A-050,

MP2100A + MP2100A-051,

MP2101A + MP2101A-050,

MP2101A + MP2101A-051

2 Certification Figure 1, B

MP2100A + MP2100A-050,

MP2100A + MP2100A-051,

MP2101A + MP2101A-050,

MP2101A + MP2101A-051

3 Identification Figure 1, C

MP2100A + MP2100A-050,

MP2100A + MP2100A-051,

MP2101A + MP2101A-050,

MP2101A + MP2101A-051

Laser Safety

For Safety

x

Laser Radiation Markings

A

B

C

Figure 1 Locations of Affixed Labels

[1]

Figure 2 Locations of Laser Beam Apertures

For Safety

xi

CAUTION

This equipment uses a Poly-cardoon fluoride lithium battery to backup

the memory. This battery must be replaced by service personnel when it

has reached the end of its useful life; contact the Anritsu sales section

or your nearest representative.

Note: The battery used in this equipment has a maximum useful life of

4 years. It should be replaced before this period has elapsed.

This equipment uses USB memory devices as external storage media

for storing data and programs.

If this media is mishandled or becomes faulty, important data may be

lost. To prevent this chance occurrence, all important data and

programs should be backed-up.

Anritsu will not be held responsible for lost data.

Pay careful attention to the following points.

Never remove the USB memory device from the instrument while it is

being accessed.

The USB memory device may be damaged by static electric

charges.

Anritsu has thoroughly tested all external storage media such as USB

memory, Hard disk drive and DVD drive. Users should note that external

storage media may not have been tested by Anritsu, thus Anritsu cannot

guarantee the performance or suitability of such media.

Replacing Memory

Back-up Battery

External

Storage Media

For Safety

xii

CAUTION

The instrument is equipped with an internal memory from which, as with

any flash memory, data may be lost because of limitation of writing

times. The writing limitation of flash memory is approximately one

million.

Note: The flash memory used in this equipment has a maximum writing

time of one million.

Anritsu can take no responsibility for lost data, and users are

recommended to always back up important data at regular intervals. To

reduce the possibility of data loss, particular attention should be given to

the following points.

The instrument should only be used within the recommend

temperature range, and should not be used in locations where the

temperature may fluctuate suddenly.

Always follow the guidelines to ensure that the instrument is set up in

the specified manner.

Always ensure that the fans at the rear and side of the instrument

are not blocked or obstructed in any way.

Exercise care not to bang or shake the instrument while the power is

on.

Never disconnect the mains power at the plug or cut the power at the

breaker with the instrument turned on.

This instrument is designed for an industrial environment.

In a residential environment this instrument may cause radio

interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate

measures.

Exposure to corrosive gases such as hydrogen sulfide, sulfurous acid,

and hydrogen chloride will cause faults and failures.

Note that some organic solvents release corrosive gases.

Flash Memory

Use in a residential

environment

Use in Corrosive

Atmospheres

xiii

Equipment Certificate Anritsu Corporation certifies that this equipment was tested before shipment

using calibrated measuring instruments with direct traceability to public testing

organizations recognized by national research laboratories, including the

National Institute of Advanced Industrial Science and Technology, and the

National Institute of Information and Communications Technology, and was

found to meet the published specifications.

Anritsu Warranty Anritsu Corporation will repair this equipment free-of-charge if a malfunction

occurs within one year after shipment due to a manufacturing fault.

However, software fixes will be made in accordance with the separate

Software End-User License Agreement. Moreover, Anritsu Corporation will

deem this warranty void when:

The fault is outside the scope of the warranty conditions separately

described in the operation manual.

The fault is due to mishandling, misuse, or unauthorized modification or

repair of the equipment by the customer.

The fault is due to severe usage clearly exceeding normal usage.

The fault is due to improper or insufficient maintenance by the customer.

The fault is due to natural disaster, including fire, wind, flooding,

earthquake, lightning strike, or volcanic ash, etc.

The fault is due to damage caused by acts of destruction, including civil

disturbance, riot, or war, etc.

The fault is due to explosion, accident, or breakdown of any other

machinery, facility, or plant, etc.

The fault is due to use of non-specified peripheral or applied equipment

or parts, or consumables, etc.

The fault is due to use of a non-specified power supply or in a

non-specified installation location.

The fault is due to use in unusual environments(Note).

The fault is due to activities or ingress of living organisms, such as

insects, spiders, fungus, pollen, or seeds.

In addition, this warranty is valid only for the original equipment purchaser. It

is not transferable if the equipment is resold.

Anritsu Corporation shall assume no liability for injury or financial loss of the

customer due to the use of or a failure to be able to use this equipment.

xiv

Note:

For the purpose of this Warranty, "unusual environment" means use:

In places of direct sunlight

In dusty places

Outdoors

In liquids, such as water, oil, or organic solvents, and medical fluids, or

places where these liquids may adhere

In salty air or in places where chemically active gases (sulfur dioxide,

hydrogen sulfide, chlorine, ammonia, nitrogen oxide, or hydrogen chloride

etc.) are present

In places where high-intensity static electric charges or electromagnetic

fields are present

In places where abnormal power voltages (high or low) or instantaneous

power failures occur

In places where condensation occurs

In the presence of lubricating oil mists

In places at an altitude of more than 2,000 m

In the presence of frequent vibration or mechanical shock, such as in

cars, ships, or airplanes

Anritsu Corporation Contact In the event that this equipment malfunctions, contact an Anritsu Service and

Sales office. Contact information can be found on the last page of the printed

version of this manual, and is available in a separate file on the CD version.

xv

Crossed-out Wheeled Bin Symbol Equipment marked with the Crossed-out Wheeled Bin Symbol complies with

council directive 2012/19/EC (the “WEEE Directive”) in European Union.

For Products placed on the EU market after August 13, 2005, please contact

your local Anritsu representative at the end of the product's useful life to

arrange disposal in accordance with your initial contract and the local law.

About Eco label The label shown on the left is attached to Anritsu products meeting our environmental standards. Details about this label and the environmental standards are available on the Anritsu website at http://www.anritsu.com

xvi

Software End-User License Agreement (EULA) Please read this Software End-User License Agreement (hereafter this EULA) carefully before using (includes executing, copying, registering, etc.) this software (includes programs, databases, scenarios, etc., used to operate, set, etc., Anritsu electronic equipment). By reading this EULA and using this software, you are agreeing to be bound by the terms of its contents and Anritsu Corporation (hereafter Anritsu) hereby grants you the right to use this Software with the Anritsu-specified equipment (hereafter Equipment) for the purposes set out in this EULA.

1. Grant of License and Limitations 1. Regardless of whether this Software was

purchased from or provided free-of-charge by Anritsu, you agree not to rent, lease, lend, or otherwise distribute this Software to third parties and further agree not to disassemble, recompile, reverse engineer, modify, or create derivative works of this Software.

2. You may make one copy of this Software for backup purposes only.

3. You are not permitted to reverse engineer this software.

4. This EULA allows you to install one copy of this Software on one piece of Equipment.

2. Disclaimers To the extent not prohibited by law, in no

event shall Anritsu be liable for personal injury, or any incidental, special, indirect or consequential damages whatsoever, including, without limitation, damages for loss of profits, loss of data, business interruption or any other commercial damages or losses, arising out of or related to your use or inability to use this Software.

3. Limitation of Liability a. If a fault (bug) is discovered in this Software,

preventing operation as described in the operation manual or specifications whether or not the customer uses this software as described in the manual, Anritsu shall at its own discretion, fix the bug, or exchange the software, or suggest a workaround, free-of-charge. However, notwithstanding the above, the following items shall be excluded from repair and warranty.

i) If this Software is deemed to be used for

purposes not described in the operation

manual or specifications.

ii) If this Software is used in conjunction with

other non-Anritsu-approved software.

iii) Recovery of lost or damaged data.

iv) If this Software or the Equipment has been

modified, repaired, or otherwise altered

without Anritsu's prior approval.

v) For any other reasons out of Anritsu's direct

control and responsibility, such as but not

limited to, natural disasters, software virus

infections, etc. b. Expenses incurred for transport, hotel, daily

allowance, etc., for on-site repairs by Anritsu engineers necessitated by the above faults shall be borne by you.

c. The warranty period for faults listed in article 3a above covered by this EULA shall be either 6 months from the date of purchase of this Software or 30 days after the date of repair, whichever is longer.

xvii

4. Export Restrictions You may not use or otherwise export or

re-export directly or indirectly this Software except as authorized by Japanese and United States law. In particular, this software may not be exported or re-exported (a) into any Japanese or US embargoed countries or (b) to anyone on the Japanese or US Treasury Department's list of Specially Designated Nationals or the US Department of Commerce Denied Persons List or Entity List. By using this Software, you warrant that you are not located in any such country or on any such list. You also agree that you will not use this Software for any purposes prohibited by Japanese and US law, including, without limitation, the development, design and manufacture or production of missiles or nuclear, chemical or biological weapons of mass destruction.

5. Termination Anritsu shall deem this EULA terminated if

you violate any conditions described herein. This EULA shall also be terminated if the conditions herein cannot be continued for any good reason, such as violation of copyrights, patents, or other laws and ordinances.

6. Reparations If Anritsu suffers any loss, financial or

otherwise, due to your violation of the terms of this EULA, Anritsu shall have the right to seek proportional damages from you.

7. Responsibility after Termination Upon termination of this EULA in

accordance with item 5, you shall cease all use of this Software immediately and shall as directed by Anritsu either destroy or return this Software and any backup copies, full or partial, to Anritsu.

8. Dispute Resolution If matters of dispute or items not covered by

this EULA arise, they shall be resolved by negotiations in good faith between you and Anritsu.

9. Court of Jurisdiction

This EULA shall be interpreted in accordance with Japanese law and any disputes that cannot be resolved by negotiation described in Article 8 shall be settled by the Japanese courts.

xviii

Notes On Export Management This product and its manuals may require an Export License/Approval by

the Government of the product's country of origin for re-export from your

country.

Before re-exporting the product or manuals, please contact us to confirm

whether they are export-controlled items or not.

When you dispose of export-controlled items, the products/manuals need

to be broken/shredded so as not to be unlawfully used for military purpose.

Lifetime of Parts The life span of certain parts used in this instrument is determined by the

operating time or the power-on time. Due consideration should be given

to the life spans of these parts when performing continuous operation

over an extended period. These parts must be replaced at the customer's

expense even if within the guaranteed period described in Warranty at

the beginning of this manual.

Coaxial switch : 10 million counts (switching count for Low-pass filter)

LCD : 50,000 hours

xix

Notice The following actions are strictly prohibited for all of the software installed

in this product or otherwise provided by Anritsu:

1. Copying, except for archival purposes.

2. Transferring to a third party separately from this product.

3. Analyzing the incorporated software including but not limited to

modifying, decompiling, disassembling, and reverse engineering.

Cautions against computer virus infection Copying files and data

Only files that have been provided directly from Anritsu or generated

using Anritsu equipment should be copied to the instrument.

All other required files should be transferred by means of USB or

CompactFlash media after undergoing a thorough virus check.

Adding software

Do not download or install software that has not been specifically

recommended or licensed by Anritsu.

Network connections

Ensure that the network has sufficient anti-virus security protection in

place.

xx

CE Conformity Marking Anritsu affixes the CE conformity marking on the following product(s) in

accordance with the Council Directive 93/68/EEC to indicate that they

conform to the EMC and LVD directive of the European Union (EU).

CE marking

1. Product Model Model: MP2100A BERTWave/ MP2101A BERTWave PE/

MP2102A BERTWave SS

2. Applied Directive EMC: Directive 2004/108/EC

LVD: Directive 2006/95/EC

3. Applied Standards

EMC: Emission: EN 61326-1: 2013 (Class A)

Immunity: EN 61326-1: 2013 (Table 2) Performance Criteria*

IEC 61000-4-2 (ESD) B

IEC 61000-4-3 (EMF) A

IEC 61000-4-4 (Burst) B

IEC 61000-4-5 (Surge) B

IEC 61000-4-6 (CRF) A

IEC 61000-4-11 (V dip/short) B, C

*: Performance Criteria

A: The equipment shall continue to operate as intended

during and after the test. No degradation of

performance or loss of function is allowed below a

performance level specified by the manufacturer, when

the equipment is used as intended. The performance

level may be replaced by a permissible loss of

performance. If the minimum performance level or the

permissible performance loss is not specified by the

manufacturer, either of these may be derived from the

product description and documentation and what the

user may reasonably expect from the equipment if used

as intended.

xxi

B: The equipment shall continue to operate as intended

after the test. No degradation of performance or loss of

function is allowed below a performance level specified

by the manufacturer, when the equipment is used as

intended. The performance level may be replaced by a

permissible loss of performance. During the test,

degradation of performance is however allowed. No

change of actual operating state or stored data is

allowed. If the minimum performance level or the

permissible performance loss is not specified by the

manufacturer, either of these may be derived from the

product description and documentation and what the

user may reasonably expect from the equipment if used

as intended.

C: Temporary loss of function is allowed, provided the

function is self-recoverable or can be restored by the

operation of the controls.

Harmonic current emissions:

EN 61000-3-2: 2006 +A1:2009 A2:2009

(Class A equipment)

: No limits apply for this equipment with an active input

power under 75 W.

LVD: EN 61010-1: 2010 (Pollution Degree 2)

4. Authorized representative

Name: Murray Coleman

Head of Customer Service EMEA

ANRITSU EMEA Ltd.

Address, city: 200 Capability Green, Luton

Bedfordshire, LU1 3LU

Country: United Kingdom

xxii

C-Tick Conformity Marking Anritsu affixes the C-Tick mark on the following product(s) in accordance

with the regulation to indicate that they conform to the EMC framework of

Australia/New Zealand.

C-Tick marking

1. Product Model

Model: MP2100A BERTWave/ MP2101A BERTWave PE/

MP2102A BERTWave SS

2. Applied Standards

EMC: Emission: EN 61326-1: 2013 (Class A equipment)

I

About This Manual The manuals for the MP2100A BERTWave, MP2101A BERTWave PE , MP2102A BERTWave SS are configured in three-parts.

MP2100A/MP2101A/MP2102A BERTWave Operation Manual Operation (This Manual)

MP2100A/MP2101A/MP2102A BERTWave Remote Control Operation Manual SCPI

MP2100A/MP2101A/MP2102A BERTWave Remote Control Operation Manual Native

This manual explains the setting method, operating cautions, connection methods for connectors, panel operation, maintenance, specifications, and other functions.

This manual explains the commands to control the MP2100A/MP2101A/MP2102A, status register configuration, and sample programs.

This manual explains the commands which allow the use of remote interface software for previous Anritsu pulse pattern generator and error detector models with the MP2100A/MP2101A/MP2102A BERTWave.

MX210001A Jitter Analysis Software Operation Manual

MX210002A Transmission Analysis Software Operation Manual

This manual explains the operation method and remote control commands for the MX210001A Jitter Analysis Software.

This manual explains the operation method and remote control commands for the MX210002A Transmission Analysis Software.

II

For remote control of the MP2100A/MP2101A/MP2102A BERTWave via the remote control, refer to the MP2100A/MP2101A/MP2102A BERTWave Remote Control Operation Manual SCPI (W3350AE) or the MP2100A/MP2101A/MP2102A BERTWave Remote Control Operation Manual Native (W3354AE).

This operation manual assumes the reader has the following basic knowledge:

Optical communications, handling optical parts

Windows file operations and the Windows Control Panel

III

Manual Notation System The MP2100A/MP2101A/MP2102A BERTWave series is abbreviated MP2100A/MP2101A/MP2102A in this manual.

The names of panel and function keys are in bold. Example:Power:

The user interface such as button and tag names are in angled parentheses. Example: [ PPG ], [ System Menu ]

IV

Table of Contents

For Safety .................................................... iii

About This Manual........................................ I

Chapter 1 Outline ....................................... 1-1 1.1 Introduction of BERTWave Series ............................. 1-2

1.2 Features ..................................................................... 1-9

1.3 Intended Use .............................................................. 1-10

1.4 Glossary ..................................................................... 1-14

Chapter 2 Before Use ................................. 2-1 2.1 Unpacking and Installation ......................................... 2-2

2.2 Part Names ................................................................ 2-5

2.3 Power Connection ..................................................... 2-10

2.4 Connecting Peripheral Devices ................................. 2-12

2.5 Connecting Remote Control Devices ........................ 2-13

2.6 Cautions on Handling Optical Fiber Cables ............... 2-14

2.7 Connecting Coaxial Cable ......................................... 2-16

2.8 Installing Optical Transceiver ..................................... 2-17

2.9 Turning Power On/Off ................................................ 2-21

2.10 Using Touch Panel and Rotary Knob ........................ 2-24

2.11 Setting Control Panel ................................................. 2-25

2.12 Using External Monitor .............................................. 2-27

2.13 Configuring Power Options ........................................ 2-29

2.14 Setting Interface for Remote Control ......................... 2-30

2.15 Precautions for Preventing Damage .......................... 2-33

Chapter 3 Connecting with DUT ............... 3-1 3.1 Measuring Bit Error Rate ........................................... 3-2

3.2 Measureing Waveform ............................................... 3-8

3.3 Simultaneously Measuring Bit Error Rate

and Waveform............................................................ 3-12

1

V

Appendix

Index

10

2

3

4

5

6

7

9

8

Chapter 4 Screen Operation ...................... 4-1 4.1 Screen Configuration ................................................. 4-2

4.2 Data Input Method ..................................................... 4-6

4.3 Setting System Menu ................................................. 4-9

4.4 Multi-channel Signal Output ....................................... 4-16

4.5 Simultaneous Measurement Start and Stop

at Multi-channels .......................................................... 4-17

4.6 Displaying Date/Time and Status .............................. 4-18

4.7 Procedures at System Alarm ..................................... 4-19

Chapter 5 Generating Pulse Signal .......... 5-1 5.1 List of Setting Items ................................................... 5-2

5.2 Setting Restrictions .................................................... 5-9

5.3 Procedure of Generating Pulse Signal ...................... 5-10

5.4 Setting Reference Clock ............................................ 5-11

5.5 Setting Output Waveform .......................................... 5-16

5.6 Setting Patterns ......................................................... 5-20

5.7 Inserting Bit Error ....................................................... 5-25

5.8 Setting Sync Output ................................................... 5-26

5.9 Setting Clock Output .................................................. 5-30

Chapter 6 Measuring Bit Error .................. 6-1 6.1 Function List ............................................................... 6-2

6.2 Setting Restrictions .................................................... 6-11

6.3 Procedure of Measuring Bit Error Rate ..................... 6-13

6.4 Setting Conditions for Error Detection ....................... 6-14

6.5 Setting Measurement Conditions............................... 6-26

6.6 Measurement Result .................................................. 6-29

6.7 Saving Measurement Results .................................... 6-30

VI

Chapter 7 Observing Waveform ................ 7-1 7.1 EYE/Pulse Scope Screen .......................................... 7-2

7.2 Setting Item List ......................................................... 7-12

7.3 Setting Restrictions. ................................................... 7-22

7.4 Measurement Procedure. .......................................... 7-23

7.5 Calibrating Sampling Scope ...................................... 7-24

7.6 Setting Clock Recovery and Rate .............................. 7-29

7.7 Setting Data Collection Method ................................. 7-35

7.8 Setting Pattern Length ............................................... 7-40

7.9 Collecting Data........................................................... 7-41

7.10 Adjusting Screen Scale .............................................. 7-43

7.11 Measuring Waveform ................................................. 7-49

7.12 Using Marker .............................................................. 7-67

7.13 Waveform Math Calculation ....................................... 7-69

7.14 Using Trace Memory. ................................................ 7-70

7.15 Displaying a Label. .................................................... 7-71

7.16 Saving Measurement Results .................................... 7-72

Chapter 8 Operating Optical Interface ...... 8-1 8.1 Optical Interface Types .............................................. 8-2

8.2 Operating Optical Transceiver ................................... 8-6

8.3 Operating O/E Converter ........................................... 8-10

Chapter 9 Performance Test ..................... 9-1 9.1 Performance Test for Pulse Pattern Generator ......... 9-2

9.2 Performance Test for Error Detector ......................... 9-7

9.3 Performance Test for Sampling Scope ...................... 9-16

9.4 Performance Test for Optical Interface

(O/E Converter).......................................................... 9-20

1

VII

Appendix

Index

10

2

3

4

5

6

7

9

8

Chapter 10 Maintenance .............................. 10-1 10.1 Daily Maintenance ..................................................... 10-2

10.2 Replacement of Optical Connector ............................ 10-3

10.3 Optical Connector/Optical Adapter Cleaning ............. 10-5

10.4 Displaying Software Version ...................................... 10-8

10.5 Updating Software ................................................... 10-10

10.6 Touch Panel Position Calibration............................. 10-11

10.7 Cautions on Storage ................................................ 10-13

10.8 Transporting and Desposal ...................................... 10-14

Appendix A Specifications ......................... A-1

Appendix B Initial Values............................ B-1

Appendix C Keyboard and Mouse

Operations ............................... C-1

Appendix D Pattern Files ............................ D-1

Appendix E Performance Test Result

Form ........................................ E-1

Appendix F Bibliography ............................ F-1

Index .......................................................... Index-1

Chapter 1 Outline

1-1

1

Ou

tline

This chapter explains the BERTWave types and features, and technical terms used in this manual.

1.1 Introduction of BERTWave Series ............................ 1-2 1.1.1 BERTWave Types ........................................... 1-2 1.1.2 Options ............................................................ 1-3 1.1.3 Optional Accessories ..................................... 1-8

1.2 Features ....................................................................... 1-9 1.3 Intended Use ............................................................. 1-10 1.4 Technical Terms ....................................................... 1-14

1.4.1 Explanation of Technical Terms ................. 1-14 1.4.2 Abbreviation .................................................. 1-25

Chapter 1 Outline

1-2

1.1 Introduction of BERTWave Series 1.1.1 BERTWave Series Types

The MP2100A BERTWave is a measuring instrument that combines the functions of a pulse pattern generator (PPG), bit error detector (ED) and sampling oscilloscope all-in-one instrument.

The PPG creates a digital signal with editable data transmission speed, pulse voltage level, and send data pattern.

The ED compares the received data bit string with the expected data a bit string and calculates the number of different bits (bit error count). It calculates the bit error rate from the number of received bits and the bit error account. The data transmission speed, voltage level for recognizing 0 and 1 of the digital signal, and the data bit string (pattern) can be edited.

The sampling oscilloscope displays the periodic signal waveform. An Eye diagram can be displayed by summing the signal waveforms and signal waveforms can be analyzed and mask tested.

Figure 1.1.1-1 Mask Test Waveform

There are three models in the BERTWave series depending on the installed functions.

Table1.1.1-1 BERTWave Series

Model Product Name Pulse Pattern

Generator Error

Detector Sampling

Scope

MP2100A BERTWave MP2101A BERTWave PE – MP2102A BERTWave SS – –

1.1 Introduction of BERTWave Series

1-3

1

Ou

tline

1.1.2 Options The BERTWave Series options are shown below. The usable options vary with the model name. PPG: Pulse Pattern Generator, ED: Error Detector, SS: Sampling Scope The option number of the added option is indicated on the label on the rear panel. MP2100A-107, MP2100A-130, MP2100A-152, MP2100A-176 through 186, and MP2100A-191 are retrofit option. Installing these options requires returning MP2100A to factory.

Table 1.1.2-1 MP2100A Option List

Option Number Name Description

MP2100A-001*1 Dual Electrical Receiver Two electric interfaces in reception part of ED and SS

MP2100A-003*1 Optical/Single-ended Electrical Receiver

One optical interface and one electrical interface of reception parts of ED and SS

MP2100A-005 Extended PPG/ED Channel Extends PPG and ED to 2 channels MP2100A-007/107*1 1ch Electrical BERT and

Optical/Single-ended Electrical Scope

One electric interface in reception part of ED One optical interface and one electrical interface of reception parts of SS

MP2100A-030/130 GPIB Interface for remote control MP2100A-037*2,*3 FC Connector Optical connector for Option 003, 007 MP2100A-038*2,*3 ST Connector Optical connector for Option 003, 007 MP2100A-039*2,*3 DIN 47256 Connector Optical connector for Option 003, 007 MP2100A-040*2,*3 SC Connector Optical connector for Option 003, 007 MP2100A-050*4 XFP Slot Slot for installing optical transceiver MP2100A-051*4 SFP+ Slot Slot for installing optical transceiver MP2100A-052/152 Full Rate Clock Output MP2100A-055*5 Clock Recovery for

EYE/Pulse Scope Clock recovery unit for SS

MP2100A-056*2,*6 Low Pass Filter Bank (8.5G/10G/10.7G)

Loss pass filter

MP2100A-057*2,*6 Low Pass Filter Bank (2G/4G/8.5G/10G)

Loss pass filter

MP2100A-061*2,*6 High Bit Rate Filter MP2100A-062*2,*6 2 High Bit Rate Filter Bank MP2100A-063*2,*6 3 to 4 High Bit Rate Filter

Bank

MP2100A-064*2,*6 1 to 2 Low Bit Rate Filter Bank


Chapter 1 Outline

1-4

Table 1.1.2-1 MP2100A Option List (Cont’d)


MP2100A-066*2,*6 1 High Bit Rate/1 to 2 Low Bit Rate Filter Bank

MP2100A-067*2,*6 1 to 2 High Bit Rate/3 to 4 Low Bit Rate Filter Bank


MP2100A-069*2,*6 3 High Bit Rate/3 Low Bit Rate Filter Bank

MP2100A-070*2,*7 LPF for 156M (L) Low pass filter for option 064-069 MP2100A-071*2,*7 LPF for 622M (L) MP2100A-072*2,*7 LPF for 1.0G (L) MP2100A-073*2,*7 LPF for 1.2G (L) MP2100A-076/176*2,*8 LPF for 2.1G (H) Low pass filter for option

061-063,066-069 MP2100A-077/177*2,*8 LPF for 2.5G (H) MP2100A-078/178*2,*8 LPF for 2.6G (H) MP2100A-079/179*2,*8 LPF for 3.1G (H) MP2100A-080/180*2,*8 LPF for 4.2G (H) MP2100A-081/181*2,*8 LPF for 5.0G (H) MP2100A-082/182*2,*8 LPF for 6.2G (H) MP2100A-083/183*2,*8 LPF for 8.5G (H) MP2100A-084/184*2,*8,*9 LPF for 9.9 G to 10.3G (H) MP2100A-085/185*2,*8 LPF for 10.5G to 11.3G (H) MP2100A-086/186*2,*8,*9 LPF for Multi 10G (H) MP2100A-090 Bit rate Extension for

PPG/ED Extends the setting range of PPG and ED bit rate.

MP2100A-091/191 ED High Sensitivity MP2100A-ES310 3-year Warranty Extended

Service

MP2100A-ES510 5-year Warranty Extended Service


1-5

1

Ou

tline

*1: Select one from Option 001, 003 or 007.

*2: Select 037, 038, 039, 040, or 056 to 086 when Option 003 or 007 is selected.

*3: Select one from Option 037 to 040.

*4: Select one from Option 050 or 051.

*5: Clock recovery to analyze Ch B waveform is not available for Option 007.

*6: Select one from Option 056, 057 or 061 to 069.

*7: The filter for the low bit rate of Option 064 to 069 is selected from Option 070 to 073.

*8: The filter for the high bit rate of Option 061 to 063 and 066 to 069 is selected from Option 076 to 086.

*9: Either one of Option 084/184 or 086/186 can be installed.

MP2101A-130, MP2101A-152 , MP2101A-176 to 186 and MP2101A-191 are retrofit option. Installing these options requires returning MP2101A to factory.


Option No. Model Name Description

MP2101A-011*1 1 CH BERT PPG/ED PPG:1, ED:1 MP2101A-012*1 2 CH BERT PPG/ED PPG:2, ED:2 MP2101A-030/130 GPIB Interface for remote control MP2101A-050*2 XFP Slot Slot for installing optical transceiver MP2101A-051*2 SFP+ Slot Slot for installing optical transceiver MP2101A-052/152 Full Rate Clock Output MP2101A-090 Bit rate Extension for

PPG/ED The setting range of PPG and ED bit rate is extended.

MP2101A-091/191 ED High Sensitivity MP2101A-ES310 3-year Warranty Extended

Service


*1: Select one of either Option 011 or 012.

*2: Select one of either Option 050 or 051.

Chapter 1 Outline

1-6

MP2102A-130, MP2102A-176 through 186 are retrofit option. Installing these options requires returning MP2102A to factory.



MP2102A-021*1 Dual Electrical Receiver Two electric interfaces in reception part


One optical interface and one electrical interface of reception parts

MP2102A-030/130 GPIB Interface for remote control MP2102A-037*2,*3 FC Connector Optical connector for option 023 MP2102A-038*2,*3 ST Connector Optical connector for option 023 MP2102A-039*2,*3 DIN 47256 Connector Optical connector for option 023 MP2102A-040*2,*3 SC Connector Optical connector for option 023 MP2102A-055 Clock Recovery Clock recovery unit for SS MP2102A-056*2,*4 Low Pass Filter Bank

(8.5G/10G/10.7G) Low pass filter


Low pass filter

MP2102A-061*2,*4 1 High Bit Rate Filter MP2102A-062*2,*4 2 High Bit Rate Filter Bank MP2102A-063*2,*4 3 to 4 High Bit Rate Filter

Bank








1-7

1

Ou

tline

Table 1.1.2-3 MP2102A Option List (Cont’d)


MP2102A-070*2,*5 LPF for 156M (L) Low-pass filter for Option 064 to 069 MP2102A-071*2,*5 LPF for 622M (L) MP2102A-072*2,*5 LPF for 1.0G (L) MP2102A-073*2,*5 LPF for 1.2G (L) MP2102A-076/176*2,*6 LPF for 2.1G (H) Low-pass filter for Option 061 to 063

and 066 to 069 MP2102A-077/177*2,*6 LPF for 2.5G (H) MP2102A-078/178*2,*6 LPF for 2.6G (H) MP2102A-079/179*2,*6 LPF for 3.1G (H) MP2102A-080/180*2,*6 LPF for 4.2G (H) MP2102A-081/181*2,*6 LPF for 5.0G (H) MP2102A-082/182*2,*6 LPF for 6.2G (H) MP2102A-083/183*2,*6 LPF for 8.5G (H) MP2102A-084/184*2,*6,*7 LPF for 9.9 G to 10.3G (H) MP2102A-085/185*2,*6 LPF for 10.5G to 11.3G (H) MP2102A-086/186*2,*6,*7 LPF for Multi 10G (H) MP2102A-ES310 3-year Warranty Extended

Service


*1: Select one from Option 021 or 023.

*2: Select Option 037, 038, 039, 040, or 056 to 086 when Option 023 is selected.

*3: Select one from Option 037, 038, 039 or 040.

*4: Select one from Option 056, 057 or 061 to 069.

*5: The filter for the low bit rate of Option 064 to 069 is selected from Option 070 to 073.

*6: The filter for the high bit rate of Option 061 to 063 and 066 to 069 is selected from Option 076 to 086.


Chapter 1 Outline

1-8

1.1.3 Optional Accessories Optional Accessories of BERTWave are shown in following table.

Table 1.1.3-1 Optional Accessories

Model/ Order No.

Name Remarks

MX210001A Jitter Analysis Software For MP2100A, MP2102A MX210002A Transmission Analysis Software For MP2100A B0639A Carrying Case B0650A Rack Mount Kit G0174A 850 nm XFP Module 9.95 to 11.10 Gbit/s G0177A 850 nm SFP Module 1.062 to 4.25 Gbit/s G0178A 1310 nm SFP Module 0.155 to 2.67 Gbit/s G0179A 1550 nm SFP Module 0.155 to 2.67 Gbit/s G0194A 1310 nm XFP Module G0195A 1550 nm XFP Module G0238A SFP+ SR 850 nm G0239A SFP+ LR 1310 nm

J0619B Replaceable Optical Connector (SC)

J1137 Terminator J1139A FC・PC-LC・PC-1M-SM J1341A Open (Coaxial connector cover) J1342A Coaxial Cable 0.8 m J1343A Coaxial Cable 1.0 m J1344A LC・PC-LC・PC-1M-SM J1345A SC・PC-LC・PC-1M-SM J1346A LC・PC-LC・PC-1M-GI (62.5/125) J1347A FC・PC-LC・PC-1M-GI (62.5/125) J1348A SC・PC-LC・PC-1M-GI (62.5/125) J1349A Coaxial Cable 0.3 m

J1413A Replaceable Optical Connector (LC)

J1510A Pick OFF Tee J1512A 7.5G Passive Probe Set Z0306A Wrist Strap Z0914A Ferrule Cleaner

Z0915A Replacement Reel for Ferrule Cleaner

6 pcs

Z0916A Ferrule side face cleaner Stick type (200pcs)

1.2 Features

1-9

1

Ou

tline

1.2 Features The BERTWave has the following features:

Bit error rate measurement and waveform monitoring in one instrument

Easy touch panel operation

Compact size (180 mm deep)

GPIB interface option for remote control

Compatibility of remote commands with previous Anritsu measuring instruments

Chapter 1 Outline

1-10

1.3 Intended Use The BERTWave can be used for the following applications:

Evaluating optical transceivers used in optical fiber communications

Evaluating parts for digital communications

Evaluating optical transceivers used in optical fiber communications

Computer-based and public communications systems send and receive digital signals. These signals are converted to electrical or optical signals optimized for passage through the transmission path, which may be either coaxial cable or optical fiber. The device for converting the signal before sending through the transmission path is called the transmitter and the device for converting the signal after passage through the transmission path is called the receiver.

A device incorporating a transmitter and receiver in the same module is called the optical transceiver.

Transmission medium (optical fiber, etc) Transmitter

Receiver

Internal transmission equipment (Electrical signal)

Optical transceiver

Figure 1.3-1 Uses of Receiver and Transmitter

Transmitters and receivers must have the functions and performance specified by IEEE and ITU-T. Tables 1.3-1 and 1.3-2 list the specifications for computer-based Ethernet communications as an example of the required performance and functions. In these tables, the optical fiber transmission medium has a speed of 10 Gbit/s specified as 10GBASE-L.

1.3 Intended Use

1-11

1

Ou

tline

Table 1.3-1 Transmitter Optical Output

Item Specifications

Transmission rate 9.95328 Gbit/s +/–20 ppm (10GBASE-LR) 10.3125 Gbit/s +/–20 ppm (10GBASE-LW)

Center wavelength 1260 to 1355 nm Averaging output –8.5 to 0.5 dBm Minimum modulation amplitude –5.2 dBm Minimum extinction ratio 3.5 dB Eye mask pattern (X1, X2, X3, Y1, Y2, Y3)

(0.25, 0.40, 0.45, 0.25, 0.28, 0.40)

1+Y3

1

1-Y1 1-Y2

0.5

Y2 Y1

0

-Y3

0 X1 X2 X3 1-X3 1-X2 1-X1 1

Normalized time (unitInterval)

Nor

mal

ized

am

plitu

de

Figure 1.3-2 Definition of Eye Mask Pattern

Chapter 1 Outline

1-12

Table 1.3-2 Receiver Optical Interface

Item Specifications

Transmission rate 9.95328 Gbit/s ±100 ppm (10GBASE-LR) 10.3125 Gbit/s ±100 ppm (10GBASE-LW)

Center wavelength 1260 to 1355 nm Average Rx power –14.4 to 0.5 dBm Rx sensitivity based on optical modulation amplitude*1

0.093 mW (–10.3 dBm)

*1: Bit error rate: 10-12 or less

Excluding center wavelength, the items in Table 1.3-1 are tested with the MP2100A BERTWave. The following figure shows a connection example between the DUT and the measurement.

Transmitter (DUT)

PPG (Pulse Pattern

Generator) Output

SS (Sampling

Scope)

Optical Input

MP2100A-003,005 BERTWave

MP2100A BERT Wave

Figure 1.3-3 Transmitter Test Method

The sampling oscilloscope is used to test whether or not the output waveform of the optical transceiver satisfies the standard values in Table 1.3-1.

1.3 Intended Use

1-13

1

Ou

tline

Excluding center wavelength, the items in Table 1.3-2 are used to test E/O converters, optical power meters, optical attenuator, and optical couplers with the MP2100A BERTWave. The following figure shows a connection example between the DUT and the measurement.

Electrical/optical

converter

Receiver

(DUT)

Optical power meter

Optical attenuator

MP2100A BERTWave

Optical coupler

Optical fiber

PPG output ED1(Ch A) input

MP2100A BERT Wave

Figure 1.3-4 Receiver Test Method

Chapter 1 Outline

1-14

1.4 Technical Terms 1.4.1 Explanation of Technical Terms

This section explains the technical terms used in this manual.

0 Level (Zero Level)

At Eye pattern measurement, the maximum level at the center 20% of the bit interval is the average value of the low histogram.

1 Level (One Level)

At Eye pattern measurement, the maximum level at the center 20% of the bit interval is the average value of the high histogram.

20 %

100 %

0 level

1 level

31

Eye height

30

Eye amplitude

Crossing point level

Figure 1.4.1-1 0 Level, 1 Level, Eye Amplitude and Eye Height

1.4 Technical Terms

1-15

1

Ou

tline

p-p (peak to peak)

Indicates difference between maximum and minimum values for signal amplitude and data distribution width For example, Vp-p means the difference between the maximum and minimum values of the AC voltage. Jitter p-p means the difference between the maximum and minimum values of the jitter time distribution. PRBS (Pseudo-Random Bit Sequence)

PRBS is the abbreviation for pseudorandom bit sequence. It is a bit string approximating actual communications data with a random distribution of “1” and “0”. In a bit length of 2n-1, n is called the number of the PRBS. Using the BERTWave, n can be set to 7, 9, 15, 23, and 31.

Table 1.4.1-1 PRBS Bit Length

n 2n-1 Remarks

7 127 9 511

15 32767 23 8388607 31 2147483647

The number of the PRBS used for measuring the Rx sensitivity is determined by the communications standard.

RMS (root mean square)

This is the DC voltage consuming the equal power the same as the consumed power when impressing AC voltage on a resistance. In Voltage, RMS is DC voltage consuming the equal power when AC voltage is impressing on a resistance.

R

R

V(t)

V1

dtR

tV

TP

T

0

2

1

)(1

R

VP

21

2

)( 0

V

t

0

V

t

V1

Figure 1.4.1-2 AC and DC Voltage Power Consumption

Chapter 1 Outline

1-16

In the circuit in Figure 1.4.1-2, the voltage V1 when the power P1 and P2 consumed by resistance R is equal is the effective AC voltage V(t). V1 is the root mean square found using the following equation.

T

dttVT

V0

21 )(

1

For a sine wave, the ratio of RMS and p-p is 22 . Vrms means the effective voltage value. Jitter rms is expressed as the standard deviation of the jitter time domain histogram. SNR (Signal to Noise Ratio)

This is the ratio of the signal amplitude to the noise amplitude. The sampling scope can be calculated by the following formula.

SNR= (1 Level–0 Level)/(1+0)

1:1 Level Standard Deviation


Eye Crossing Percentage

The Eye Crossing Percentage is the ratio of the Eye amplitude rising and falling waveforms. The calculation formula is as follows. Refer to Figure 1.4.1-1.

Crossing= (crossing point level–0 Level)/(1 Level–0 Level)

Eye Amplitude

The eye amplitude is the difference between 1 Level and 0 Level. Refer to Figure 1.4.1-1.

Eye Height

The eye height can be calculated by the following formula. Refer to Figure 1.4.1-1.

Eye Height = (1 Level–31) – (0 Level +30)



1.4 Technical Terms

1-17

1

Ou

tline

Eye Pattern

The Eye Pattern is the pattern created by superimposing the digital waveforms sampled at the same timing.

Eye pattern

First measured waveform

Second measured waveform

Third measured waveform

Fourth measured waveform

Super- imposed waveforms

Figure 1.4.1-3 Eye Pattern Drawing Method

Chapter 1 Outline

1-18

Eye Width

Eye Width is equivalent to Eye Height in the horizontal direction. It is calculated from a histogram of the two eye pattern crossing points in the time direction.

Eye Width = ( t 2–32) – (t1+31)

t1: Average time of first crossing point t 2 Average time of second crossing point

1: Standard deviation of first crossing point

2: Standard deviation of second crossing point

t1 31 32

Eye Width

t2

Figure 1.4.1-4 Eye Width

Eye Mask

The Eye Mask is the boundary of the eye pattern waveform time and amplitude. The value and waveform are specified by the communications standards.

Minimum of 0 level

Maximum of 0 level

Minimum of 1 level

Maximum jitter Minimum of 1 level

Figure 1.4.1-5 Example of Eye Mask

1.4 Technical Terms

1-19

1

Ou

tline

Sampling Scope

The sampling scope is a function for monitoring the waveform of the input signal. It requires a clock input sampling and the waveform is drawn out of the clock timing. For a periodic signal like PRBS, the waveform data is obtained by slightly varying the sampling timing. This waveform data is drawn by superimposing the waveforms.

Clock timing

First measurement

waveform

Second measurement

waveform

Third measurement

waveform

Fourth measurement

waveform

Superimposed waveform

Figure 1.4.1-6 Drawing Method of Sampling Scope

Jitter

Jitter is the variation in the time of the crossover point between the Eye Diagram rising and falling parts of the waveform. Jitter p-p (Jitter p-p): Full width of histogram in time direction Jitter RMS (Jitter RMS): Standard deviation of histogram in time

direction

Jitter RMS

Jitter p-p

Figure 1.4.1-7 Jitter p-p and Jitter RMS

Chapter 1 Outline

1-20

Extinction Ratio

The extinction ratio is the ratio of 1 Level and 0 Level; it is used for evaluating optical signal waveforms. The extinction ratio is calculated by the following formula.

Extinction Ratio = 10log10 (L1– LD)/( L0– LD) (dB)

L1:1 Level (mW)L0: 0 Level (mW) LD: Level without optical input (mW)

L0

L1 – LD

L1

LD L0 – LD

Figure 1.4.1-8 Extinction Ratio Measurement Level

1.4 Technical Terms

1-21

1

Ou

tline

Duty Cycle Distortion :DCD

The duty cycle distortion (DCD) is found from the following equation:

DCD=(t2– t1)/Bp×100 (%)

Where,

t1Time at crossing point between Eye Width 50% level and rising waveformt 2: Time at crossing point between Eye Width 50% level and falling waveform Bp: Bit cycle

t1 t2Bp

50%

0%

100%

Eye Amplitude

t2 –t1

Figure 1.4.1-9 Duty Cycle Distortion

Chapter 1 Outline

1-22

Rise/Fall Time

The Rise Time is time taken for the signal level to change to the next level.

From 20% level of amplitude to 80%

From 10% level of amplitude to 90% The Fall Time is the time taken for the signal level to change to the next level.

From 80% level of amplitude to 20%

Form 90% level of amplitude to 10% In this instrument, the rise and fall time measurement level can be selected from either 10/90% or 20/80%.

Rise Time

*1

*2 "0" Level

"1" Level

Eye amplitude

Fall Time

*1:90 or 80 % *2:10 or 20 %

Figure 1.4.1-10 Rise and Fall Time

Total Error

There are two methods as follows for generating bit errors. In both, the bit error measurement is called Total Error.

Signal “1” bits evaluated as “0” bits (Omission Error)

Signal “0” bits evaluated as “1” bits (Insertion Error)

Optical amplitude

(OMA:Optical Modulation Amplitude)

This indicates a difference at 1 level and 0 levels of the optical waveform. It is the same as Eye Amplitude.

1.4 Technical Terms

1-23

1

Ou

tline

Bit Error Rate

The Bite Error Rate is the ratio of the total received bits and error bits. It depends on the SNR (signal to noise ratio).

Signal Amplitude s

Standard Deviation of

Noise Amplitude n

Bit error ratio

Threshold

Figure 1.4.1-11 Bit Error Rate

When the distribution of the noise voltage amplitude is assumed to follow a normal distribution, the standard deviation is assumed to be n and the signal amplitude is s. Bit errors occur when the noise amplitude is larger than the signal amplitude. Consequently, the probability of amplitude occurring is the bit error ratio. The bit error ratio, BER, is calculated by the following formula.

dxx

BERns

)2

exp(2

1/

2

Chapter 1 Outline

1-24

When the SNR is large (greater than 4), the relationship between SNR and BER becomes linear when plotted on a semi-logarithmic graph.

SNR(dB)2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10-2

10-3

10-5

10-10

10-7

10-12

BER

Figure 1.4.1-12 Relationship between SNR and BER

Bit Rate

The Bit Rate is the speed at which the communications interface sends and receives data. It is expressed in its center per second as bit/s or bps.

Mask Margin

This is margin of the masked waveform at the eye pattern mask test. The margin in the amplitude direction is the ratio to the interval from the edge of the eye mask to the 1 Level or the 0 Level. The margin in the time direction is the ratio to the time from the edge of the eye mask to the cross point.

0%

50%

75%

Figure 1.4.1-13 Mask Margin

1.4 Technical Terms

1-25

1

Ou

tline

1.4.2 Abbreviation The abbreviations used in this manual are listed in Table 1.4.2-1.

Table 1.4.2-1 Abbreviation

Abbreviation Formal Name

10 GbE 10 Giga bit Ethernet App Application ATT Attenuator Avg Average BER Bit Error Rate BERT Bit Error Rate Tester BERTS Bit Error Rate Test Set BIN Binary bps bit per second BW Band Width Cal Calibration CC Clock Count CH Channel CLK Clock CPRI Common Public Radio Interface CRU Clock Recovery Unit DCD Duty Cycle Distortion DM Degrade Minutes DUT Device Under Test EC Error Count ED Error Detector EI Error Interval ER Error Rate ES Error Seconds ESD Electrostatic Discharge Ext External FC Fiber Channel FEC Forward Error Correction Freq. Frequency GbE Giga bit Ethernet GND Ground GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus IEC International Electrotechnical Commission IN Input

Chapter 1 Overview

1-26.

Table 1.4.2-1 Abbreviation (Cont’d)

Abbreviation Formal Name

INS Insertion INT Internal ITU International Telecommunication Union LAN Local Area Network LVDS Low Voltage Differential Signaling LVPECL Low-Voltage Positive Emitter-Coupled Logic NECL Negative Emitter Coupled Logic NEG Negative NRZ Non Return Zero OBSAI Open Base Station Architecture Initiative O/E Optical to Electrical OMI Omission OTU Optical Transport Network OUT Output PHY Physical layer PCML Pseudo Current Mode Logic POS Positive PPG Pulse Pattern Generator PRBS Pseudorandom Bit Sequence Pwr Power RMS Root Mean Square RP3 Reference Point 3 RX Receiver SCFL Source-Coupled FET Logic SES Severely Error Second SFP Small Form factor Pluggable SNR Signal to Noise Ratio SS Sampling Scope STM Synchronous Transfer Mode SYNC Synchronize, Synchronization Trig. Trigger TX Transmitter UI Unit Interval VECP Vertical Eye Closure Penalty WAN Wide Area Network XFP 10 Gigabit Small Form-factor Pluggable

Chapter 2 Before Use

2-1

2

Before U

se

This chapter explains the following items: • Procedures from unpacking through turning power-on • Panel name and operation • Control panel and peripheral devices settings • Damage prevention measures

2.1 Unpacking and Installation ............................................ 2-2 2.1.1 Unpacking ......................................................... 2-2 2.1.2 Installation ........................................................ 2-3

2.2 Part Names ................................................................... 2-5 2.2.1 Front Panel ....................................................... 2-5 2.2.2 Rear Panel ........................................................ 2-8 2.2.3 Side Panel ........................................................ 2-9

2.3 Power Connection ...................................................... 2-10 2.3.1 Power Requirements ...................................... 2-10 2.3.2 Connecting Power Cord ................................. 2-11

2.4 Connecting Peripheral Devices .................................. 2-12 2.5 Connecting Remote Control Devices ......................... 2-13 2.6 Cautions on Handling Optical Fiber Cables ................ 2-14 2.7 Connecting Coaxial Cable .......................................... 2-16 2.8 Installing Optical Transceiver ...................................... 2-17

2.8.1 Installing Optical Transceiver ......................... 2-17 2.8.2 Removing Optical Transceiver ....................... 2-20

2.9 Turning Power On/Off ................................................. 2-21 2.9.1 Power-on ........................................................ 2-21 2.9.2 Power-off ........................................................ 2-23

2.10 Using Touch Panel and Rotary Knob ......................... 2-24 2.11 Setting Control Panel .................................................. 2-25

2.11.1 Displaying Windows Desktop ......................... 2-25 2.11.2 Setting Control Panel...................................... 2-26

2.12 Using External Monitor ............................................... 2-27 2.13 Configuring Power Options ......................................... 2-29 2.14 Setting Interface for Remote Control .......................... 2-30 2.15 Precautions for Preventing Damage ........................... 2-33

2.15.1 Precautions on Electrostatic Discharge and Electrical Overstress ....................................... 2-33

2.15.2 Precautions When Using Bias-T .................... 2-37


2-2

2.1 Unpacking and Installation 2.1.1 Unpacking

Table 2.1.1-1 lists the standard configurations of the BERTWave Series. At unpacking, check that all items are included. Contact your Anritsu Service and Sales Office or agent if any parts are missing or damaged. Keep the original packaging materials. They are required when transporting the MP2100A/MP2101A/MP2102A in future. For how to repack the BERTWave, refer to 10.8, “Transporting and Disposal”.

Table 2.1.1-1 Standard Configurations

Item Model Number Product Name Q’ty Remarks

Main unit MP2100A MP2101A MP2102A

BERTWave BERTWave PE BERTWave SS

1

Accessories MX210000A

Power Cord BERTWave Control Software (CD-ROM)

1

1

Packed in Accessory Box

*: The quantities vary with the model name and options. Options for the BERTWave Series are provided. Select one, as you need. For option details, refer to Section 1.1.2 in Chapter 1. To install some options, the BERTWave might be returned to Anritsu factory. For the specifications, refer to Appendix A “Specifications”.

2.1 Unpacking and Installation

2-3

2

Before U

se

2.1.2 Installation Install the BERTWave series horizontally as shown in Figure 2.1.2-1.

Figure 2.1.2-1 Installation Orientation

CAUTION If the BERTWave series is not installed in a “good” direction as above, a small shock may turn it over and harm the user.

A fan is installed in the BERTWave series to prevent the internal temperature from rising. Install the BERTWave series in a location with the vents at least 10 cm away from walls, peripherals or other obstructions so as not to block the fan perimeter.

Figure 2.1.2-2 Distance from Surrounding Objects

Good Bad Bad Bad


2-4

In the BERTWave series, cooling air is sucked in through the left side panel and hot air is exhausted through the right side panel. When using two or more the BERTWave series side-by-side, make sure that hot air exhausted from one unit is not sucked into the adjacent unit, otherwise overheating may occur.

CAUTION Although the BERTWave series operates at an ambient temperature of 5 to 40°C, avoid using it in locations, such as the following, since it may cause failure.

• In direct sunlight for extended periods

• Outdoors

• In excessively dusty locations

• In liquids, such as water, oil, organic solvents, and medical fluids, or places where these liquids may adhere

• In salty air or where chemically active gases (sulfur dioxide, hydrogen sulfide, chlorine, ammonia, nitrogen oxide, or hydrogen chloride etc.) are present

• Where toppling over may occur

• Where static electric charges or high electromagnetic fields are present

• Where abnormal power voltages (high or low) occur

• In the presence of lubricating oil mists

• Where condensation occurs

• In places at an altitude of more than 2,000 m

• In the presence of frequent vibration and mechanical shock, such as in cars, ships, and airplanes

2.2 Part Names

2-5

2

Before U

se

2.2 Part Names 2.2.1 Front Panel

Figure 2.2.1-1 MP2100A Front Panel

*1: When selecting and installing Option 005 *2: When selecting and installing Option 003 or Option 007 *3: When installing Option 050 or 051 *4: Only Data In (A in) when installing Option 003 or Option 007 *5: When installing Option 055 *6: When installing Option 052


2-6


*1: When selecting Option 012 *2: When installing Option 050 or 051 *3: When installing Option 052

2.2 Part Names

2-7

2

Before U

se


*1: When selecting and installing Option 023 and Option 055 *2: When installing Option 055 *3: Only Ch A when selecting Option 023


2-8

2.2.2 Rear Panel

Figure 2.2.2-1 Rear Panel

*1: Only MP2100A and MP2101A *2: When installing Option 030 or Option 130

2.2 Part Names

2-9

2

Before U

se

2.2.3 Side Panel

Figure 2.2.3-1 Left Side Panel


2-10

2.3 Power Connection 2.3.1 Power Requirements

For normal operation of the BERTWave, use the power voltage range described below.

Table 2.3.1-1 Power Requirements

Power source Voltage range Frequency 100 Vac system 100 to 120 V 50 to 60 Hz 200 Vac system 200 to 240 V 50 to 60 Hz

Switching between 100 and 200 V systems is automatic.

CAUTION Supplying power exceeding the above range may result in electrical shock, fire, failure, or malfunction.

2.3 Power Connection

2-11

2

Before U

se

2.3.2 Connecting Power Cord Insert the power plug into an outlet, and connect the other end to the power inlet on the rear panel. To ensure that the instrument is earthed, always use the supplied 3-pin power cord, and insert the plug into an outlet with an earth terminal.

WARNING Always connect the instrument to a properly grounded outlet. Do not use the instrument with an extension cord or transformer that does not have a ground wire.

If the instrument is connected to an ungrounded outlet, there is a risk of receiving a fatal electric shock. In addition, the peripheral devices connected to the instrument may be damaged.

Unless otherwise specified, the signal-connector ground terminal, like an external conductor of the coaxial connector, of the instrument is properly grounded when connecting the power cord to a grounded outlet. Connect the ground terminal of DUT to a ground having the same potential before connecting with the instrument. Failure to do so may result in an electric shock, fire, failure, or malfunction.

CAUTION If an emergency arises causing the instrument to fail or malfunction, disconnect the instrument from the power supply by disconnecting either end of the power cord.


2-12

2.4 Connecting Peripheral Devices USB devices USB devices such as mouse, keyboard, storage, etc., can be connected to the front-panel and left side panel USB connector. No panel operations are required before removing USB devices from the BERTWave. USB devices can be removed at any time as long as no files are being written to or read from the USB device. External Monitor Connect an external monitor to the connector of the left-side panel monitor. The supported monitor resolutions are 1280×768 dot or more. Ethernet Connect to the Ethernet connectors on the left side panel. Either one of two connectors can be used, but each connector must have a different IP address. To set the connector IP address, refer to Section 2.14 “Setting Interface for Remote Control”. However, when cables are connected to both connectors, remote control can be performed from one connector. When using the Ethernet cable, select a category-5 or better crossover cable. Keyboard The PS/2 Keyboard connector is the purple connector on the left side panel. USB keyboards are connected to the USB connector. Mouse The PS/2 mouse connector is the right green connector on the left side panel. USB keyboards are connected to the USB connector.

2.5 Connecting Remote Control Devices

2-13

2

Before U

se

2.5 Connecting Remote Control Devices Ethernet Connects to the connector on the either up or down side of the two Ethernet connectors on the left side panel. Use a category-5 or better crossover cable. GPIB GPIB can be used when the GPIB Option 030 is installed. Connect the cable to the rear-panel GPIB connector.


2-14

2.6 Cautions on Handling Optical Fiber Cables Optical fiber cables may degrade in performance or be damaged if handled improperly.

Note the following points when handling them.

CAUTION Do not pull the cable when removing the connector.

Doing so may break the optical fiber inside the cable, or remove the cable sheath from the optical connector.

CAUTION Do not excessively bend, fold, or pinch an optical fiber cable.

Doing so may break the optical fiber inside the cable. Keep the bend radius of an optical fiber cable at 30 mm or more. If the radius is less, optical fiber cable loss will increase.

2.6 Cautions on Handling Optical Fiber Cables

2-15

2

Before U

se

CAUTION Do not excessively pull on or twist an optical fiber cable.

Also, do not hang anything by using a cable. Doing so may break the optical fiber inside the cable.

CAUTION Be careful not to hit the end of an optical connector against anything hard such as the floor or a desk by dropping the optical fiber cable.

Doing so may damage the connector end and increase connection loss.

WARNING Do not touch the end of a broken optical fiber cable.

The broken optical fiber may pierce the skin, causing injury.

CAUTION Do not disassemble optical connectors.

Doing so may cause part to break or the performance to degrade.


2-16

2.7 Connecting Coaxial Cable Connect the coaxial cable to the BERTWave coaxial connector.

Note the following precautions when handling coaxial cable.

CAUTION • Use the correct coaxial cable for connecting to the

coaxial connectors of this instrument, which are either SMA or K connectors. If the wrong coaxial cable for the connector is used, there is a risk of damage to the connector.

• Tighten coaxial connectors to the correct torque. If the coaxial connector is over tightened, there is a risk of damage to the connector, which may prevent disconnection. If the connector is not sufficiently tightened, correct measurement may be impossible.

• The outer conductor and inner core of a coaxial cable can sometimes become charged like a condenser. Discharge any possible charges by touching the outer conductor and inner cores to something metallic.

• When operating the BERTWavet with other equipment, arrange so that the co-axial cables are not accidentally pulled; if they are pulled accidentally, BERTWave may be dragged off the bench top and damaged.

• Keep the protective caps fitted to unused coaxial connector.

WARNING • Always use a coaxial cable with sufficiently low loss

matching the signal to be measured. Correct measurement may be impossible if the cable loss is too large.

• Use a coaxial cable with an impedance of 50 Ω. Correct measurement may be impossible if the impedance is incorrect.

2.8 Installing Optical Transceiver

2-17

2

Before U

se

2.8 Installing Optical Transceiver An optical transceiver can be used by adding Option 050 or Option 051.

The optical transceiver can be installed or removed (hot-swap) while the BERTWave power is on.

2.8.1 Installing Optical Transceiver 1. Check that the optical transceiver specifications for wavelength and

bit rate match the test conditions. 2. Hold both sides of the optical transceiver between thumb and

forefinger. 3. Insert the optical transceiver into the slot on the front panel until it

clicks. 4. Remove the protective cover from the optical transceiver. 5. Lift the lever to lock the optical transceiver.

Figure 2.8.1-1 Installing Optical Transceiver


2-18

CAUTION

• When inserting the optical transceiver, set the optical transceiver lever to the up position. If the optical transceiver is inserted with the lever down, sometimes the transceiver may not be fully inserted.

• Always fit the protective cover to the installed optical transceiver. If dust enters the optical connector, it may cause measurement problems.

• Optical transceiver can be damaged by electrostatic discharge. To prevent risk of ESD, touch the frame ground connector on the front panel.

• If the optical connector ferrule is dirty, clean it as described in section 10.3 “Cleaning Optical Connector Ferrule”.

• Do not look directly into the optical connector when a fiber cable is not connected, because laser light from the optical transceiver may enter your eyes.

• Before inserting and removing the optical transceiver always disconnect any connected optical fiber cable. If the transceiver is inserted while optical fiber is connected, there is a risk of damage to the optical connector of the optical transceiver or to the fiber.

• Do not touch the optical connectors between the optical transceiver and the BERTWave. If they are touched there is a risk of damage to the optical transceiver.

2.8 Installing Optical Transceiver

2-19

2

Before U

se

CAUTION • Operation is not assured if an optical transceiver other

than those recommended by Anritsu is used. Only use recommended modules. Refer to the Anritsu homepage at http://www.anritsu.com/ for the list of recommended modules.

• The internal connector for optical transceivers has an insertion/removal life span of 100 times. If optical transceivers are inserted/removed more than 100 times, aging wear may cause connection failures. Make sure to observe this specification.


2-20

2.8.2 Removing Optical Transceiver 1. Set the optical output of the optical transceiver to OFF. 2. Turn off the signal input to the Tx Data In connector. 3. Disconnect the optical fiber from the optical transceiver. 4. Tilt the optical transceiver lever towards you. 5. Pull the optical transceiver out by the lever.

Note:

The optical transceiver cannot be detached without tilting the lever towards you.

2.9 Turning Power On/Off

2-21

2

Before U

se

2.9 Turning Power On/Off 2.9.1 Power-on

1. Connect the power cord plug, referring to Section 2.3 “Power Connection”. The BERTWave enters the standby state and the power switch lamp lights orange.

2. Press the power switch. The power lamp lights green and the Windows start-up begins.

3. In 30 seconds, the selector screen is displayed.

Figure 2.9.1-1 Selector Screen

Notes: If no button on the selector screen is touched within 15 s, the [Main Application] is executed by default.

Do not press the power switch while the start-up screen is displayed, otherwise the BERTWave Control software may not start normally.


2-22

The Selector screen buttons execute the following processing:

[Main Application]: Displays the application screen where you can configure settings for the PPG, ED, sampling scope, and optical interface and view the measurement results. For details on how to use the screen, refer to the following chapters: • Chapter 4, Screen Operation • Chapter 5, Generating Pulse Signal • Chapter 6, Measuring Bit Error • Chapter 7, Observing Waveform • Chapter 8, Operating Optical Interface

[Setup Utility]: Displays the setup window where you can configure the remote interface, view the configuration and version of the software and update the software.

[Exit]: Displays Windows Explorer where you can work with files saved by the Main Application.

[Shut down]: Shuts down the power.

2.9 Turning Power On/Off

2-23

2

Before U

se

2.9.2 Power-off Turning off the power in the Selector screen 1. Touch [System Menu] in the application screen. 2. Touch [Exit]. 3. Touch [Yes], and the selector screen appears. 4. Touch [Shut Down] at the Selector screen. 5. A dialog confirming shutdown is displayed. Touching the [OK]

button quits Windows. The green Power switch lamp goes off, the standby lamp lights orange, and the power is turned off.

Turning off the power by shutting down Windows 1. Touch [Main Application] at the Selector screen. 2. The measurement screen is displayed, and then touch [System

Menu] on the upper-right of the screen. 3. Touch [Minimize]. 4. Touch [Start] menu of the Windows task bar. 5. Touch [Shut Down]. 6. Confirm that [Shut Down] is displayed and touch [OK]. 7. The green Power switch lamp goes off, the sand by lamp lights

orange, and the power is turned off. Forced shutdown Press the Power switch for 4 seconds or more. The green Power switch lamp goes off, the sand by lamp lights orange, and the power is turned off. Note:

• Only use forced shutdown as an emergency operation when key, mouse, and keyboard operations fail. A fault may have occurred if the power cannot be turned off even by pressing the Power switch for 4 or more seconds. Unplug the power cord from the power outlet and contact your Anritsu Service and Sales Office or agent.

• If the power plug is removed while the panel access lamp is lit, the data may not be saved correctly. Depending on the type of data that was not saved correctly, sometimes the equipment may not start correctly at the next power-on. Remove the power plug after cutting the power.


2-24

2.10 Using Touch Panel and Rotary Knob The BERTWave can be operated using the touch panel and rotary knob.

Touch Panel Operation • The touch panel has the same hardness as a 3H lead pencil. Touching

the screen with anything sharp or hard will damage it. • Touch the required spot on the touch panel once. If two spots are

touched simultaneously, the intermediate point will be detected.

In this manual, touching the touch panel with a finger is called “touch.”

Rotary Knob Operation • Pressing the Rotary Knob performs the same operation as pressing the

Enter key. • Don’t pull or hit the Rotary Knob, otherwise it may be damaged.

2.11 Setting Control Panel

2-25

2

Before U

se

2.11 Setting Control Panel The BERTWave is set to the factory defaults for optimal measurement. Changing the Windows settings is outside the scope of operation warranty. In addition, the performance may drop or functions may not operate correctly if the Windows settings are changed. Read the general notes in this section carefully when changes to the Windows settings are required.

CAUTION BERTWave operations are not guaranteed if Windows default settings are changed, or if a program not guaranteed by Anritsu Corporation is installed.

BERTWave operations are not guaranteed if program installation or update, including Windows Update, is performed.

Changing registries may cause abnormal operations.

2.11.1 Displaying Windows Desktop Connect a mouse and a keyboard to operate Windows. Use the accessory USB mouse and a compatible USB keyboard.

The Windows desktop can be displayed as described below. To display the BERTWave application again, touch [MX210000A] on the Windows taskbar.

When using touch panel and mouse: 1. Touch [Main Application] at the Selector screen. 2. The measurement screen is displayed. Touch [System Menu] on the

left upper side of the screen. 3. Touch [Minimize]. When using keyboard: Press the Windows + [D]. All windows will be minimized to display the Windows desktop.


2-26

2.11.2 Setting Control Panel The system time, external display settings and touch panel settings are set at the Windows Control Panel. Do not change any settings other than those listed in Table 2.11.2-1.

Table 2.11.2-1 Description of Control Panel

Icon Description

Date & Time • Change the date, time and time zone as necessary. • Internet Time is set to off at factory shipment. Operation may be affected if

this setting is changed.

Display Intel® GMA Driver for Mobile • This setting must be changed when connecting an external monitor to the

BERTWave connector. For details, refer to Section 2.12 “Using External Monitor” for details.

• Changing the screen resolution, refresh rate or power management, or enabling the screen saver may cause abnormal BERTWave operation. Figure 2.11.2-1 shows the initial Display Settings.

Power Options • The setting of the auto monitor off function (Turn off monitor) can be

changed. • The setting of the power off function for hard disks (Turn off hard disks) is

set to Never by default. Do not change the setting. • For any other settings in the Power Options Properties dialog box, do not

change from default. Otherwise, BERTWave cannot operate normally after resuming from hibernation.

Touch Panel • This calibrates the touch panel detection point. For details refer to Section

10.6 “Touch Panel Position Calibration”.

Figure 2.11.2-1 Initial Display Settings

2.12 Using External Monitor

2-27

2

Before U

se

2.12 Using External Monitor This section explains how to display the BERTWave screen on the external monitor.

1. Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector on the left side panel of the BERTWave.

2. Set the BERTWave and monitor power to On. 3. Touch [Main Application] at the Selector screen. 4. Touch [System Menu]. 5. Touch [Minimize]. 6. Touch [Start] on the right bottom of the screen. 7. Touch [Control Panel]. 8. Touch [Intel(R) GMA Driver for Module] twice to display the

following monitor setting screen.

9. Touch [Multiple Displays]. 10. Touch [Display Setting]. 11. Touch [Monitor].


2-28

12. Touch [Aspect Ratio Options] to open a separate window. 13. Touch [Maintain Aspect Ratio]. 14. Touch [OK] to close a separate window. 15. Touch [OK]. 16. The dialog is displayed to confirm the changed settings on the

desktop. Touch [OK].

17. Touch [MX210000A] on the task bar. When the monitor is disconnected from the monitor output connector, the screen shown in step 8 returns to [Single Display].

2.13 Configuring Power Options

2-29

2

Before U

se

2.13 Configuring Power Options You can increase the life of the monitor by using the standby feature in Windows. Follow the procedure described below to set to turn off the monitor after a specified period of time.

1. Touch [Start] on the right bottom of the screen. 2. Touch [Control Panel]. 3. Touch [Power Option] twice.

The Power Options Properties dialog box appears as shown below.

4. In the [Turn off monitor] list, touch a period of time you want to turn off the monitor after the specified period time.

5. Touch [OK].

CAUTION In the Power Options Properties dialog box, select “Never” from both of [Turn off hard disks] and [System standby] lists.

Failure to do so may interrupt measurement or cause malfunction when the BERTWave enters into a standby state.


2-30

2.14 Setting Interface for Remote Control This section describes how to set the type and address of the interface used for remote control of BERTWave.

To display setup window 1. Touch [Setup Utility] in the selector screen.

2. Touch [Remote Control]. The window to set the remote interface is displayed.

2.14 Setting Interface for Remote Control

2-31

2

Before U

se

To set GPIB 1. In the Active Interface area of the Remote Control window, touch

the button to change the button name to GPIB. If Option 030 is not installed, GPIB is not displayed.

2. Touch the GPIB Address text box. A dialog for inputting the address

is displayed. 3. Enter the GPIB address from 1 to 30. 4. To shorten the time from sending the remote command until

receiving the results, select the [Remote High Speed Response] check box.

5. Touching the [Apply] button completes the settings. Touching the [Exit] button deletes the settings made at steps 3 and 4.

6. Touching the [Protect] button protects the GPIB address value from being edited easily. Use this button as required.


2-32

To set Ethernet 1. In the Active Interface area of the Remote Control window, touch the

button to change the button name to Ethernet.

2. Select the Ethernet connector to use. The top IP address is the address of the Ethernet connector on the top side of the left side panel. The bottom IP address is the address of the Ethernet connector on the bottom side of the left side panel.

3. Set the selected IP address, Subnet Mask and Gateway for the Ethernet connector. Touch the text box to open the address input window.

4. Enter the IP address and sub-net mask. The Gateway IP address can be omitted.

5. Touch the Port Number text box to open the port input window. 6. Set the number in the following range:

Port Number: 1024 to 5001 7. Touch the [Apply] button to complete the settings.

Touching [Exit] deletes the settings. 8. Touching the [Protect] button protects the IP address and other

values from being edited easily.Use this button as required. Note:

Do not set the following IP address: 192.168.1.0 to 192.168.1.255

2.15 Precautions for Preventing Damage

2-33

2

Before U

se

2.15 Precautions for Preventing Damage Before connecting signals to the input and output connectors of the BERTWave, always check that the signals are within the specified voltage range. If an out-of-range signal is input, the BERTWave may be damaged.

CAUTION • Use a 50 Ω/GND terminator for the device to be

connected to the output connector.

• Never open the case of BERTWave. If you open it and BERTWave has failed or sufficient performance cannot be obtained, Anritsu may not accept a request for repair.

2.15.1 Precautions on Electrostatic Discharge and Electrical Overstress

CAUTION • When signals are input to BERTWave, avoid excessive

voltage beyond the rating. Otherwise, the circuit may be damaged.

• Never feed any current or input signals to the output connector.

• As a countermeasure against static electricity, connect the ground structures (for example, frame ground) of external devices, including experimental circuits, to the ground terminal of BERTWave by using ground wires before connecting the IO connector. Shorten ground wires as much as possible.

• To the input terminal of BERTWave, connect an attenuator that can protect BERTWave without affecting measurement results. An attenuator with a bandwidth of 25 GHz or more is recommended.

• The outer conductor and core of the coaxial cable may become charged as a capacitor. Use any metal to discharge the outer conductor and core before use.


2-34

CAUTION • The BERTWave has many important circuits and parts

including hybrid ICs. These parts are extremely sensitive to static electric charges, so never open the case of BERTWave.

• To prevent the risk of damage to BERTWave from static electric charges, always use an antistatic mat on the workbench and ensure that the operator wears a grounded wrist strap. Always ground the wrist strap to the workbench antistatic mat or the frame ground of BERTWave.

• Always use 3-pin power cords when connecting external devices, including experimental circuits, to AC outlets. Connect the ground wires of external devices and BERTWave to a common ground.

• Turn on the external devices, including experimental circuits, before connecting them to BERTWave. Use coaxial cables when connecting. On the contrary, disconnect the coaxial cables between external devices and BERTWave before turning off the external devices.


2-35

2

Before U

se

BERTWave

Coaxial Cable

Use 3-pin power cords.

AC Outlets

Be sure to connect the ground structure (like frame ground) and the ground terminal with a ground wire.

DUT

DUT: Device Under Test

Connect to a common ground.

Connect a protective attenuator, within the range not affecting results of measurement. (Recommended bandwidth: 25 GHz or more)

Figure 2.15.1-1 Example of Connection with DUT

Follow the procedure below to check for electrical overstress to BERTWave before connecting DUT (Device Under Test).

Checking the ground connection using a tester 1. Connect DUT and the ground terminal of BERTWave with a ground

wire. 2. Turn on the power to DUT and BERTWave without connecting DUT

to the I/O terminal of BERTWave. 3. Measure the voltage between DUT’s ground structure and ground

terminal of BERTWave with a tester in AC mode, and confirm the voltage is 0 V.

If the voltage measured in step 3 is not 0 V, there is a possibility that BERTWave and DUT may not be connected to a common ground. In this condition, do not connect the I/O terminal of BERTWave and DUT. Failure to do so may cause damage to BERTWave due to a voltage exceeding a rated value. Review the ground wiring by, for example, changing the location of the DUT’s ground wire connected to BERTWave so that the voltage measured in step 3 to be 0 V.


2-36

Note: If it is impossible to connect a ground wire to DUT, follow the instructions below so that the voltage to be measured in step 3 becomes 0 V. If the voltage measured in step 3 is not 0 V, check that the 3-pin power cords described in 2.3.2 “Connecting Power Cord” are used for BERTWave and DUT. When the 3-pin power cords are used, take the following actions:

• There may be a disconnection in the ground terminal of the used power cord. Replace it with a different 3-pin power cord.

• There is a possibility that the ground terminal inside the AC outlets to which the 3-pin power cords of BERTWave and DUT are connected is not connected to ground. Connect the 3-pin power cords to different AC outlets.

Checking the output waveform with an oscilloscope 1. Connect the DUT and the oscilloscope using a cable with an

impedance of 50 Ω. 2. Set the input impedance of the oscilloscope to 50 Ω. 3. Observe the waveform with the oscilloscope, and perform the

following operations to check the observed waveform for surge voltage exceeding the rated voltage*. There is a risk of damage if a voltage of ±2 V is generated. • Turning On/Off the DUT power • Outputting a pulse from DUT • Connecting and disconnecting the cable between DUT and the

BERTWave *: Rated voltages are as follows:

ED 1 ED 2 Ch A Ch B MP2100A ±2 V 1 Vp-p – – MP2101A 1 Vp-p 1 Vp-p – – MP2102A – – ±2 V ±2 V


2-37

2

Before U

se

2.15.2 Precautions When Using Bias-T When connecting an external device such as a Bias-T to the output connectors of the BERTWave, if the output signal includes any DC voltage, variations in the output of the DC power supply or load may change the level of the output signal, risking damage to the internal circuits.

CAUTION • Do not connect or disconnect any external devices

while DC voltage is impressed.

• Only switch DC power sources ON and OFF when all equipment connections have been completed.

Figure 2.15.2-1 Bias-T Connection Example

DUT

DC power source

50Ω

Bias-T

Coaxial cable

Coaxial cable

Set output ON/OFF after completing connections.

To protect DUT and PPG

Do not connect/disconnect while DC voltage impressed.

BERTWave

Be sure to connect the ground structure (like frame ground) and the ground terminal with a ground wire.


2-38.

<Recommended procedure> Measurement Preparation 1: 1. Connect the BERTWave and all equipment. 2. Set the DC power supply output to ON. 3. Set the BERTWave output to ON, and start measurement. Measurement Preparation 2: 1. Set the BERTWave output to OFF. 2. Set the DC power supply output to ON. 3. Disconnect the BERTWave and all equipment, or change the DUT

connections. Since even unforeseen fluctuations in DC voltage and load (open or short circuits at the BERTWave output side and changes caused by using a high-frequency probe, etc.) can damage the DUT and the BERTWave, we recommend connecting a 50 Ω resistance in series with the DC terminal of the Bias-T to prevent risk of damage.

Chapter 3 Connecting with DUT

3-1

3

Con

nectin

g with

DU

T

The connection methods depend upon either optical or electrical DUT interface. When changing the optical level input to the DUT such as the reception sensibility measurement, connect other measurement instruments such as optical attenuator. This chapter explains how to connect the BERTWave and the DUT.

3.1 Measuring Bit Error Rate ........................................... 3-2 3.2 Measuring Waveform ................................................. 3-8 3.3 Simultaneously Measuring Bit Error Rate and

Waveform ................................................................... 3-12


3-2

3.1 Measuring Bit Error Rate When the DUT input/output signal is electrical:

1. Connect the DUT input terminal to PPG1 Data Out and Data Out using the coaxial cable. If only one DUT input connector is conveniently available, connect to the PPG1 Data Out. Also, connect the coaxial terminator, which is attached to the MP2100A standard configuration, to the Data Out.

2. Connect the DUT output terminator to ED1 Data In and Data In using the coaxial cable. If only one DUT output connector is conveniently available, connect to the ED1 Data In. Also, connect the coaxial terminator, which is attached to the MP2100A standard configuration, to the Data In.

Note:

If the difference between the DC offset component of the DUT signals and the input offset value of the corresponding sampling scope is +/–200mV or more, it may affect the ED1 reception sensitivity while using it in the MP2100A.

Set the DC offset component of the DUT signals to the offset value of the sampling scope before error rate measurement. For setting procedure of offset value, refer to 7.10.2 “Adjusting Vertical-axis of Screen”. When the DUT is AC coupling, the DC offset component of the DUT signals is 0 mV.

The MP2101A is free from this phenomenon, for it is without sampling scope.

3.1 Measuring Bit Error Rate

3-3

3

Con

nectin

g with

DU

T

MP2100A BERT Wave

PPG1 Output Terminal ED1 Input Terminal

DUT

Figure 3.1-1 Making Connections Using Electrical Signal


3-4

When DUT is Optical Receiver:

Use Option 050/051 and follow the connection procedures.

1. Connect the PPG1 Data Out and Tx Data In using a coaxial cable.

2. Connect the DUT input connector to the Optical transceiver using an optical fiber.

3. Connect the DUT output connector to ED1 Data In and Data In using a coaxial cable. If only one DUT output connect is conveniently available, connect to ED 1 Data In. Do not connect anything to Data In.

PPG1 Output Terminal

ED1 Input Terminal

Optical Fiber

Coaxial

Cable

Tx Data In

Optical Input/Output Connector

DUT

MP2100A BERT Wave

Figure 3.1-2 Connection when DUT is Optical Receiver


3-5

3

Con

nectin

g with

DU

T

When the DUT changes the signal level using the optical receiver:

When measuring the sensibility of the optical receiver, connect to the optical attenuator to change the signal level input to the DUT. Connect to the optical power meter to measure the optical level. Use the optical coupler to bifurcate the optical signal into the optical power meter and DUT.

1. Connect the PPG1 Data and Tx Data In using a coaxial cable.

2. Connect the DUT output connector and ED 1 Data In/Data In using a coaxial cable.

3. Connect the optical output connector of the MP2100A optical transceiver to the input connector of the optical attenuator using an optical fiber.

4. Connect the output connector of the optical attenuator to the optical coupler.

5. Connect one end of the optical coupler to the input connector of the DUT.

6. Connect another end of the optical coupler to the optical power meter.

When measuring the sensitivity of the optical receiver, use the connections as shown in Figure 3.1-3.


3-6

ED1 Input Terminal

Optical Fiber Coaxial

Cable

Tx Data In

Optical Attenuator

Optical PowerMeter

Optical

Coupler


DUT

MP2100A BERT Wave

Figure 3.1-3 Connection for Changing Optical Level Input

to Optical Receiver


3-7

3

Con

nectin

g with

DU

T

When the DUT is an optical transmitter:

Use Option 050/051 and follow the connection procedures.

1. Connect the PPG1 Data Out and Data Out to the DUT input terminal using a coaxial cable.

2. Connect the DUT output connector to optical transceiver for an optical input connector using an optical fiber.

3. Connect the Rx Data Out to ED1 Data In using a coaxial cable. Do not connect anything to Data In


ED1 Input Terminal

Optical Fiber

Coaxial Cable

Rx Data Out

Optical Input Connector

DUT

MP2100A BERT Wave

Figure 3.1-4 Connection when DUT is Optical Transmitter


3-8

3.2 Measuring Waveform When the MP2100A DUT input/output signal is electrical:

Input the output of the PPG in the MP2100A to the DUT, and then measure the DUT output using the sampling scope.

1. Connect the DUT input terminal to PPG1 Data Out/Data Out using a coaxial cable. If only one DUT input connector is conveniently available, connect to the PPG1 Data Out. Also, connect the coaxial terminator included as a standard accessory to the Data Out.

2. Connect the DUT output terminal to ED1 Data In (A In)/Data In (B In) using a coaxial cable. If only one DUT output connector is conveniently available, connect to the ED1 Data In (A In). Also, connect the coaxial terminator included as a standard accessory to the Data In (B In).

PPG1 Output Terminal ED1 Input Terminal

DUT

MP2100A BERT Wave

Figure 3.2-1 Electrical Signal Used for DUT Input/Output (MP2100A)

3.2 Measuring Waveform

3-9

3

Con

nectin

g with

DU

T

When the MP2100A DUT is an optical transceiver:

When Opt-003 is selected, the output waveform of the optical transceiver can be measured using the O/E converter.

Input the output of the PPG in the MP2100A to the DUT, and then connect the DUT optical output to the O/E converter.

1. Connect the DUT input terminal to PPG1 Data Out/Data Out using a coaxial cable. If only one DUT input connect is conveniently available, connect to the PPG1 Data Out. Also, connect the coaxial terminator included as a standard accessory to the Data Out.

2. Connect the DUT optical output connector to O/E Data In using an optical fiver.


Optical Fiber

Coaxial

Cable

O/E Data In

DUT

MP2100A BERT Wave

Figure 3.2-2 Optical Transceiver Used as DUT (MP2100A-003)


3-10

When the MP2102A DUT is an optical transceiver:

When Opt-023 is selected, the output waveform of the optical transceiver can be measured using the O/E converter.

Input the PPG output to the DUT, and then connect the PPG trigger signal to the MP2102A. Connect the DUT optical output to the O/E converter.

1. Connect the PPG clock to Trigger CLK In using a coaxial cable.

2. Connect the PPG output to the DUT input connector using a coaxial cable.

3. Connect the DUT output to O/E Data In using an optical fiber

Trigger Clk In

Optical Fiber

Coaxial Cable

O/E Data In

Pulse Pattern Generator

Data DataCLK Out

DUT

MP2102A BERT Wave SS

Figure 3.2-3 Optical Transceiver Used as DUT (MP2102A-023)


3-11

3

Con

nectin

g with

DU

T

When the MP2102A DUT is an optical transceiver (using clock recovery)

The trigger clock can be generated from the received signal when the MP2102A-023 is installed and Opt-055 is added.

1. Connect the O/E Monitor Out to CRU In using a coaxial cable.

2. Connect the CRU Out to Trigger Clk In using a coaxial cable.

3. Connect the PPG output to the DUT input connector using a coaxial cable.

4. Connect the DUT output and O/E Data In using an optical fiber.

Trigger Clk In

Optical Fiber Coaxial Cable

O/E Data In


Data DataCLK Out

CRU Out

DUT

CRU In

O/E Monitor Out

MP2102A BERT Wave SS

Figure 3.2-4 Optical Transceiver Used as DUT (MP2102A-023,055)


3-12

3.3 Simultaneously Measuring Bit Error Rate and

Waveform When the optical transceiver is set as the DUT, the reception sensibility of the optical receiver and the waveform of the optical transmitter can be measured simultaneously. To measure the reception sensibility of the optical receiver, the bit error rate must be measured using the measurement type that can change the optical level input to the DUT.

When using the MP2100A-003+005, and 050/051, follow the below connection procedures.

1. Connect the PPG2 Data Out to Tx Data In using a coaxial cable.

2. Connect the DUT output connect to ED2 Data In/Data In using a coaxial cable.

3. Connect the optical output connector of the MP2100A optical transceiver to the input connector of the optical attenuator using an optical fiber.

4. Connect the optical coupler to the output connector of the optical attenuator.

5. Connect one end of the optical coupler to the DUT input connector.

6. Connect another end of the optical coupler to the optical power meter.

7. Connect the DUT input connector to PPG1 Data Out and Data Out using the coaxial cable.

8. Connect the DUT optical output connector to O/E Data In using an optical fiber.

3.3 Simultaneously Measuring Bit Error Rate and Waveform

3-13

3

Con

nectin

g with

DU

T

ED2 Input Terminal

Optical Fiber Coaxial

Cable

Tx Data In

O/E Data In

Optical Attenuator

Optical PowerMeter

Optical

Coupler

PPG1 Output

Terminal

PPG2 Output

Terminal

DUT

MP2100A BERT Wave

Figure 3.3-1 When Measuring Bit Error Rate and Waveform Simultaneously (MP2100A-003,005,050/051)

Chapter 3 Outline

3-14.

Chapter 4 Screen Operation

4-1

4

Screen

Operation

This chapter explains the screen name and common operating method of the BERTWave series.

4.1 Screen Configuration .................................................... 4-2 4.2 Data Input Method ........................................................ 4-6 4.3 Setting System Menu .................................................... 4-9 4.4 Multi-channel Signal Output ........................................ 4-16 4.5 Simultaneous Measurement Start and Stop

at Multi-channels ......................................................... 4-17 4.6 Displaying Date/Time and Status ............................... 4-18 4.7 Procedures at System Alarm ...................................... 4-19


4-2

4.1 Screen Configuration Touch [Main Application] on the selector screen, and then the application screen is displayed. The application name is as shown in Figure 4.1-1.

System Menu All Measurement Stop Button

All Measurement Start Button

All Output off Button

Status Display

Date/Time Display Top Menu

Measurement ScreenDisplay Area

All Output on Button

Figure 4.1-1 Application Name (MP2100A-003,005,050)

4.1 Screen Configuration

4-3

4

Screen

Operation

Table 4.1-1 Setting Items on Application Window

Name Description

All Measurements Starts and stops up to two channels of the ED and two channels of sampling waveform data at the same time.

All Outputs Displays when using the MP2100A/ MP2101A. Sets the PPG channel 1 and 2 and optical transceiver output to On/Off.

System Menu The following setting button can be displayed: Device internal signal connection Buzzer Unloading application File operation Saving screen image Setting and unsetting panel lock Confirming system alarm and deleting record Initializing device settings Minimizing screen display

Top Menu Selects the measurement device to be operated. The displayed measurement device varies depending on the model name and options.

Status display The following four kinds of the status are displayed: System: System alarm occurs Remote: Remotely controlled Measure: Measuring bit error rate and obtaining waveform data of sampling scope Output: Signal output to the connector of the PPG and optical transceiver This displays when using the MP2100A/ MP2101A.

Measurement screen display field

Displays the measurement screen selected at the top menu.

Date/Time display Displays date and time set in the BERTWave.


4-4

Depending on the installed options, buttons available on the top menu vary. The following table shows the relation between available buttons and installed options.

Table 4.1-2 Buttons Displayed on Top Menu (MP2100A)

Displayed Button MP2100A BERTWave Option Number

001 003 005 007 050 051

PPG/ED Ch1 – – – PPG/ED Ch2 – – – – – XFP – – – – – SFP+ – – – – –

O/E – – – – EYE/Pulse Scope – – –


Displayed Button

MP2101A BERTWave PE Option Number

011 012 050 051

PPG/ED Ch1 – – PPG/ED Ch2 – – – XFP – – – SFP+ – – –

O/E – – – – EYE/Pulse Scope – – – –


Displayed Button

MP2102A BERTWave SS

Option Number

021 023

PPG/ED Ch1 – – PPG/ED Ch2 – – XFP – – SFP+ – – O/E – EYE/Pulse Scope

4.1 Screen Configuration

4-5

4

Screen

Operation

The following buttons will appear when software option is added to MP2100A or MP2102A. Available software varies according to the mainframe.

Table 4.1-5 Buttons Displayed on Top Menu (Additional Software)

Displayed Button Additional software

MP

2100

A

MP

2101

A

MP

2102

A

Jitter MX210001A Jitter Analysis Software

–

Transmission MX210002A Transmission Analysis Software

– –

Touching a Top Menu button displays the child screen for displaying the measurement conditions and results. Refer to the following chapters for the child screen operations. PPG/ED Ch1, PPG/ED Ch2: Chapter 5, 6 SFP+/XFP: Chapter 8 O/E: Chapter 8 EYE/Pulse Scope: Chapter 7 Refer to the manual below for how to operate the software. Jitter: "MX210001A Jitter Analysis Software Operation Manual" Transmission: “MX210002A Transmission Analysis Software Operation

Manual"


4-6

4.2 Data Input Method The measurement setting item selection, numeric data, and character data are input from the panel displayed on the screen. The displayed panel varies depending on the input data types. Arrow Key Entry Panel

Touch the numeric data area when entering the numeric data of the bit rate or power voltage. The arrow key entry panel as shown in Figure 4.2-1 is displayed. Touch the right and left arrow keys and select the line to change the value. Touch the up and down arrow keys or turn the rotary knob to change the value.

Shifting digits

Increasing value

Decreasing value

Close button

Button for switching

numeric value entry/

arrow key entry

display

Data name

Data range

Figure 4.2-1 Arrow Key Entry Panel

4.2 Data Input Method

4-7

4

Screen

Operation

Numeric value entry panel

Touch the button for switching the display of the numeric value entry/ arrow key entry panel as shown in Figure 4.2-1, and then the numeric value entry panel as shown in Figure 4.2-2 is displayed. The key type, unit and input range displayed on the panel vary depending on the data. Touch the arrow key entry panel display button, and then the arrow key entry panel as shown in Figure 4.2-1 is displayed.

Data name

Fractional unit

Delete

Deleting one character

Enter

Data range

Close button

Arrow key entry panel display button

Figure 4.2-2 Numeric Value Entry Panel


4-8

Software Keyboard

When entering character string data such as file name, touch the exact character string directly. The keyboard as shown in Figure 4.2-3 is displayed, and then touch the key and enter the character. If you touch [Shift] or [Caps] once, all keys are locked. To unlock them, touch [Shift] or [Caps] again.

Deleting one character Cancel Determined Shifting cursor

Figure 4.2-3 Software Keyboard

Figure 4.2-4 Software Keyboard (Shift Locked)

Figure 4.2-5 Software Keyboard (Caps Key Locked)

4.3 Setting System Menu

4-9

4

Screen

Operation

4.3 Setting System Menu The following items can be set and confirmed at the system menu.

Saving measurement conditions and measurement results

Reading measurement conditions

Saving screen image

Initializing device settings

Buzzer

Confirming system alarm and deleting records

Setting panel lock

Enabling panel lock and remote display

Connection diagram of device internal signal

Minimizing screen display

Terminating application

To set the system menu, touch [System Menu] as shown in Figure 4.3-1.

Figure 4.3-1 System Menu


4-10

Saving measurement conditions and measurement results

1. Touch [Save] to display the Save panel.

2. Select the save data from the following: [All Setup] , [PPG/ED Ch1] , [PPG/ED Ch2] , [SFP+], [XFP], [EYE/Pulse Scope], [O/E], [Jitter], [Transmission] The displayed module varies with the model name and options.

3. When [PPG/ED Ch1], [PPG/ED Ch2], [EYE/Pulse Scope], [Jitter], or [Transmission] is saved, select the data type from the following: [Setting]: Measurement condition [Result]: Measurement result

4. The file name is displayed. When changing the displayed file name, touch the keyboard display button.

Close button

Software keyboard display button

5. Enter the file name using the software keyboard.

6. When saving the file name, touch [OK]. Also, when canceling the saving procedure, touch the close button.

The measurement condition file is saved in the following folder. C:\Program Files\Anritsu\MP2100A\MX21000A\UserData\Setting

The measurement result file is saved in the following folder. C:\Program Files\Anritsu\MP2100A\MX21000A\UserData\Result\CSV

C:\Program Files\Anritsu\MP2100A\MX21000A\UserData\Result\TXT

The CSV file cannot be read in the spreadsheet software. You can confirm the test file details on the test editor.


4-11

4

Screen

Operation

Reading measurement conditions from file

1. Touch [Open] to display the Open panel.

2. Select the target module form the following: [All], [PPG/ED Ch1], [PPG/ED Ch2], [SFP+], [XFP], [EYE/Pulse Scope], [O/E], [Jitter], [Transmission] The displayed module varies with the model name and options.

3. The file selection screen is displayed.

Close button

4. Touch the file to be read.

5. When reading the file, touch [OK]. On the other hand, when canceling the procedure, touch the close button.


4-12

Saving a screen to the image file

1. Touch [Screen Copy] . The file selection screen is displayed.

2. Touch the Drives button and the Directories display to set the saving destination folder. The file name is displayed in the Save to.

3. The file format to be saved is displayed in the right button of the file type. Touching the button can set the file format.

4. When inputting the file name, touch [Screen Keyboard] to set the file name.

5. When overwriting the existence file, touch the file name displayed in the File List.

6. Touch [OK] to save the screen file. When overwriting the screen file, the confirmation message is displayed.

When touching [Default Name/Root], the folder and file names are set to the initial values. The initial value of the folder is as follows. C:\Program Files\Anritsu\MP2100A\MX21000A\UserData\Screen Copy

The initial value of the file name is configured as date and time. For example, file 523 saved at 12:05:55 on 17 July 2010 will have the following file names: For [JPEG Files]: 17072010_120555523.jpg For [PNG Files]: 17072010_120555523.png


4-13

4

Screen

Operation

Initializing measurement conditions

1. Touch [Initialize]. Then, the dialog box indicating the initialization process is displayed.

2. Touch [OK] to initialize the measurement condition and touch [Cancel] to stop the initialization. When overwriting the screen file, the confirmation message is displayed.

Setting buzzer

This instrument can sound a buzzer when an error occurs at bit rate error measurement. 1. To sound the buzzer at panel operations, touch [Buzzer Off ].

2. The button display changes to [Buzzer On]. In this condition, the buzzer sounds when either of the following occurs:

Error at bit error rate measurement

System Alarm

3. Touch [Buzzer On] to release the buzzer. The button display changes to [Buzzer Off].

Buzzer Off display Buzzer On display

Figure 4.3-2 Buzzer Button

Displaying alarm

1. Touch [System Alarm]. The alarm occurred history is displayed on another window.

2. When closing the window, touch [OK]. On the other hand, when deleting the alarm history, touch [Clear].

Touch the Auto Popup button to set the display to [ON]. When Alarm occurs, the System Alarm screen is displayed automatically.


4-14

Figure 4.3-3 System Alarm Occurred Time

The displayed time indicates the time when alarm occurred first. If the multiple alarms occur, the time after the second alarm is not record.

Note：

When the system alarm occurs, the system alarm screen is displayed automatically. Also, when the next alarm occurs, the power supply is turned off after 10 seconds

Power

PPG/ED Fatal Temperature

EYE/Pulse Scope Fatal Temperature

Locking panel operation

Preventing changes to data by panel operations at menus other than the System Menu and by using the rotary knob is called panel locking. 1. Touch [Panel Lock] to lock the panel.

2. The screens other than the system menu, status display, and date/time display are shaded and displayed.

Even though the panel is locked, the system menu and power switch are enabled. If the panel is locked, the [Local/Panel Unlock] button at the system menu can be operated. When the BERTWave performs the measurement via a remote control, the panel is locked. Unlocking the panel

1. Touch [Local/Panel Unlock].

2. The Remote lamp at the status display goes off.


4-15

4

Screen

Operation

Displaying the device internal signal connection

1. Touch [Block Diagram].

2. The device internal block figure is displayed, so the clock and signal connection can be confirmed.

3. Touch [OK] or the close button, and then the block figure is closed.

Figure 4.3-4 Display Example of Block Figure

Minimizing the screen display

1. Touch [Minimize] to display the desk top. [MX210000A] is displayed on the task bar.

2. To display the screen, touch [MX210000A] on the task bar.

Terminating applications

1. Touch [Exit]. The dialog is displayed to confirm the application termination.

2. When terminating the applications, touch [Yes]. On the other hand, when canceling the application termination, touch [No].

3. The selector screen is displayed.


4-16

4.4 Multi-channel Signal Output The MP2100A/MP2101A can set the PPG channel 1 and 2 and optical transceiver output to ON/OFF at the same time.

To output signal of PPG and optical transceiver:

1. Touch [On] as shown in Figure 4.4-1.

2. The characters of [on] are changed to green and then the Output lamp for the status display is turned on.

Figure 4.4-1 All Outputs Button

The optical signal of the PPG and optical transceiver is output.

To stop the signal output from the PPG and optical transceiver:

1. Touch [off] as shown in Figure 4.4-1.

2. The characters of [on] are changed to white and then the Output lamp for the status display is turned off.

When outputting the signal to the Channel 1 and 2 connectors, the both signal outputs are stopped. Furthermore, the optical output of the optical transceiver is stopped as well.

Note:

All Output button is set to [off] after starting the Main Application at the Selector screen.

4.5 Simultaneous Measurement Start and Stop at Multi-channels

4-17

4

Screen

Operation

4.5 Simultaneous Measurement Start and Stop at

Multi-channels This instrument can sample waveform data for two channels simultaneously at error rate measurement of two channels.

To start simultaneous measurement, touch the [ ] key shown in Fig. 4.5-1 while the Measure lamp is lit.

To stop simultaneous measurement, touch the [ ] key shown in Fig. 4.5-1 while the Measure lamp is lit off.

Figure 4.5-1 All Measurements Button


4-18

4.6 Displaying Date/Time and Status To display date and time

Date and time is displayed on the upper right side of the screen. Date and time can be changed from the Windows control panel.

To display status

The following four kinds of lamps indicate the status.

System: System Alarm Remote: Remote Control Measure: Measuring bit error rate or acquiring waveform data of

sampling scope Output: Outputting signal to the connector of the PPG or optical

transceiver.

Figure 4.6-1 System Error Occurred

Figure 4.6-2 Remote Control

Figure 4.6-3 Displays at Bit Error Rate Measurement and Waveform

Data Capture

Figure 4.6-4 Display at Signal Output

4.7 Procedures at System Alarm

4-19

4

Screen

Operation

4.7 Procedures at System Alarm The following phenomenon cause a system alarm.

Power

Abnormal power supply The Power alarm is displayed when this system detects a low internal voltage. Windows shuts down automatically after this alarm is displayed. Before using this instrument, check that the voltage of the power supply meets the voltage specifications. If the voltage of the power supply is within specifications and the Power alarm is displayed, contact Anritsu or your sales agent.

PPG/ED Fatal Temperature

Eye/Pulse Scope Fatal Temperature

Eye/Pulse Scope Temperature

High temperature warning (Temperature, Fatal Temperature) When the internal temperature reaches 85°C, the temperature alarm is displayed. When Fatal Temperature is displayed, the power of this equipment is shut down. Verify that the ventilation openings are unobstructed and that the fan is running. Turn off the unit and allow the temperature to cool down. When the EYE/Pulse Scope Temperature is displayed, calibrate the MP2100A/ MP2101A/ MP2102A referring to 7.5 Calibrating Sampling Scope. If the fault is not resolved, and if the internal temperature reaches 90°C, the fatal temperature alarm is displayed and then the measurement power supply shut down automatically.

PPG/ED PLL Unlock

Clock Error (PLL Unlock) The PLL Unlock alarm is displayed when selecting Internal CLK, contact the Anritsu Technical Support Center or your local Anritsu representative.

PPG/ED Illegal Mode

Fatal mode (PPG/ED Illegal Mode) This error occurs when the software is not installed properly. If the PPG/ED Illegal Mode occurs, reinstall the software.

You can check the system alarm occurred time from [System Menu] – [System Alarm].

Chapter 4 Outline

4-20.

Chapter 5 Generating Pulse Signal

5-1

5

Gen

erating P

ulse S

ignals

To measure the bit error rate or monitor a waveform, first a signal for input to the device under test (DUT) must be generated. In these measurements, a pulse signal with a time cycle is used. This chapter explains how to generate the pulse pattern signal while setting the output waveform and data pattern of the PPG.

5.1 List of Setting Items ...................................................... 5-2 5.2 Setting Restrictions ....................................................... 5-9 5.3 Procedure for Generating Pulse Signal ...................... 5-10 5.4 Setting Reference Clock ............................................. 5-11 5.5 Setting Output Waveform ........................................... 5-16 5.6 Setting Patterns .......................................................... 5-20 5.7 Inserting Bit Error ........................................................ 5-25 5.8 Setting Sync Output .................................................... 5-26 5.9 Setting Clock Output ................................................... 5-30


5-2

5.1 List of Setting Items The following table items can be set using the PPG.

Table 5.1-1 Setting Items of PPG

Item Description

Data/XData Output Sets the signal output of the connector. Bit Rate When the bit rate standards are Variable,

Variable-1/2, Variable-1/4, Variable-1/8, Variable-1/16, Variable-1/32 or Variable-1/64, the bit rate can be set. The setting range varies with the settings of the bit rate standards.

Bit Rate Offset Changes bit rate in range of –100 to +100 ppm corresponding to value set at Bit Rate

Amplitude Sets the signal amplitude voltage output to the Data and Data connector.

External Attenuator Factor

Inputs attenuation amount when attenuator inserted at connector

Relative Displays the amplitude voltage calculated by the set value at External Attenuator Factor.

Test Pattern Selects the pattern from PRBS or Programmable Pattern. Sets the signal level of the Data connector responding to Pattern 1.

Programmable Pattern

When Test Pattern is set to Programmable Pattern, the selected pattern file name is displayed.

Data Length Displays the pattern length in the bit unit. Reference CLK Selects the clock to be used from the below

items: Internal: generating signal inside the device External: signal input to panel connector

External Clock Selects connector where clock supplied when using external clock

Sync Output Selects the signal output to the Sync Output connector.

Error Addition Sets bit error insertion Error Addition Rate When Error Addition Variation is Repeat,

the generating bit error rate is set. Insert Error When Error Addition Variation is Single,

insert the 1 bit error to the pattern. Relative Displays the amplitude voltage calculated by

the set value at External Attenuator Factor. Sync Output Selects the signal output to the Sync Output

connector.

a1187007

ノート注釈

a1187007 : Marked

5.1 List of Setting Items

5-3

5

Gen

erating P

ulse S

ignal

Table 5.1-1 Setting Items of Pulse PPG(Cont'd)

Item Description

Test Pattern Selects the pattern from PRBS or Programmable Pattern. Sets the signal level of the Data connector responding to Pattern 1.

Output Display Displays the signal output status for the Data Out and Data Out connector.

Bit Error Insertion Method

Sets whether to insert bit error continuously or one by one using screen operation.

Bit Rate Specifications

Selects the communication specifications complied with the bit rate.

Divide Ratio Indicates the ratio between the frequency of the internal frequency synthesizer and the bit rate When Reference CLK is set to [External] or [1/16 Clk], the divide rate can be set by becoming a button display.

To display the PPG setting screen

1. Touch [PPG/ED_Ch1] or [PPG/ED_Ch2] at the top menu.

2. Touch [PPG], and then Figure 5.1-1 is displayed.

3. Touch [Main], and then Figure 5.1-2 is displayed.

4. Touch [Expand], and then the screen is changed to Figure 5.1-1.

Figure 5.1-1 PPG Setting Panel

Screen size change button

Channel display

Pulse PatternGenerator tab


5-4

XData in Figure 5.1-1 indicates the Data Out connector on the front panel. For the display and operation of ED Result, refer to 6.6 “Measurement Result”.

Figure 5.1-2 PPG Setting Panel (Details)

Screen size change

buttonOutput switch

Bit rate

Bit rate

Bit rate standard

Amplitude

Pattern name

Pattern file name

Data length of Pattern (bit)

Reference clock

source

External

attenuation factor

Bit error insertion

setting

Bit error insertion

rate

Output

indicator

Bit error

insertion method

Positive logic /Negative logic

Sync signal source

External clock

input connector

Bit error insertion

button

Divide ratio


5-5

5

Gen

erating P

ulse S

ignal

The PPG setting range is as follows:

Amplitude 0.10 to 0.80 Vp-p

Bit Rate Variable 8 500 000 to 11 320 000 kbit/s 8 000 000 to 12 500 000 kbit/s *1 Offset –100 to 100 ppm Variable-1/2 4 250 000 to 5 660 000 kbit/s 4 000 000 to 6 250 000 kbit/s *1 Offset –100 to 100 ppm Variable-1/4 2 125 000 to 2 830 000 kbit/s 2 000 000 to 3 125 000 kbit/s *1 Offset –100 to 100 ppm Variable-1/8 1 062 500 to 1 415 000 kbit/s 1 000 500 to 1 562 500 kbit/s *1 Offset –100 to 100 ppm Variable-1/16 531 250 to 707 500 kbit/s 500 000 to 781 250 kbit/s *1 Offset –100 to 100 ppm Variable-1/32 265 625 to 353 750 kbit/s 250 000 to 390 625 kbit/s *1 Offset –100 to 100 ppm Variable-1/64 132 813 to 176 875 kbit/s 125 000 to 195 313 kbit/s *1 Offset –100 to 100 ppm 1GFC 2GFC 4GFC 8GFC


5-6

10GFC 10GFC-FEC 1GbE 2GbE CPRI CPRI-2 CPRI-4 CPRI-5 *1 CPRI-10 *1 Infiniband Infiniband×2 Infiniband×4 10GbE WAN 10GbE LAN/PHY 10GbE OTU1e 10GbE OTU2e OBSAIRP3 *1 OBSAIRP3×2 *1 OBSAIRP3×4 *1

OBSAIRP3×8 *1 OC-3/STM-1 OC-12/STM-4 OC-24 OC-48/STM-16 OTU-1 OC-192/STM-64 G.975 EFC OTU-2 Rate *2 1/1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/16 1/32 1/64

Data/XData Off On Error Addition

Off On Repeat

1E–2


5-7

5

Gen

erating P

ulse S

ignal

1E–3 1E–4 1E–5 1E–6 1E–7 1E–8 1E–9 1E–10 1E–11 1E–12

Single Insert Error

External Attenuation 0 to 30 dB

Reference Clock CH1 External

1/1 Rate 1/2 Rate 1/4 Rate 1/8 Rate 1/16 Rate 1/32 Rate 1/64 Rate

CH2 External External External CLK 1/16 Clk

1/1 Rate

1/2 Rate

1/4 Rate

1/8 Rate

1/16 Rate

1/32 Rate

1/64 Rate

10 MHz Internal

Sync Output PPG1_1/1 Clk*3 PPG1_1/2 Clk*4 PPG1_1/4 Clk*5 PPG1_1/8 Clk*6 PPG1_1/16 Clk*7


5-8

PPG1_1/64 Clk*6 PPG2_1/1 Clk*3,*8 PPG2_1/2 Clk*4,*8 PPG2_1/4 Clk*5,*8 PPG2_1/8 Clk*6,*8 PPG2_1/16 Clk*7,*8 PPG2_1/64 Clk*6,*8 ED1_1/4 Clk *9

ED1_1/8 Clk *10 ED1_1/16 Clk ED2_1/4 Clk *8,*9 ED2_1/8 Clk *8,*10 ED2_1/16 Clk *8 PPG1_Pattern Sync PPG2_Pattern Sync *8

Test Pattern NEG POS PRBS2^7–1 PRBS2^9–1 PRBS2^15–1 PRBS2^23–1 PRBS2^31–1 Programmable Pattern

*1: When Option 090 added

*2: When Reference CLK is External or External CLK is 1/16 Clk

*3: 1/8, 1/16, 1/32, 1/64 at Rate display

*4: 1/4 at Rate display



*7: 1/1, 1/2, 1/4 at Rate display

*8: Option 005 or 012

*9: 1/2 at ED rate display

*10: 1/1 at ED rate display

5.2 Setting Restrictions

5-9

5

Gen

erating P

ulse S

ignal

5.2 Setting Restrictions The setting items of the PPG have the following restrictions.

Bit Rate

When Option 090 is added, the setting range from 8 000 000 to 8 499 999 and from 11 320 001 to 12 500 000 kbit/s can be set. Bit Rate Standard

The following specifications can be selected when Opt-090 is added. CPRI-5 CPRI-10 OBSAIRP3 OBSAIRP3×2 OBSAIRP3×4 OBSAIRP3×8 Data/XData

The output signal from Data Out and Data Out connectors cannot be set individually.

Data/XData Amplitude

The output signal amplitude from Data Out and Data Out connectors cannot be set individually. The amplitude of the Sync Out connector cannot be set. Reference Clock

The PPG_1ch and PPG_2ch cannot be set separately. Sync Output

The following settings can be selected when Option 005 or Option 012 is selected. PPG2_1/1 Clk PPG2_1/2 Clk PPG2_1/4 Clk PPG2_1/8 Clk PPG2_1/16 Clk

PPG2_1/64 Clk PD2_Pattern Sync ED2_1/4 Clk ED2_1/8 Clk ED2_1/16 Clk


The pattern length is 1305600 bits or less. When the file data length is over 1305600 bits, up to 1305600 bits can be read.


5-10

5.3 Procedure for Generating Pulse Signal The basic procedure is as shown in the following figure.

Starting

The amplitude is set.

Select a standard clock.

Is the bit rate standard Variable?

The clock isinput to theconnector.

The pattern is set.

The bit rate and theoffset are set.

Data/XData is turned on.

End

Is the externalclock used?

No.

Yes

No.

Yes

The bit ratestandard is set.

Positive logic/negative-true logic is set.

The amount of external attenuation is input.

Is an external attenuator used?

Yes

No.

Error Additionis turned on.

Is the bit errorinserted?

Yes

No.

Error Additionis turned off.

The amount of external attenuation is adjusted to 0.

Is the insertion method Repeat?

Yes

No. Rate is set.

The bit error insertion method is set.

Is the synchronous output signal used?

Sync Output isset.

No.

Yes

Is the Ext Clk In connector used?

No.

Yes

The clock is input to the connector.

The ratio of dividing frequency is set.

Is the pattern Programmable Pattern?

The pattern fileis set. No.

Yes

Figure 5.3-1 Basic Procedure of Generating Pulse Signal

5.4 Setting Reference Clock

5-11

5

Gen

erating P

ulse S

ignal

5.4 Setting Reference Clock The PPG uses the reference clock to generate the data. The reference clock can be selected from the following supply sources:

Generating clock in the BERTWave

Input clock from the Ext Clk In connector on the front panel

Input clock from the External 10 MHz Input connector on the rear panel

The internal clock accuracy is ±10 ppm after power is applied for 1 hour. The external clock is used under the following conditions:

When synchronizing other equipment with clock

When using clock with higher accuracy than internal clock

When using the bit rate other than the specified one with the internal clock

The Ext Clk In connector is an AC coupling. 1/16 clock frequency range displayed in the bit rate specifications [Variable] is input to Ext Clk In connector. The bit rate of the signal output from the MP2100A is calculated by the following formula.

RfBr EXT 16 Br: Bit rate (kbit/s) fEXT: Clock frequency (kHz) input to the Ext Clk In connector R: Divide Ratio (1/1,1/2,1/4,1/8,1/16,1/32,1/64)

Example: When setting the bit rate to 9953280 kbit/s, input the clock frequency (622080 kHz) and set the divide ratio to 1/1.

The External 10 MHz Input connector is a DC coupling. The 10 MHz clock of the sine wave or short waveform is input to the External 10MHz Input connector. For the MP2100A-001, MP2100A-005, or MP2101A-012, the reference clocks of the channel 1 and 2 can be set separately. In this case, the external clock is the clock input from the Ext Clk In connector.


5-12

Table 5.4-1 Reference CLK Settings

Reference CLK PPG1 PPG2

Internal Internal clock Internal clock

External External clock External clock

CH1 External *1 External clock (Ext Clk In)

Internal clock

CH2 External *1 Internal clock External clock (Ext Clk In)

Synchronized *1,*2 Internal clock Internal clock (Synchronized clock for CH1）

*1: With MP2100A-001, MP2100A-005, or MP2101A-012

*2: When installing the Option 052

Improving Phase Error between PPGs using Synchronized

When Reference Clock is set to Internal at the MP2100A-005 or MP2101A-012, the data rates of PPG1 and PPG2 become the same but there is phase error in the data. Although phase error between PPG1 and PPG2 has no effect on the measurement results when measuring bit errors, sometimes non-existent jitter may be observed at waveform monitoring. This data phase error can be improved by setting to Synchronized.

Use the clock synchronized to the PPG1 data as the oscilloscope trigger to display the monitored PPG2 Eye Pattern as follows.

Figure 5.4-1 Eye Pattern Monitoring

Sync OutTrigger Clk In

PPG2 DataOut

Data In(A in)

Set Sync Output to PPG1_1/1 Clk.


5-13

5

Gen

erating P

ulse S

ignal

Figure 5.4-2 Eye Pattern when Reference Clock is Internal

Figure 5.4-3 Eye Pattern when Reference Clock is Synchronized

When monitoring the waveforms of two DUTs simultaneously, make the following connections.


5-14

DUT 2

Ext Clk In

Sync Out

Trigger Input

Without Option 052 MP2100A-005 or MP2101A-012

RF Output

Reference Clock

DUT 1

Oscilloscope

Ch A Input

Ch B Input

Set Reference to ClkExternal

Dut 2

Ext Clk In

Sync Out

Trigger Input

With Option 052 MP2100A-005 or MP2101A-012

Dut1

Oscilloscope

Ch A Input

Ch B Input

Set Referecnce to ClkSynchronized.

Figure 5.4-4 Setup for Simultaneous Monitoring of Two Channels

Procedures:

1. Touch the screen size change button, and set to [Expand].

2. Touch the Reference CLK button. The selection screen is displayed. The number of the displayed buttons vary with the option configuration.

3. Touch the reference clock button, referring to Table 5.4-1.

4. When setting to [External] at step 2, touch the External CLK button. And then, the clock selection screen is displayed.

5. Select the connector to input the reference clock touching the button. [1/16 Clk]: Ext Clk In connector on the front panel [10 MHz]: External 10 MHz Input connector on the rear panel


5-15

5

Gen

erating P

ulse S

ignal

CAUTION

• The impedance of the Ext Clk In and External 10 MHz

Input connectors is 50 Ω. Measurement may not be

performed correctly if a cable with another impedance

is used.

• The amplitude of the signal input to the Ext Clk In

connector is 1.6 Vp-p max. This is equivalent to +8 dBm

for a sine-wave signal. Inputting a signal with a larger

voltage risks damaging the internal circuits.

• The signal input to the Ext Clk In connector is 0.2 Vp-p

minimum. This is equivalent to -10 dBm for a sine-wave

signal. Measurement may not be performed correctly if

a signal with a larger voltage is input.

• The amplitude of the signal input to the External 10

MHz Input is 2 Vp-p max. This is equivalent to +10 dBm



• The amplitude to the External 10 MHz Input is 0.7 Vp-p

minimum. This is equivalent to 0.9 dBm for a sine-wave

signal. Measurement may not be performed correctly if

a signal with a larger voltage is input.


5-16

5.5 Setting Output Waveform The PPG_Ch1 output terminal is the PPG1 Data and Data connectors on the front panel.

The PPG_Ch2 output terminal is the PPG2 Data and Data connectors on the front panel.

The connector block diagram is as shown below.

Amplitude

Control

Data

Data

Figure 5.5-1 Output Terminal Block diagram

The connector is an AC coupling. When it is necessary to impose DC voltage on an output waveform, connect a bias-T.

CAUTION

• The impedance of the Data Out and Data Out

connectors is 50 Ω. Measurement may not be

performed correctly if a coaxial cable with another

impedance is used or if the impedance of the DUT is

not 50 Ω.

• The amplitude of signal output to the Data Out and Data

Out connectors is 0.1 to 0.8 Vp-p. Check that the output

voltage amplitude does not exceed the DUT maximum

input specifications. If it does, connect an attenuator to

the output connector.

5.5 Setting Output Waveform

5-17

5

Gen

erating P

ulse S

ignal

Set the bit rate and amplitude of the waveform output to the Data and Data connectors.

Cycle=1/(Bit Rate) Voltage (V)

0

Amplitude

(V) Time

Figure 5.5-2 Waveform Setting Item

To set bit rate

In the following cases, the bit rate can be set:

when setting Reference CLK to [ Internal ] when setting Reference CLK to [ External ]and External CLK to [ 10

MHz ].

1. Touch the Bit Rate button. The window is opened to select the specifications. The number of the displayed buttons varies with the options.


5-18

2. Touch the bit rate specifications button. The number displayed in the button is the specified bit rate (bit/s). When indicating 1.25G, this means 1.25 Gbit/s.

3. When selecting [Variable], [Variable-1/2], [Variable-1/4], [Variable-1/8], [Variable-1/16], [Variable-1/32], or [Variable-1/64], touch the text box of the bit rate and offset to input the values. For the setting range, refer to Table 5.5-1.

Table 5.5-1 Bit Rate Specifications and Setting Range

SpecificationsBit Rate (kbit/s)

Without Option 090 With Option 090

Variable 8 500 000 to 11 320 000 8 000 000 to 12 500 000Variable-1/2 4 250 000 to 5 6600 000 4 000 000 to 6 250 000Variable-1/4 2 125 000 to 2 830 000 2 000 000 to 3 125 000Variable-1/8 1 062 500 to 1 415 000 1 000 000 to 1 562 500Variable-1/16 531 250 to 707 500 500 000 to 781 250Variable-1/32 265 625 to 353 750 250 000 to 390 625Variable-1/64 132.813 to 176 875 125.000 to 195 312

To set amplitude

1. Touch the Amplitude text box and set the amplitude voltage.

2. Insert an attenuator between the Data Out connector and the Data Out connector, and touch the External Attenuation text box and input the attenuation. The amplitude voltage after passage through the attenuator is displayed in Relative.

CAUTION When inserting attenuator at both the Data Out connector

and Data Out connector, use an attenuator with the same

amount of attenuation.

If the attenuation amounts are different, the displayed

amplitude and the amplitude output at the connector will

be different.

5.5 Setting Output Waveform

5-19

5

Gen

erating P

ulse S

ignal

The following are the specifications for the voltage level of the high-speed interface. Table 5.5-2 lists the specified signal amplitude.

Table 5.5-2 Signal Specifications and Amplitude

Specifications Amplitude (V)

ECL 0.8 LVDS 0.35 LVPECL 0.8 NCML 0.5 NECL 0.8 PCML 0.5 PECL 0.8


5-20

5.6 Setting Patterns The following two test patterns can be selected.

PRBS

Programmable Pattern PRBS

PRBS is the pattern generated at the hardware. The generated pattern length, maximum length of contiguous 1s, and maximum length of contiguous 0s differ depending on the hardware configuration. The following block diagram indicates the hardware generating PRBS 2^7–1.

D Q D Q D Q D Q D Q D Q D Q

Clock

Output

flip-flop×7 Exclusive OR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Initial Value

Figure 5.6-1 Block diagram for PRBS Generating Circuit

This block diagram is composed of a shift register composed of a seven-stage flip-flop and an Exclusive OR circuit. A signal of the sixth and seventh stages of the shift register are input to the Exclusive Or and the output of the Exclusive Or is input to the shift register. This type of configuration is described by the following pattern generation polynomial. 1+X6+X7 When inputting the default value of 7 bits and impressing the clock, a pattern with a bit length of 27–1 = 127 its repeatedly generated. The default value of seven bits includes 1 or more “1” bits. The following table shows the pattern length, maximum number of contiguous 1s, and maximum number of contiguous 0s using the PRBS generation formula of this machine.

5.6 Setting Patterns

5-21

5

Gen

erating P

ulse S

ignal

PRBS Pattern

Generation Polynomial

Pattern Length

Maximum number of

contiguous 1s

Maximum number of

contiguous 0 2^7–1 1+X6+X7 127 7 6 2^9–1 1+X5+X9 511 9 8

2^15–1 1+X14+X15 32767 15 14 2^23–1 1+X18+X23 8388607 23 22 2^31–1 1+X28+X31 214748647 31 30 The ratio of 1s to the PRBS pattern length is 50%. Programmable Pattern

The Programmable Pattern is the pattern defined by the pattern file. The Programmable Pattern is used when the following patterns are required:

Frame format pattern such as Ethernet and SDH

Pattern captured from communication circuit data

Specified test pattern The restrictions when using the Programmable Pattern are:

The occurrence ratio of “1” is 50% with ±1bit tolerance.

The maximum pattern length is up to 1305600 bits (163200 bytes). If the pattern sizes larger than this, the first 1305600 bits are used.

When using pattern files created for existing Anritsu products, use Pattern A only when the pattern file type is Alternate.


5-22

Pattern Logic

There are two types of logic; Positive Logic (POS) and Negative Logic (NEG). With positive logic, the voltage at the Data connector goes High when the data is “1”. With negative logic, the voltage at the Data connector goes Low when the data is “1”.

Data Pattern 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1

At POS

At NEG

Data Connector Voltage

Time

Time

0

0


Figure 5.6-2 Relationship between Logic Setting and Output Voltage

Waveform at Connector

Set the pattern using the following procedure. 1. Touch the Test Pattern button, and then the pattern list is displayed.

2. Touch the pattern button to be set.

3. When selecting the Programmable Pattern, touch the Programmable Pattern button. The file selection screen is displayed.

5.6 Setting Patterns

5-23

5

Gen

erating P

ulse S

ignal

4. Touch the file name.

5. Touch [OK]. When canceling the file selection, touch the close button.

6. Touch the positive/negative logic button to set [POS] or [NEG].

The MP2100A/MP2101A can read the previous product's pattern file (the file extension is PCP or PTN). The compatibility with the previous product file is as shown in the following table.

The file must be saved in the following folder before reading these files. C:\Program Files\Anritsu\MP2100A\MX210000A\UserData\Pattern


5-24

Table 5.6-1 File Compatibility with Previous Product

Product Name

File extension

Pattern Supported/

Not supported

MU181020A MU181020B

PTN

Data

Alternate *

Mixed(Data) Mixed (Alternate)

*

Sequence MP1758A

PTN

PRGM 1ch

PRGM 2ch

PRGM 4ch

PRBS — MP1761A MP1761B MP1761C PTN

ALT Data PRBS — Zero-Subst —

MP1775A MP1776A

PTN

PRGM 1ch

PRGM 2ch

PRGM 4ch

PRBS — Zero-Subst 1ch —

Zero-Subst 2ch —

Zero-Subst 4ch —

MP1632A MP1632C

PTN PRGM

Zero-Subst — PRBS —

PCP PRGM

*: Only pattern A can be read.

5.7 Inserting Bit Error

5-25

5

Gen

erating P

ulse S

ignal

5.7 Inserting Bit Error Insert a bit error when confirming whether to detect the bit error at the ED. Bit errors can be inserted either by inserting bits one at a time using screen operation or by inserting a fixed rate to the bit string.

Inserting bit errors one bit at a time using screen operation

1. Touch the button under Error Addition and set to [Single].

2. Touch the Error Addition button and set the button display to [On].

3. Touch [Insert Error], and then 1 bit error is inserted. When inserting the bit error, the lamp on the right side of [Insert Error] lights green.

Inserting fixed proportion of bit errors

1. Touch the button under Error Addition to set to [Repeat].

2. Touch the Rate button. Select the bite error rate from the following list: [ 1E–2 ]: 10–2 [ 1E–8 ]: 10–8 [ 1E–3 ]: 10–3 [ 1E–9 ]: 10–9 [ 1E–4 ]: 10–4 [ 1E–10 ]: 10–10 [ 1E–5 ]: 10–5 [ 1E–11 ]: 10–11 [ 1E–6 ]: 10–6 [ 1E–12 ]: 10–12 [ 1E–7 ]: 10–7

3. Set Error Addition to [On].

To stop bit error insertion, set Error Addition to [Off]. The average time interval for generating bit errors depends on the Rate and Bit Rate as shown in the following table.

Table 5.7-1 Average Time Interval for Generating Bit Errors

Rate Bit Rate (kbit/s)

155520 622080 1250000 2488320 4250000 10000000

1E–4 64.3 s 16.1 s 8 s 4.02 s 2.35 s 1 s1E–6 6.43 ms 1.61 ms 800 s 402 s 235 s 100 s1E–8 643 ms 161 ms 80 ms 40.2 ms 23.5 ms 10 ms1E–10 64.3 s 16.1 s 8 s 4.02 s 2.35 s 1 s1E–12 6430 s 1608 s 800 s 402 s 235 s 100 s


5-26

5.8 Setting Sync Output Set the type of signal output at the front-panel Sync Out connector. Sync Output connector outputs either a pulse synchronized to the data generated by the PPG, or a pulse synchronized to the data received by the ED, and outputs it at the front-panel Sync Out connector. When measuring the bit error rate and waveform using another error detector or sampling scope, the Sync Out signal is connected to the measurement equipment. The Sync Out Connector is a DC coupling. The output of the Sync Output connector is input either to a sampling scope or an oscilloscope trigger to monitor the PPG waveform.


Time

Time

0

0

Sync Out Connector Voltage

2,4,8,16, or 64

Figure 5.8-1 Correspondence between Sync Output Setting and Output Voltage

Waveform at Connector using PPG or ED Rate Division


Time

Time

0

0



Waveform at Connector using PPG1_1ch_1/1 or PPG2_2ch_1/1

5.8 Setting Sync Output

5-27

5

Gen

erating P

ulse S

ignal


Time

Time

0

0


Pattern Length


Waveform at Connector using PPG Interval Cycle

The time interval outputting the pulse varies depending on the pattern length and bit rate when Sync Output is Pattern. Select the pattern for the measurement referring to Table 5.8-1.

Table 5.8-1 Cycle of Sync Output

Pattern Name Bit Rate (kbit/s)

155520 622080 1250000 2488320 4250000 10000000

PRBS 2^7–1 52.3 s 13.1 s 6.5 s 3.27 s 1.91 s 812 nsPRBS 2^9–1 210 s 52.6 s 26.2 s 13.1 s 7.70 s 3.27 sPRBS 2^15–1 13.48 m s 3.37 ms 1.68 ms 843 s 493 s 210 sPRBS 2^23–1 3.45 s 863 ms 429 ms 216 ms 126 ms 53.7 msPRBS 2^31–1 884 s 221 s 110 s 55.2 s 32.3 s 13.7 s

CAUTION

• The impedance of the Sync Out connector is 50 Ω.

Measurement may not be performed correctly if a

coaxial cable with another impedance is used or if the

impedance of the DUT is not 50 Ω.

• The output voltage of the Sync Out connector is –0.5 to

0 V. Check that the output voltage does not exceed the

DUT maximum input specifications. If it does, connect

an attenuator to the Sync Out connector.


5-28

The selectable signal types vary with the divide rate displayed in the bit rate.

The following table shows the PPG/ED Ch1 Sync Output Combinations. When using PPG/ED Ch2, substitute PPG2 and ED2 for PPG1 and ED1.

Table 5.8-2 PPG/ED Ch1 Sync Output Combinations

(Synchronous with PPG)

PPG Divide Rate

Signal Type P

PG

1_

1/1

Clk

PP

G1_

1/

2 C

lk

PP

G1_

1/

4 C

lk

PP

G1_

1/

8 C

lk

PP

G1_

1/

16 C

lk

PP

G1_

1/

64 C

lk

PP

G1_

1/

Pat

tern

S

ync

1/1 – – – 1/2 – – – – 1/4 – – – – 1/8 – – – – – 1/16 – – – – – 1/32 – – – – – 1/64 – – – – –

: Can be set

–: Cannot be set

Table 5.8-3 Combination of Signals Set to Sync Output

(Synchronous with ED)

ED Divide Rate

Signal Type

ED

1_

1/4

Clk

ED

1_

1/8

Clk

ED

1_

1/16

Clk

1/1 – 1/2 –

: Can be set

–: Cannot be set

Note:

With the MP2100A, when EYE/Pulse Scope is set as follows, neither PPG_1ch_Pattern Sync nor PPG_2ch_Pattern Sync can be set.

Time dialog

Data Clock Rate: Tracking On

5.8 Setting Sync Output

5-29

5

Gen

erating P

ulse S

ignal

Procedures

1. Touch [Sync Output].

2. Select the signal type.

The following table shows the divide ratio corresponding to the signal type and clock signal source.

Table 5.8-4 Correspondence between Clock Signal Source and Divide

Ratio for Signal Types

Sync Output Clock Signal Source Divide Ratio

PPG1_1/1

PPG Channel 1

1 PPG1_1/2 2 PPG1_1/4 4 PPG1_1/8 8 PPG1_1/16 16 PPG1_1/64 64

PPG1_ Pattern Sync

Data Length value

PPG2_1/1

PPG Channel 2

1 PPG2_1/2 2 PPG2_1/4 4 PPG2_1/8 8 PPG2_1/16 16 PPG2_1/64 64

PPG2_ Pattern Sync

Data Length value

ED1_1/4 ED Channel 1

4 ED1_1/8 8 ED1_1/16 16 ED2_1/4

ED Channel 2 4

ED2_1/8 8 ED2_1/16 16


5-30

5.9 Setting Clock Output When Option 052/152 is installed in the MP2100A or MP2101A, a clock synchronized with the PPG data output is output at the Clk Out connector on the front panel.

This clock output at the Clk Out connector is called the "Full Rate Clock" to distinguish it from the clock output at Sync Output.

Note:

Depending on the PPG division rate, the full rate clock is not output.

Table 5.9-1 Divide Rates Supporting Full Rate Clock

Divide (Rate display)

Clk Out connector output

1/1, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 Available 1/16, 1/32, 1/64 Not available

The following settings are supported by the full rate clock.

Clock signal source

Frequency Clock signal source

The signal source synchronized with the full rate clock is the same as the clock signal source for Sync Output. When setting Sync Output, the signal source for full rate clock is also set at the same time. Refer to Table 5.8-4 Correspondence between Clock Signal Source and Divide Ratio for Signal Types. Note:

The clock is output at the Clk Out connector on the front panel when setting Sync Output to [PPG1_Pattern Sync] or [PPG2_Pattern Sync].

Frequency

The frequency setting method varies with the reference clock settings.

5.9 Setting Clock Output

5-31

5

Gen

erating P

ulse S

ignal

Table 5.9-2 Full Rate Clock Frequency Setting Methods

Reference Clock

External Clock

Description

Internal – Changes Bitrate of PPG/ED panel. The set bit rate becomes the clock frequency. However, no clock is output when the divide rate is 1/16, 1/32, or 1/64.

Example: When the bit rate is 1 250 000 kbit/s and the rate is 1/8, the full rate clock frequency is 10 000 000 kHz.

External 10 MHz

External 1/16 Clk The clock frequency input changes to the Ext Clk In connector. The value of 16 times the clock frequency input to the Ext Clk In connector on the front panel multiplied by the divide rate becomes the full rate clock frequency.

CH1 External

1/16 Clk The clock frequency input changes to the Ext Clk In connector. The value of 16 times the clock frequency input to the Ext Clk In connector on the front panel multiplied by the divide rate becomes the full rate clock frequency.

CH2 External

1/16 Clk The clock frequency input changes to the Ext Clk In connector. The value of 16 times the clock frequency input to the Ext Clk In connector on the front panel multiplied by the divide rate becomes the full rate clock frequency.

Note:

Input a clock frequency within the following range to the Ext Clk In connector.

Option 090: 500 000 to 781 250 kHz


5-32.

Chapter 6 Measuring Bit Error

6-1

6

Measu

ring B

it Error

This chapter explains how to set the interface of the ED and the measurement conditions and the conditions of the error detection for measuring the bit error rate.

6.1 Function List .................................................................. 6-2 6.2 Setting Restrictions ..................................................... 6-11 6.3 Procedure of Measuring Bit Error Rate ...................... 6-13 6.4 Setting Conditions for Error Detection ........................ 6-14 6.5 Setting Measurement Conditions................................ 6-26 6.6 Measurement Result ................................................... 6-29 6.7 Saving Measurement Results ..................................... 6-30


6-2

6.1 Function List The bit error rate can be measured at the Error Detector (ED). The ED has the following functions.

Table 6.1-1 Items Set at ED

Item Description

Tracking Sets bit rate standards and test pattern setting at PPG. Bit Rate When the bit rate standards are Variable, Variable-1/2,

Variable-1/4, Variable-1/8, Variable-1/16, Variable-1/32 or Variable-1/64, the bit rate can be set. The setting range varies with the settings of the bit rate standards.

Data Input Condition Sets connector used for inputting signal. Threshold (Data Input Condition)

Sets threshold voltage for evaluating “0” and “1” at Data In and Data In connectors. The setting voltage range varies depending on the value of the External Attenuator Factor.

External ATT When inserting attenuator at connector, that attenuation is entered.

Test Pattern Selects PRBS or Programmable Pattern. Programmable Pattern

When Test Pattern set to Programmable Pattern, displays pattern file name.

Data Length Displays pattern length in bit units. Auto SYNC Sets whether or not to execute resynchronization

processing when pattern sync lost Threshold (Auto SYNC)

When Auto SYNC is On, sets bit error rate judging pattern sync loss.

SYNC Control When the pattern is Programmable Pattern, set the synchronization method.

Frame Position At Programmable Pattern, sets bit string header position used in sync frame.

ED Result Displays measurement result for bit error rate. History Reset Deletes history of warning display. Gating Cycle Sets single measurement, repeat measurement or

continuous measurement. Current Sets whether to update measurement result to 100 ms.

6.1 Function List

6-3

6

Measu

ring B

it Error

Table 6.1-1 Items Set at ED (Cont’d)

Item Description

Start Measuring bit errors. Stop Stopping bit error measurement Warning display Displays invalid data detection, invalid pattern

synchronization, and alarm of bit error detection. Bit Rate standard Selects communication standard complying with

transmission speed. Measurement Processing Ratio

Displays measurement processing ratio in % units.

Measurement cycle Sets measurement time. Logic Sets signal level of data connector responding to pattern

“1”.


6-4

To display the ED setting screen

1. Touch [PPG/ED_Ch1] or [PPG/ED_Ch2] at the top menu.

2. Touch [ED] to display the screen as shown in Figure 6.1-1.

3. Touch [Main] to display the screen as shown in Figure 6.1-2.

4. Touch [Expand] to change the screen as shown in Figure 6.1-1.

Figure 6.1-1 ED Setting Panel


Channel Display

ED tab

6.1 Function List

6-5

6

Measu

ring B

it Error

Figure 6.1-2 ED Setting Panel (Details)

Figure 6.1-3 ED Panel Result Display 2


Bit rate

Pattern length (bit)

Auto pattern synchronization setting

Controlling synchronization

Setting actual time display

Measurement method

Sync signal source

Pattern synchronized threshold level

Measurement interval

Measurement processing ratio

Alarm indicator

Erase history indicator

Frame head position

Frame pattern length

Divide ratio

History indicator

Terminationmethod

Threshold voltage

Pattern

Pattern file name

Positive/Negative logic

External attenuation factor

Bit error rate

Bit error count

Clock count

Frequency

Measurementstart/stop

Bit rate standard

Tracking

Result display method

Bit error rate (insertion)

Bit error rate (omission)

Bit error count (insertion)

Bit error count (omission)


6-6



Bit error rate (total)

Measurement start/stop

Bit error count (total)

Alarm indicator

Measurement progressing rate

Bit error rate (insertion)

Bit error rate (omission)

Bit error count (insertion)

Bit error count (omission)

History indicator

Clock count

Frequency

Bit error rate

Measurement start/stop

Bit error count

Alram display /History display

Measurement progressing rate

6.1 Function List

6-7

6

Measu

ring B

it Error

The setting range of the ED is as follows:

Auto Sync Off On

Threshold INT 1E-2 1E-3 1E-4 1E-5 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8

Bit Rate Variable 8 500 000 to 11 320 000 kbit/s 8 000 000 to 12 300 000 kbit/s *1 Variable-1/2 4 250 000 to 5 660 000 kbit/s 4 000 000 to 6 250 000 kbit/s *1 Variable-1/4 *1 2 000 000 to 3 125 000 kbit/s Variable-1/8 *1 1 000 000 to 1 562 500 kbit/s Variable-1/16 *1 500 000 to 781 250 kbit/s Variable-1/32 *1 250 000 to 390 625 kbit/s Variable-1/64 *1 125 000 to 195 312 kbit/s 1GFC *1 2GFC *1 4GFC 8GFC 10GFC 10G-FC-FEC 1GbE *1 2GbE *1 CPRI *1 CPRI-2 *1 CPRI-4 *1 CPRI-5 *1 CPRI-10 *1


6-8

Infiniband *1 Infiniband×2 Infiniband×4 10GbE WAN 10GbE LAN/PHY 10GbE OTU1e 10GbE OTU2e OBSAIRP3 *1 OBSAIRP3×2 *1 OBSAIRP3×4 *1 OC-3/STM-1 *1 OC-12/STM-4 *1 OC-24 *1 OC-48/STM-16 *1 OTU-1 *1 OC-192/STM-64 G.975 FEC OTU-2

Data Input Condition Differential 50 Ohm *2 Optical *3 Electrical Single-Ended Data Electrical Single-Ended XData *4

Threshold –85 to 85 mV (External Attenuator Factor = 0 dB) External Attenuation

0 to 30 dB ED Result All INS/OMI Total Zoom

6.1 Function List

6-9

6

Measu

ring B

it Error

Gating Current Off On Gating Cycle Repeat

1 second to 9 day 23 hour 59 minute 59 second Single

1 second to 9 day 23 hour 59 minute 59 second Untimed

Result Time Elapsed Time Remaining Time Start Time

SYNC Control Off On Frame Position 1 to Data Pattern Length–64

Sync Output PPG1_1/1 Clk*5 PPG1_1/2 Clk*6 PPG1_1/4 Clk*7 PPG1_1/8 Clk*8 PPG1_1/16 Clk*9 PPG1_1/64 Clk*10 PPG1_1/1 Clk*5 PPG2_1/2 Clk*6,*11 PPG2_1/4 Clk*7, *11 PPG2_1/8 Clk*8, *11 PPG2_1/16 Clk*9, *11 PPG2_1/64 Clk*10, *11 ED1_1/4 Clk*12

ED1_1/8 Clk *13 ED1_1/16 Clk ED2_1/4 Clk*11,*12 ED2_1/8 Clk*11,*13 ED2_1/16 Clk*11 PPG1_Pattern Sync PPG2_Pattern Sync


6-10

Test Pattern NEG POS PRBS2^7–1 PRBS2^9–1 PRBS2^15–1 PRBS2^23–1 PRBS2^31–1 Programmable Pattern Programmable Pattern

Tracking Off On

*1: When installing Option 090

*2: Excluding Ch1 of the following configuration

MP2100A-003 and MP2100A-003+005,

MP2100A-007 and MP2100A-007+005

*3: Excluding MP2100A-003, MP2100A-003+005Ch1

*4: Excluding Ch1 of the following configuration

MP2100A-007 and MP2100A-007+005

*5: 1/8, 1/16, 1/64 at PPG Rate display

*6: 1/4 at PPG Rate display



*9: 1/1, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16 at PPG Rate display

*10: 1/1, 1/2, 1/4 at PPG Rate display

*11: When installing Option 005 or 012

*12: 1/2 at ED Rate display

*13: 1/1 at ED Rate display

6.2 Setting Restrictions

6-11

6

Measu

ring B

it Error

6.2 Setting Restrictions The setting items of the ED have the following restrictions.

Bit Rate

The bit rate rage varies with the bit rate specifications and the availability of the Option 090. The bit rate setting range indicates the following table.

Table 6.2-1 Bit Rate Specifications and Bit Rate Setting Range

Bit Rate Specifications

Bit Rate (kbit/s)

Without Option 090 With Option 090

Variable 8 500 000 to 11 320 000 8 000 000 to 12 500 000Variable-1/2 4 250 000 to 5 660 000 4 000 000 to 6 250 000Variable-1/4 – 2 000 000 to 3 125 000Variable-1/8 – 1 000 000 to 1 562 500Variable-1/16 – 500 000 to 781 250Variable-1/32 – 250 000 to 390 625Variable-1/64 – 125 000 to 195 312

When Option 090 is not installed and PPG bit rate is 3 075 000 kbit/s or under, ED bit rate does not follow PPG even if Tracking is set to On. Bit Rate Standard

The following specifications can be selected when Opt-090 is added. Variable-1/4 Variable-1/8 Variable-1/16 Variable-1/32 Variable-1/64 1GFC 2GFC 1GbE 2GbE Infiniband OC3/STM-1 OC12/STM-4

OC24 OC48/STM-16 OTU-1 CPRI CPRI-2 CPRI-4 CPRI-5 CPRI-10 OBSAIRP3 OBSAIRP3×2 OBSAIRP3×4 OBSAIRP3×8

Threshold

The threshold power voltage for Data In or Data In connectors cannot be set individually.


6-12

Data Input Condition When the following model name and options are used, only Optical and Electrical Single-Ended Data can be selected at Ch1.

MP2100A-003

MP2100A-003+005 Optional cannot be selected when Ch2 and the model name and options other than the above at Ch1 are used. When the following model and options are used, only Electrical Single-Ended Data can be selected at Ch1.

MP2100A-007

MP2100A-007+005 External Attenuation

When [Optical] is selected at Data Input Condition, the values cannot be entered. Programmable Pattern

The pattern length is 1305600 bits or less. When the file data length exceeds 1305600 bits, up to 1305600 bits test patterns are used.

6.3 Procedure of Measuring Bit Error Rate

6-13

6

Measu

ring B

it Error

6.3 Procedure of Measuring Bit Error Rate The following figure shows the basic procedure for measuring the bit error rate.

Start

Set termination method.

Is bit rate standard Variable?

Set pattern.

Set bit rate.

End

Touch ED Result button

and Start.

No

Yes

Set bit rate standard.

Set positive/negative logic.

Is pattern Programmable

Pattern?

Set pattern file.No

Yes

Input external

attenuation factor.

Use external attenuator?

Yes

No

Set Sync Control

to ON.

Yes

No

Set Sync Control

to OFF.

Set external

attenuation to 0.

Set Frame Position.

Is Gating Cycle Untimed?

Set Gating

period.

No

Yes

Set threshold voltage.

Set Auto Sync to ON.

Set Auto Sync threshold

rate.

Is pattern Programmable

Pattern?

Set Gating Cycle.

Set Gating Current

to On.

Track bit rate and pattern at PPG?

No

Yes

Set Tracking

to On.

Set Tracking

to Off.

Figure 6.3-1 Basic Procedure of Bit Error Rate Measurement


6-14

6.4 Setting Conditions for Error Detection The conditions for detecting bit errors must be set.

Signal input terminal

The signal input terminals for the ED are the ED1 and ED2 Data In connectors and Data In connector on the panel.

The ED1 connector supports ED_Ch1 and the ED2 connector supports ED_Ch2.

When using the MP2100A-003 and MP2100A-003+005, the optical input connector can be selected as the ED_Ch1 signal input terminal.

In the case of the MP2101A, only the electrical input connector is supported.

The signal input terminals for ED1 and ED2 are AC coupling. The block diagram for input terminal is as shown below.

+

-

+

-

Data In

Data In

Threshold voltage

Figure 6.4-1 Input Terminal Block Diagram

6.4 Setting Conditions for Error Detection

6-15

6

Measu

ring B

it Error

CAUTION The impedance of the electrical input connector is 50 Ω.

Measurement may not be performed correctly if a coaxial

cable with another impedance is used.

Do not impress a DC voltage of more than 2 V at the ED1

Data In and Data In connectors.

Do not impress a DC voltage of more than 1 V at the ED2


The internal circuit may be damaged.

The optical inputs for MP2100A-003 and MP2100A-003+005 are AC coupling. The input terminal block diagram is as shown in the below figure.

+

-

+ V

O/E Data In

Threshold Voltage

Figure 6.4-2 Optical Input Terminal Block Diagram (MP2100A-003)


6-16

Select the signal input terminal depending on the Data Input Condition [Differential 50 Ohm]: Signal input terminal for both Data In and Data

In connectors. The differential voltage of each signal input to two connectors is the input voltage.

[Electrical Single-Ended Data]: Signal input terminal for Data In connector

[Electrical Single-Ended XData]: Signal input terminal for Data In connector

[Optical]: Signal input terminal for optical connector (O/E Data In) Attenuator Factor (External Attenuation)

When installing the fixed attenuator in the Data In and Data In connectors of the MP2100A/MP2101A, input the attenuation (dB) of the fixed attenuator. The threshold voltage calculated to the input voltage of the attenuator is displayed. The calculation formula is as follows: Calculated Threshold Voltage = Threshold Voltage × 10^(attenuation/20)

Threshold Level

Voltage level for evaluating “1” and “0”. The input terminals are AC coupled, so set a voltage corresponding to the signal waveform excluding the DC components.

The following figure shows the waveform input to the connector and the waveform excluding DC components when the input signal level is LVPECL.

0

1

2

-1

Voltage (V)

Waveform input to Data In connector

0

1

2

-1

Voltage (V)

Threshold level

Time Time

Waveform without DC components

Figure 6.4-3 Waveform with Target Threshold Level


6-17

6

Measu

ring B

it Error

Logic

Select the positive logic (POS) or negative logic (NEG).

Logic POS

NEG

0

Voltage (V)

Input waveform tothe Data Inconnector

0

Input waveform tothe Data Inconnector

1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0

0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

Time

Time

Figure 6.4-4 Values Defined as Input Waveform

Pattern

The ED compares the received bit string and the internally generated bit stream bit-by-bit and evaluates it differences as it errors. As a result, set the same pattern at the PPG and ED. For PRBS, since it is possible to predict the bits received next from the received bit string, the time required for pattern synchronization can be much shorter than for a Programmable Pattern. There are two synchronization methods depending on the pattern length for Programmable Pattern. SYNC Control: OFF The entire pattern bits and received bit string are

compared.

SYNC Control: ON When the pattern length is 128 bits or more, 64 bits starting from the bit specified at Frame Position and the received bit string are compared. When all 64 bits are in agreement, the data from bit 65 is compared. When the pattern length is 127 bits or less, the entire received bit string and data are compared.

All data bits are compared and when the obtained bit error rate is lower than the bit error rate is set at Auto Sync Threshold, pattern synchronization is evaluated as having been obtained.


6-18

To shorten the pattern sync time when SYNC Control is ON, set the value of the 64-bit string which is not duplicate in other portion in the same string to Frame Position in programmable pattern. The pattern synchronization takes much time if there are multiple 64-bit strings, which is the same as 64-bit string used for the same string synchronization detection.

+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 +A +B +C +D +E +F

000000 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55

000010 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55

000020 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55

000030 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55

000040 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F

000050 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F

000060 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F

000070 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F

000080 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F

000090 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F

0000A0 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F

0000B0 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F

Figure 6.4-5 Programmable Pattern Example 1

Figure 6.4-5 shows an example of programmable pattern when pattern length is 1536 bits. In this example, 64 bytes from the programmable pattern header have the same value of 0x55, so the header 512 bits is a repeating pattern of alternating 1s and 0s. When Frame Position is set to 1 in this programmable pattern, the 8 bytes of data from address 0x000000 to address 0x000007 are used to detect pattern synchronization. There are 224 points between address 0x000000 and address 0x000038 with these 8 bytes match. The data remaining after these 8 byte data matches is compared and the proportion of matched bits in the entire programmable pattern is 1:224. When pattern synchronization processing is performed with this type of pattern, the time required to obtain synchronization becomes longer.


6-19

6

Measu

ring B

it Error

Received bit string 101010101010101010………101010101010101010101010….

Detected bit string 1010101010………101010101010

512 bits

64 bits

Figure 6.4-6 Pattern Detection Bit String when Frame Position is 1

The bit string used at pattern synchronization must occur at least once within the programmable pattern. In the example in Figure 6.4-5, when the Frame Position is 513, the bit string between addresses 0x000040 and 0x000047 is used to detect pattern synchronization. This 8-byte bit string appears once in the programmable pattern. As a result, if these 64 bits and the received bit string match, pattern synchronization is obtained. If there is no bit string appearing at least once in the programmable pattern, the bit string appearing the least number of times is set at Frame Position.

+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 +A +B +C +D +E +F

000000 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F

000010 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F

000020 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F

000030 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F

000040 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F

000050 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F

000060 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F

000070 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F

000080 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F

000090 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F

0000A0 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F

0000B0 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F

0000C0 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F

0000E0 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F

0000E0 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F

0000F0 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7E

Figure 6.4-7 Programmable Pattern Example 2

Sometimes pattern synchronization is obtained at the wrong position depending on the user data pattern.


6-20

An example is shown in Figure 6.4-7. There is just one bit different between data addresses 0x000000 to 0x00007F and addresses 0x000080 to 0x0000FF. When Frame Position is set to 1 at this programmable pattern, the 8 bytes of data from address 0x000000 to 0x000007 are used to detect pattern synchronization. The matches for these data bytes are between received bit string addresses 0x000000 and 0x000007, and addresses 0x000080 and 0x000087. There is no bit error in the former but there is one bit error at bit 1024 in the latter. In this case, the bit error rate is 9.77 x 10-4. When the bit error rate (Sync Threshold) used to evaluate pattern synchronization is set to 10-3, since the generated bit error rate is lower than this value, the equipment evaluates pattern synchronization as having been obtained. To prevent obtaining pattern synchronization at the incorrect position like this, the Sync Threshold bit error rate must be smaller than the reciprocal number of the programmable pattern length. For example, when the pattern length is 16,384 bits, Sync Threshold should be 1E-5. Pattern Sync

Auto SYNC sets the pattern sync method.

[On]: If the bit error rate set at Sync Threshold is exceeded, patterns synchronization is evaluated as lost and synchronization processing is performed.

[Off]: Pattern synchronization processing is not performed.

Set Auto Sync to [On] at measurement start. After pattern synchronization processing, if there are bit errors exceeding the bit error rate set at Sync Threshold, leave pattern synchronization processing set to [On]. After pattern synchronization processing, even if there are bit errors exceeding the bit error rate set as Sync Threshold, set to [Off] when not processing the pattern synchronization.

Bit error rate for executing pattern synchronization processing

Auto SYNC Threshold sets the bit error rate for starting or stopping pattern synchronization processing.

The bit error rate for starting pattern synchronization processing (sync processing start level) must be set to a larger value than the bit error rate for stopping pattern sync processing (sync processing stop level). This offers a method for starting/stopping pattern sync processing using


6-21

6

Measu

ring B

it Error

hysterics. The following figure shows the sync processing start and stop levels when 1E–2 are selected at Sync Threshold.

Bit error rate

10-2 10-3

Sync Loss Indicator: Gray Sync Loss Indicator: Red

Sync Processing Start Level

Sync Processing Stop Level

Figure 6.4-8 Bit Error Rate at Pattern Sync Processing

Start/Stop Level

When selecting [INT], the bit error rates vary depending on the Test Pattern types, pattern length and Sync control settings.

The following table shows the sync processing start and stop levels for each Sync Threshold selection.


6-22

Table 6.4-1 Bit Error Rate when Threshold setting is INT

Test Pattern

Sync Control

Pattern Length

Bit Error Rate



PRBS – 2n–1 (n=7,9,15,23,31)

2.5×102 1.56×102


OFF 2 to 16 2.5×102 1.56×102 17 to 160 5.0×103 1.56×103 161 to 1,600

5.0×104 1.56×104

1,601 to 16,000

5.0×105 1.56×105

16,001 to 80,000

1.0×105 6.25×106

80,001 to 160,000

5.0×106 3.13×106

160,001 to 320,000

2.5×106 1.56×106

320,001 to 524,288

1.9×106 7.81×107

524,289 to 1,048,576

9.54×107 3.91×107


6-23

6

Measu

ring B

it Error

Table 6.4-1 Bit Error Rate when Threshold setting is INT (Cont’d)

Test Pattern

Sync Control

Pattern Length

Bit Error Rate




ON 128 to 5,120

1.95×104 1.56×104

5,121 to 10,240

9.77×105 7.81×104

10,241 to 51,200

1.95×105 1.56×105

51,201 to 102,400

9.77×106 7.81×105

102,401 to 204,800

4.88×106 3.91×106

204,801 to 307,200

3.26×106 2.60×106

307,201 to 409,600

2.44×106 1.95×106

409,601 to 524,288

1.91×106 1.53×106

524,289 to 1,048,576

9.54×107 7.63×107

Table 6.4-2 Threshold Settings and Bit Error Rate (at 1E–2 to1E–8)

Sync Threshold

Bit Error Rate



1E–2 2.5×102 1.56×102 1E–3 2.5×103 1.56×103 1E–4 2.5×104 1.56×104 1E–5 2.5×105 1.56×105 1E–6 2.5×106 1.56×106 1E–7 2.5×107 1.56×107 1E–8 2.5×108 1.56×108


6-24

The setting procedure of the error detection conditions is as follows:

1. When changing the bit rate and pattern of the PPG and applying the changing settings to the ED touch the Tracking button and set to [On]. When setting to [On], go to the step 6. When setting to [Off], go to the step 2.

2. Touch the Bit Rate button and select the standard. Set the same standard of the PPG.

3. When setting the bit rate standards to Variable, Variable-1/2, Variable-1/4, Variable-1/8, Variable-1/16, or Variable-1/32, touch the Bit Rate test box. And then, enter the same value of the PPG.

For the setting range of the bit rate, refer to Table 5.5-1 “Bit Rate Specifications and Setting Range”.

4. Touch the Test Pattern button and select the pattern. Set the same pattern of the PPG.

5. Set Logic to [POS] or [NEG].

6. Touch the Data Input Condition button.

7. Select the connector receiving the signal from the followings:

MP2100A-003, MP2100A-003+005 Ch1

[Optical]: O/E Data In connector

[Electrical Single-Ended Data]: Data In connector

MP2100A-001, MP2100A-001+005, MP2101A Ch1, Ch2

[Differential 50 Ohm ]: Data In and Data In connector


[Electrical Single-Ended XData]: Data In connector

MP2100A-003+005, MP2100A-007+005, Ch2

[Differential 50 Ohm ]: Data In and Data In connector


[Electrical Single-Ended XData]: Data In connector

8. Touch the External ATT test box.

9. When inserting the fixed attenuator to the Data In and Data In connectors, enter the attenuation (dB). When not inserting the attenuator, enter 0.

10. Touch the Threshold text box.

11. Enter the threshold voltage.

When Test Pattern is set to Programmable Pattern, follow the procedure below.

12. Touch the Programmable Pattern button and open the file dialog box.


6-25

6

Measu

ring B

it Error

13. Select the same file as that of the Programmable Pattern of the PPG.

14. Touch the Frame Position text box.

15. Enter the frame head position.

CAUTION When attenuators are connected to both the Data In and

Data In connectors, use attenuators with the same

attenuation. If the amount of attenuation is different, the

displayed threshold voltage and the actual threshold

voltage may be different.

If the input voltage to the attenuators is either more than 5

V or less than –5 V, check that the power consumed by the

attenuators does not exceed the rated power.

Check that the voltage of the signal attenuated by the

attenuators does not exceed the voltage displayed at the



6-26

6.5 Setting Measurement Conditions

To set how to measure bit error:

Set Gating Cycle at Gating. [Single]: Performs measurement until the time set at the measurement period is exceeded. [Repeat]: Performs measurement until ER Result button display becomes [Stop]. The bit error rate returns to 0 at each measurement period. [Untimed]: Performs measurement until ER Result button display becomes [Stop]. The bit errors are accumulated.

The following figure shows the relationship between the Gating Cycle setting and the change in the displayed bit error count.

Time

Time

Time

Set button to Stop.

Single

Repeat

Untimed

Bit error count

0

0

0

Measurement period

Figure 6.5-1 Gating Cycle Settings and Bit Error Count

Bit error measurement Period

The Gating Period can be set when Gating Cycle is Single or Repeat. The time can be set from 1 second to 9 days 23 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds.

6.5 Setting Measurement Conditions

6-27

6

Measu

ring B

it Error

Measurement method

The ED Result display can be refreshed either in real time (approx. 1 s intervals) or when the progress bar reaches 100%. The display method is set at Current of Gating. [On]: Updates measurement results in real time. [Off]: Updates measurement results when progress reaches 100% for

either Single or Repeat Gating Cycle. Updates measurement results when measurement stops for Untimed Gating Cycle.

The setting procedure of the measurement conditions is as follows:

1. Touch the Gating Cycle button and select the measurement method as follows: [Repeat] [Single] [Untimed]

2. When Gating Cycle is Repeat or Single, touch the text box under the Gating Cycle and enter the numeric value. The measurement cycle can be set from 1 second to 9 days 23 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds.

3. Touch [Current] to set the timing for the measurement result. [On]: Updates measurement results per 100 ms. ［Off］: Displays measurement results per measurement results or when measurement stops

4. Touch the measurement start/stop button, and set the display to [Start]. The right lamp of the button is changed to green. Measure is displayed at the status display. The measurement processing rate is displayed.

When pattern synchronization is obtained, the CR Unlock and SYNC Loss displays are erased.

When Gating Cycle is set to [Untimed], the measurement cycle progress is displayed every 5 seconds.


6-28

When CR Unlock is displayed in red

The signal input to the connector is not detected. Confirm the following:

The signal amplitude inputs to the Data In and Data In connectors are 0.1 V or more.

The signal transmission bit rate matches the value set at Bit Rate.

When the signal is input to the O/E Data In connector, the option Low Pass Filter settings are not applicable. Example :when the bit rate standard is 10 GbE WAN, Low Pass Filter is set to 2GFC.

When SYNC Loss is displayed in red

Pattern synchronization has not been obtained; check the following:

The PPG Test Pattern and ED Test Pattern settings are matched.

The Logic POS and NEG settings are correct.

The amplitude of the input signals to the Data In and Data In connectors is at least twice the threshold voltage.

6.6 Measurement Result

6-29

6

Measu

ring B

it Error

6.6 Measurement Result The following measurement result is displayed in the ED Result.

Start Time: Time when bit error measurement started

Elapsed Time: Time elapsed from start of bit error rate measurement When Gating Cycle is Single or Repeat, when time exceeds the Time setting at Gating, the time is reset back to 0.

Remaining Time: Bit error measurement elapsed time subtracted from time set at Gating Time setting.

ER: The bit error rate is displayed from 0.0001E–18 to 1.0000E–0. Mantissa is 0.0000 when the bit error does not occur. At this time, the numeric part varies depending on the clock number. Example: 0.0000E-3 Clock count 1000 or more, 9999 or less 0.0000E-4 Clock count 10000 or more, 99999 or less

EC: The occurred bit errors are displayed from 0 to 9999999 or from 1.0000E07 to 9.9999E17.

CC: The received bit count is displayed from 0 to 9999999 or from 1.0000E07 to 9.9999E17.

FREQ (kHz): Clock frequency calculated by the received bit count. It is the same as the transmission speed (kbit/s) of the received data.

Alarm Indicator

Error: Displays red when detecting bit error.

CR Unlock: Displays red when clock not generated from received data in the case of Rate=1/1 or 1/2. When Option 090 is installed and bit rate is 3 125 000 kbit/s or less, CR Unlock is not detected. .

SYNC Loss: Displays red when pattern not synchronized.

When the alarm indicator goes red once, the History Indicator goes yellow when the cause of the alarm is removed, indicating that an alarm occurred. When the [History Reset] button is pressed when the History Indicator is yellow, the yellow display disappears.


6-30

6.7 Saving Measurement Results The measurement result of the saved bit error is as follows: Bit Error Measurement Result

CC (Clock Count)

EC (Error Count)

ER (Error Rate)

Frequency

Start Time

Stop Time

Test Pattern

Anritsu;MP2100A;01.00;TXT---------------------------------- Pattern PRBS2^23-1 Option 03,05,90 Start 2009/12/06 11:50:47 End 2010/07/06 16:05:55 | Total INS OMI --------+-------------------------------------------------------------- ER | 2.0000E-08 8.0000E-02 1.2000E-0 EC | 1.0000E+09 4.0000E+08 6.0000E+08 Frequency Clock Count ----------------------------- 10312500kHz 6.1875E+11

Figure 6.7-1 Text File Example

6.7 Saving Measurement Results

6-31

6

Measu

ring B

it Error

Anritsu;MP2100A;01.00;CSV Pattern,PRBS2^23-1 Option,01,05 Start,2010/07/06 11:50:47,End,2010/07/06 11:51:47 ,Total ER,2.0000E-08 EC,12375 Frequency,Clock Count 10312500kHz,6.1875E+11

Figure 6.7-2 CVS File Example

Procedure

1. Touch [System Menu].

2. Touch [Save].

3. Select from [All], [PPG/ED Ch1], or [PPG/ED Ch2]. When selecting [All], the measurement results for the PPG/ED Ch1 and PPG/ED Ch2 are saved.

4. Touch [Result]. The file name input dialog box is displayed.

5 When saving the file as the displayed file name, touch [OK].

6 Touch the right button of the text box when editing the file name. The software keyboard is displayed.

7 Input the file name.

8 When changing the file name, touch [OK], and when canceling the procedure, touch [Cancel] and go back to the step 4.

The measurement result file is saved in the following folder. C:\Program Files\Anritsu\MP2100A\MX210000A\UserData\Result\CSV C:\Program Files\Anritsu\MP2100A\MX210000A\UserData\Result\TXT


6-32.

Chapter 7 Observing Waveform

7-1

Observin

g Waveform

7

This chapter explains how to measure waveforms of periodic signal in time.

7.1 EYE/Pulse Scope Screen ............................................. 7-2

7.1.1 Sampling scope features .................................. 7-2

7.1.2 Description of items on the EYE/Pulse Scope

window .............................................................. 7-3

7.2 Setting Item List .......................................................... 7-12

7.3 Setting Restrictions ..................................................... 7-22

7.4 Measurement Procedure ............................................ 7-23

7.5 Calibrating Sampling Scope ....................................... 7-24

7.5.1 Calibrating Level ............................................. 7-24

7.5.2 Performing Self Test ....................................... 7-27

7.6 Setting Clock Recovery and Rate ............................... 7-29

7.6.1 Setting Clock Recovery Unit ........................... 7-30

7.6.2 Setting Bit Rate ............................................... 7-33

7.6.3 Setting Clock Rate and Divide Rate ............... 7-34

7.7 Setting Data Collection Method .................................. 7-35

7.8 Setting Pattern Length ................................................ 7-40

7.9 Collecting Data............................................................ 7-41

7.10 Adjusting Screen Scale ............................................... 7-43

7.10.1 Adjusting scale automatically ......................... 7-43

7.10.2 Adjusting Vertical-axis of Screen .................... 7-45

7.10.3 Adjusting Horizontal-axis of Screen ............... 7-47

7.10.4 Adjusting External Attenuator ......................... 7-48

7.11 Measuring Waveform .................................................. 7-49

7.11.1 Amplitude and Time Measurements ............... 7-50

7.11.2 Displaying Histogram ...................................... 7-55

7.11.3 Executing Mask Test ...................................... 7-58

7.12 Using Marker ............................................................... 7-67

7.13 Waveform Math Calculation ........................................ 7-69

7.14 Using Trace Memory .................................................. 7-70

7.15 Displaying a Label ...................................................... 7-71

7.16 Saving Measurement Results ..................................... 7-72


7-2

7.1 EYE/Pulse Scope Screen 7.1.1 Sampling scope features

The sampling scope, measuring the waveform, has the following main features.

Data collection method Trigger clock frequency setting, eye mode/pulse mode display, and

waveform cumulative display

Clock Recovery Frequency bandwidth of clock recover unit and loop filter settings

The clock recovered from the input data is output at the panel CRU Out connector.

Screen Scale settings Screen vertical and horizontal axis scales

Waveform analysis Measuring Parameters for evaluation of the waveform such as rise

time and jitter

7.1 EYE/Pulse Scope Screen

7-3

7

Observin

g Waveform

7.1.2 Description of items on the EYE/Pulse Scope window Touch [EYE/Pulse Scope] at the top menu, and then the EYE/Pulse Scope result window is displayed.

Scale self adjustment

Channel A Level offset setting

Channel B Level scale setting

Scale time setting

Offset time setting

Channel A Level scale setting

Screen deletion

Channel B Level offset setting

Marker panel display

Sampling start/stop

Channel A trace display

Setup dialog display

Measurement dialog display

Amplitude dialog display

Time dialog display

Channel B trace display

Waveformdisplay area

Measurement result/marker display area

Measurement result/marker display switch

Bit rate display

Offset time display

Channel B Level scale display

Channel B Level offset display

Channel ATop level

display

Channel ALevel offset

display

Right side time display

Channel ALevel scale

display

Channel B Top level display

GND level

Scale time display

Channel AGND level

display Channel B GND level display

Figure 7.1.2-1 Result Window


7-4

Touching [Setup] – [Measure] – [Amplitude] – [Time] displays the dialog box. Touching [Marker] displays the marker panel.

Setup Dialog

Touch [Setup] shown in Figure 7.1.2-1 to display the Setup dialog shown in Figure 7.1.2-2.

Figure 7.1.2-2 Setup Dialog


7-5

7

Observin

g Waveform

Tab Item Description

General Sampling Mode Switches to Eye/Pulse/ Coherent Eye mode.

Number of Samples Sets the number of samples.

Accumulation Type Sets the accumulation method of the sampling data.

Limit Type Selects the sampling end conditions from time, sampling count, or frequency.

Time Sets the sampling time.

Sample Sets the number of samples.

Waveforms Sets the waveforms.

Averaging When measuring the pulse mode, set the averaging process count.

CRU Input In the case of the MP2100A, the input connector of the clock recovery is displayed.

Crock Recovery When Opt-055 is added, the frequency bandwidth of the clock recovery is set. The input connector is set at the Data Input Condition of the ED.

CRU Loop BW Sets the bandwidth of the loopback filter when Clock Recovery is set to [>8.5G].

CRU Lock When Opt-055 is added, touch [Continue Scan] to detect the clock recovery frequency.

Utilities EYE/Pulse Shot Touching [Capture] saves the screen file in the result window.

Inverse background color

Sets the color of the save screen at EYE/Pulse Shot.

Waveform Only On: Saves only the waveform displayed in the Result window to a file. Off: Saves the whole Result window to a file.

NEW Label Adds a new label.

Delete Label Deletes the displayed label.

Set Reference Saves the displayed waveform as the reference trace.

Clear Reference Deletes the reference trace.

Ref.Trace Channel Sets the channel saved in the reference trace.

Temperature Displays current temperature of the sampling scope and the temperature when the level is calibrated.

Calibration Calibrates the amplitude level of the sampling scope.

Application Test Runs the self test for the sampling scope.


7-6

Measure Dialog

Touch [Measure] as shown in Figure 7.1.2-1 to display the Measure dialog screen as shown in Figure 7.1.2-3. Touch the buttons on the Measure Item screen to set the items to be measured.

Figure 7.1.2-3 Measure Dialog

Figure 7.1.2-4 Selection Screen of Measure Item


7-7

7

Observin

g Waveform

Item Description

Active Channel Selection

Selects channel to execute histogram measurement or mask test.

Measure Item Selects items to be measured. Off Sets display of measurement

item to Off. Amplitude/Time Displays screen to select

measurement items for waveform amplitude and time.

Mask Test Displays screen to set mask test pattern, eye margin, and measurement method.

Histogram Displays screen to set measurement direction and range of histogram measurement.

Amplitude/Time&Mask Displays screen to set waveform amplitude/time and measurement method of mask test.

Amplitude/Time&Histogram Displays screen to set waveform amplitude/time and measurement method of histogram.

For more information about the measurement setting screen, refer to 7.11 “Measuring Waveform”.


7-8

Amplitude dialog

Touch [Amplitude] as shown in Figure 7.1.2-1 to display the Amplitude dialog screen as shown in Figure 7.1.2-5.

Figure 7.1.2-5 Amplitude Dialog (Optical/Single End Electrical

Receiver)


7-9

7

Observin

g Waveform

Item Description

Channel Math [Off]: Displays waveforms for Channel A and B separately. [On]: Calculates waveforms for Channel A and B, and then that calculated result is displayed as Channel A.

Scale Offset Sets the level scale for Channel A and B. Channel A/B Tracking

[Off]: Sets scales for Channel A and B separately. [On]: Sets scales for Channel A and B as the same value.

Scale Sets vertical scale. Offset Sets vertical offset. Attenuation Inputs attenuation amount for external

attenuation. Channel A Attenuation Tracks ED1

Sets Channel A Attenuation value to same value as set at ED1 External ATT.

Channel Offset Sets Channel A and Channel B waveform calculation method and level scale for calculation results waveform.

Define Function Sets calculation method between channels. Scale Sets vertical scale for calculation result

between channels. Offset Sets vertical offset for calculation result

between channels.


7-10

Time Dialog

Touch [Time] as shown in Figure 7.1.2-1, and then the Time dialog screen as shown in Figure 7.1.2-6 is displayed.

Figure 7.1.2-6 Time Dialog

a1187007

ノート注釈

a1187007 : Marked


7-11

7

Observin

g Waveform

Tab Item Description

Rate Data Clock Rate Sets input data speed, clock frequency, and frequency dividing rate.

Tracking [Off]: Inputs bit rate to Bit Rate [On]: Applies bit rate selected at Master to Bit Rate

Master Sets items affecting clock and bit rate. Recalculate option [Clock Rate]: Calculates Clock Rate from Bit

Rate and Divide Rate [Bit Rate]: Calculates Bit Rate from Clock Rate and Divide Rate.

Clock Rate Sets clock frequency input to Trigger Clk In connector.

Divide Rate Sets frequency dividing rate (Bit Rate/Clock Rate).

Bit Rate Sets signal bit rate to be measured. Acquire Clock Rate Measures clock frequency input to Trigger

Clk In connector. Divide Ratio Detect Sets whether to detect frequency dividing

ratio of clock signal input to Trigger Clk In connector.

Scale/Offset Unit Sets units of horizontal axis on screen. Bits on Screen

Sets bit count of the scale horizontal axis on screen.

Offset Sets time on left side of screen. Pattern Length Sets input data pattern length. Tracking [Off]: Input pattern length to Length

[On]:Sets pattern length selected at Master to Length

Master Sets items affecting clock and Bit Rate. Length Inputs pattern bit length.

When measuring in Pulse mode, this value is used.

Skew Sets time offset. Setting positive values moves the waveform to the right. Setting negative values moves the waveform to the left.


7-12

7.2 Setting Item List The setting item is listed as follows.

Amplitude Channel Math Off

Channel A/B Tracking Off

Attenuation A B Offset A B Scale A B

On*1 Attenuation A/B

Scale A/B Offset A/B

Channel A Attenuation Tracks ED1 *2 Off On

On *1 Define Function CH A + CH B CH A–CH B CH B–CH A Offset Scale

Auto Scale CH A

Off On

CH A Offset Scale

CH B Off On

CH B Offset

7.2 Setting Item List

7-13

7

Observin

g Waveform

Scale Clear Display Marker

Off On All Off Center X1 Off On

X2 Off On

Y1 Off On

Y2 Off On

Measure

Active Channel Selection Channel A Channel B Measurement Item Amplitude/Time Add Average Power (dBm) *3 Average Power (mW) *3 Crossing DCD Extinction Rate *3 Eye Amplitude

Eye Height Eye Width Fall Time Jitter p-p Jitter RMS OMA (dBm) OMA (mW) One Level Rise/Fall Time Correction Rise Time


7-14

SNR Zero Level Correction Factor Delete Eye Boundary Offset from Crossing Width Measuring Area Marker Item Move Rise/Fall Time 10/90% 20/80% Rise/Fall Time Correction Off On Amplitude/Time&Histogram

Amp/Time Add Average Power (dBm) *3 Average Power (mW) *3 Crossing DCD Extinction Ratio*3 Eye Amplitude Eye Height

Eye Width Fall Time Jitter p-p Jitter RMS OMA (dBm) OMA (mW) One Level Rise Time SNR Zero Level Correction Factor Delete Eye Boundary Offset from Crossing Width Measuring Area Marker Item Move


7-15

7

Observin

g Waveform

Rise/Fall Time 10/90% 20/80% Rise/Fall Time Correction Off On

Histogram Axis Amplitude Time Histogram Marker Center Marker X1 X2 Y1 Y2

Amplitude/Time&Mask Amp/Time

Add Average Power (dBm) *3 Average Power (mW) *3 Crossing DCD Extinction Ratio*3 Eye Amplitude Eye Height

Eye Width Fall Time Jitter p-p Jitter RMS OMA (dBm) OMA (mW) One Level Rise Time SNR Zero Level Correction Factor Delete Eye Boundary Offset from Crossing Width Measuring Area Marker Item Move


7-16

Rise/Fall Time 10/90% 20/80% Rise/Fall Time Correction Off On

Mask Test Align Method User Defined Alignment Marker Display Off Display On X Y X1 Y1 Eye Mask Select 10GbE FEC 10GbE LAN 10GbE WAN 10GFC 10GFC FEC 1GbE 1GFC 2GbE 2GFC 4GFC 8GFC 8GFC_Elect_Rx 8GFC_Elect_Tx OC12/STM4 OC192/STM64 OC192/STM64 FEC(G.975) OC3/STM1 OC48/STM16 OTU-1 OTU-2 1310nm OTU-2 1550nm OTU-2 1550nm Expand OTU-2 Amplified User Defined Mask Area Restriction Off On


7-17

7

Observin

g Waveform

Angle –90 to 90 Width 0.01 to 1.00 Mask Alignment Algorithm Zero/One/ Crossing Mask Alignment Update Mask Margin –100 to 100 % Mask Margin Test Continuous One Shot Target Failed Histogram Axis Amplitude Time Histogram Marker Center Marker X1 X2 Y1 Y2

Mask Test Align Method User Defined Alignment Marker Display Off Display On X Y X1 Y1 Eye Mask Select 10GbE FEC 10GbE LAN 10GbE WAN 10GFC 10GFC FEC 1GbE 1GFC 2GbE 2GFC


7-18

4GFC 8GFC 8GFC_Elect_Rx 8GFC_Elect_Tx OC12/STM4 OC192/STM64 OC192/STM64 FEC(G.975) OC3/STM1 OC48/STM16 OTU-1 OTU-2 1310nm OTU-2 1550nm OTU-2 1550nm Expand OTU-2 Amplified User Defined Mask Area Restriction Off On Angle –90 to 90 Width 0.01 to 1.00 Mask Alignment Algorithm Zero/One/ Crossing Mask Alignment Update Mask Margin –100 to 100 %

Mask Margin Test Continuous One Shot Target Failed Off

Setup

Accumulation Type Averaging Waveforms Infinite Limited Limit Type Sample

Samples Time


7-19

7

Observin

g Waveform

Time Waveform Waveforms None Persistency Persistence Time Clock Recovery <2.7G*4

>8.5G*4 CRU Loop BW 1 MHz 2 MHz 4 MHz 8 MHz

Off CRU Lock

Continue Scan Label Delete Label Delete NEW Label Add

Maintenance Calibration Application Test Number of Sampling 509*5 512*6 1021*5 1024*6 1350＊5 2039*5 2048*6 4093*5 4096*6 8191*5 8192*6 16381*5 16384*6 Sampling Mode Coherent Eye Eye Pulse Screen Copy


7-20

Eye/Pulse Shot Capture Inverse background color Off On Waveform Only Off On Trace Memory Clear Reference Ref.Trace Channel Ch A Ch A & Ch B Ch B Set Reference

Time Bit on Screen Data Clock Rate Tracking Off Acquire Clock Rate Auto Divide Ratio Clock Rate Bit Rate Divide Rate Recalculate Option Clock Rate Bit Rate Bit Rate Clock Rate On*2 Master PPG1 PPG2*7 ED1 ED2*7 Offset Pattern Length Tracking Off Length 2 to 16777216 On*2 Master


7-21

7

Observin

g Waveform

PPG1 PPG2*7 ED1 ED2*7

Skew Channel A Channel B Unit Time UI

*1: Only MP2100A-001 and MP2102A-021 applicable

*2: Only MP2100A applicable

*3: Only MP2100A-003, MP2100A-007 and MP2102A-023 applicable

*4: When MP2100A-055 or MP2102A-055 installed

*5: When Sampling Mode is Eye

*6: When Sampling Mode is Coherent Eye or Pulse

*7: Only MP2100A-005 applicable


7-22

7.3 Setting Restrictions The settings restrictions vary depending on the model name and options.

MP2100A-001, MP2102A-021

The measurement results of Average Power (dBm), Average Power (mW), Extinction Rate, OMA (mW), and OMA (dBm) at Amplitude/Time of the Measurement dialog are invalid. MP2100A-003, MP2100A-007, MP2102A-023

Channel A/B Tracking and Channel Math at the Amplitude dialog are not displayed.

MP2102A-021/023

Data Clock Rate at the Time dialog can only be set to Off. Pattern Length at the Time dialog can only be set to Off. Attenuation Tracking at the Amplitude dialog can only be set to Off.

MP2100A-052

Set Master of Data Rate Tracking to PPG1 when setting Reference Clock of PPG to Synchronized. When setting Master of Data Rate Tracking to PPG2, the waveform is not displayed properly with the different bit rate at CHA and CHB.

MP2100A-055, MP2102A-055

Clock Recovery, CRU loop BW and CRU Lock of the Setup dialog can only be set when Option 055 is installed.

7.4 Measurement Procedure

7-23

7

Observin

g Waveform

7.4 Measurement Procedure The following figure shows the basic measurement procedure.

Start

Input clock signal to

Trigger Clk In connector

Input measurement signal to

either Ch A or Ch B In*.

Set Bit Rate.

Calibration required?

Perform calibration.

Set EYE/pulse mode.

Set Clock Frequency/Clock

Divide ratio.

Pulse mode?

Set pattern length.

Sets data acquired method.

Set Ch A or Ch B

display to On.

Start sampling.

Measure waveform.

End

Stop sampling.

Adjust scale.

Using clock recovery unit

(CRU)?

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Connect Trigger

Clk In and CRU

Out connectors

Save measurement

Figure 7.4-1 Basic Measurement Procedures


7-24

7.5 Calibrating Sampling Scope 7.5.1 Calibrating Level

The amplitude accuracy of the sampling scope is guaranteed after performing calibration.

When the calibration is required, the error message "Calibration is required" is displayed at the Setup dialog in red.

Perform the calibration, when using the MP2100A/MP2102A initially or the message is displayed.

The calibration procedures are as follows:

1. Check that no signals are input to the front-panel Data In (A In) or Ch A In, Data In(B In) or Ch B In, Trigger Clk In connectors.

2. Touch [Setup] to display the Setup dialog.

3. Touch the [Utility] tab.

4. Touch [Calibration], and then the message is displayed to confirm that the signal is not input to the connector.

5. Touch [OK].

7.5 Calibrating Sampling Scope

7-25

7

Observin

g Waveform

Upon completion of the calibration, a dialog box appears and gives you the calibration result.

Figure 7.5.1-1 Calibration Result Display (When Calibration Fails)

Figure 7.5.1-2 Calibration Result Display

(When Calibration Is Successful)

If the calibration fails, follow the instruction that applies to your situation, and then retry from step 2.

When your instrument is the MP2100A BERTWave: • Check that the coaxial cable is not connected to any of the Data In(A

In), Data In(B In) and Trigger Clk In connectors on the front panel. • If it is required to keep the coaxial cables connected to the Data In(A

In), Data In(B In) and Trigger Clk In connectors on the front panel, check that the connectors do not receive any incoming signal.

When the Calibration of CHA and CHB Fails

When the Calibration of CHA Fails

When the Calibration of CHB Fails


7-26

When your instrument is the MP2102A BERTWaveSS: • Check that the coaxial cable is not connected to any of the Ch A In, Ch

B In and Trigger Clk In connectors on the front panel. • If it is required to keep the coaxial cables connected to the Ch A In, Ch

B In and Trigger Clk In connectors on the front panel, check that the connectors do not receive any incoming signal.

After the following operations, CAL alarm is displayed on the screen. When

the CAL alarm is displayed, calibrate the level.

・ Change [Sampling Mode] on the Setup dialog. ・ When Sampling Mode is [Pulse] or [Coherent Eye], change [Pattern

Length] on the Time dialog.

CAL Alarm

Figure 7.5.1-3 CAL Alarm Display

7.5 Calibrating Sampling Scope

7-27

7

Observin

g Waveform

7.5.2 Performing Self Test Perform the self test in the following cases:

When the error message is displayed after level calibration referring to 7.5.1 Calibrating Level

When the noise voltage is over the specified value shown in Appendix A when the signal is not input

When the waveform is not displayed, the displayed waveform amplitude and bit cycle is different from the expected value, and the equipment operation and measurement results are abnormal.

The application self test runs following items.

Power

Frequency

Amplitude If the test result is normal, “passed” is displayed, on the other hand, if the test result is abnormal, “failed” is displayed.

The self test procedures are as follows.

1. Check that no signals are input to the front-panel Data In (A In) or Ch A In, Data In (B In) or Ch B In, Trigger Clk In connectors.


3. Touch the [Utilities] tab.

4. Touch [Application Test]. The self test dialog is displayed while the self test is running.

5. After the self test is completed, the result is displayed.


7-28

When the power supply test result is failed:

1. When the power voltage is displayed, record the value.

2. Turn off the power supply.

3. Confirm that the power voltage supplied to the MP2100A/MP2102A is 100 to 120 VAC or 200 to 240 VAC.

4. When the power voltage does not have any faults, turn on the power supply.

5. Perform the self test again.

6. If the power supply test result shows “failed”, contact an Anritsu Service and Sales office.

When the frequency test result is failed:

1. Check that no signals are input to the Trigger Clk In connector.


3. If the frequency test result shows “failed”, calibrate the sampling scope again. And then, perform the self test again. Nonetheless, in cases where the test result fails, contact an Anritsu Service and Sales office.

When the amplitude test result is failed:

1. Check that no signals are input to the Data In (A In) or Ch A In,

Data In (B In) or Ch B In connectors.


3. If the amplitude test result shows “failed”, calibrate the sampling scope again.


5. Nonetheless, in cases where the test result fails, contact an Anritsu Service and Sales office.

7.6 Setting Clock Recovery and Rate

7-29

7

Observin

g Waveform

7.6 Setting Clock Recovery and Rate The trigger clock synchronized with the input signal is required to collect data. The MP2100A can use the synchronized clock (Sync Out) of the internal PPG and ED. When using the MP2100A with Opt-055, the clock can be generated form the signal input to Data In (A In) or Data In (B In).

When using the MP2102A with Opt-055, the clock can be generated form the signal input to CRU In. When using Opt-055 Clock Recovery Unit, connect the CRU Out and Trigger Clk In on the front panel using a coaxial cable. After the trigger clock is input to the MP2100A/MP2102A, the bit rate, clock rate, and divide rate is set.

The bit rate is the signal input to Ch A or Ch B. The clock rate is the frequency of the trigger clock. Divide Rate is the rate between data bit rate and clock rate. The value should be inputted to complete the following formula.

Bit Rate = Clock Rate × Divide Rate

CAUTION • The impedance of the Trigger Clk In connector is 50 Ω.

Measurement may not be performed correctly if a cable

with another impedance is used.

• The amplitude of the signal input to the Trigger Clk In

connector is 2 Vp-p max. This is equivalent to + 10 dBm




7-30

7.6.1 Setting Clock Recovery Unit The Opt-055 Clock Recover Unit (CRU) can generate a clock from the signal collecting data. The waveform can be measured using the generated clock.

The following can be set using the clock recovery unit.

CRU Input (MP2100A only )

Clock Recovery

CRU Loop BW CRU Input sets the input connector for the clock recovery unit.

Clock Recovery sets the output On/Off and frequency range.

CRU Loop BW is the loop filter bandwidth used at the frequency control circuit for CRU.

Phase ComparatorInput signal Loop filter Voltage

Control Osc Buffered Amp

CRU Out

CRU In

Figure 7.6.1-1 Block Diagram of Clock Recovery Unit

Although the frequency band is wide, instantaneous frequency fluctuations can be buffered. The communications standards specify the loop filter bandwidth used to measure jitter.

CAUTION • The impedance of the CRU In and CRU Out connectors

is 50 Ω. Measurement may not be performed correctly if

a cable with another impedance is used or if the

impedance of the connected device is not 50.

• The output voltage of the CRU Out connector is 0.5 to

1.5 Vp-p. Check that the output voltage does not

exceed the connected device maximum input

specifications. If it does, connect an attenuator to the

CRU Out connector.


7-31

7

Observin

g Waveform

CAUTION • The amplitude of the signal input to the CRU In

connector is 2 Vp-p max. This is equivalent to + 10 dBm



Procedure (MP2100A)

1. Connect the Trigger CLK In and CRU Out connectors on the front panel using a coaxial cable.

2. Touch [PPG/ED 1ch].

3. Touch [ED].

4. Select the Data Input Condition button for Clock Recovery from the following: [Electrical Single-Ended Data]: Data In(A In) as input connector [Electrical Single-Ended XData]: Data In(B In) as input connector [ Optical ]: O/E Data In as input connector

5. Touch [EYE/Pulse Scope].

6. Touch [Setup].

7. Touch the Clock Recovery button to select CRU Band from the following items. [Off]: Turn off the clock output to CRU Out connector [<2.7]: Sets the CRU from 0.1 to 2.7 GHz. [>8.5]: Sets the CRU from 8.5 to 12.5 GHz.

When setting to [<2.7] or [>8.5], “*CRU Valid” is displayed. 8. When Clock Recovery is [>8.5], select the CRU loop BW from the

following:

[1 MHz], [2 MHz], [4 MHz], [8 MHz]

9. Touch [Time].

10. Set the divide rate to 1.

11. Touch [Acquire Clock Rate] at Acquire Clock Rate.


7-32

Procedure (MP2102A)

1. Connect the Trigger CLK In and CRU Out connectors on the front panel using a coaxial cable.

2. Input the signal to the CRU In connector of the front panel.

3. Touch [Setup].

4. Touch the Clock Recovery button to select CRU Band from the following items. [Off]: Interrupts clock output to CRU Out connector [<2.7]: Sets the CRU from 0.1 to 2.7 GHz. [>8.5]: Sets the CRU from 8.5 to 12.5 GHz.

When setting to [<2.7] or [>8.5], “*CRU Valid” is displayed. 5. When Clock Recovery is [>8.5], select the CRU loop BW from the

following:

[1 MHz], [2 MHz], [4 MHz], [8 MHz]

6. Touch [Time].

7. Set the divide rate to 1.

8. Touch [Acquire Clock Rate] at Acquire Clock Rate.

Note:

When not using the clock recovery unit, set CRU Band to [OFF]. The clock recovery may not be generated if the input signal frequency to the clock recovery is out of CRU Band. In that case, the [PLL Unlocked] is displayed.

When using the clock recovery unit, the bit rate displayed on the right bottom side of the waveform area might not be an expected value. In this case, touch [Continue Scan] at the CRU Lock.


7-33

7

Observin

g Waveform

7.6.2 Setting Bit Rate 1. Touch [Time].

2. Touch the Tracking button at Data Clock Rate, and set to [Off].

3. Touch the Recalculate Option button to select [Clock Rate].

4. Touch the Divide Rate text box.

5. Input the divide rate.

6. Touch the Bit Rate text box to input the bit rate. The clock rate is calculated using the divide rate and bit rate.

The bit rate and divide rate are set so that the clock rate is set to 15 000 000 kHz or less.

When using the MP2100A, the bit rate for the PPG and the ED can be set to the bit rate for the sampling scope using the following procedures.

1. Touch [Time].

2. Touch the Tracking button at Data Clock Rate, and set to [Tracking On].

3. Touch the Master button of Data Clock Rate and select from the following units matching the bit rate.

[PPG1]: PPG/ED Ch1 PPG

[PPG2]: PPG/ED Ch2 PPG When the MP2100A-005 is added, this can be selected.

[ED1]: PPG/ED Ch1 ED

[ED2]: PPG/ED Ch2 ED When the MP2100A-005 is added, this can be selected.

When selecting Master, the bit rate, divide rate, and clock rate values are reflected.


7-34

7.6.3 Setting Clock Rate and Divide Rate The bit rate can be set by measuring the clock rate from the signal input to the Trigger Clk In connector of the front panel.

1. Touch [Time].

2. Touch the Tracking button of the Data Clock Rate to set to [Off].

3. Touch the Recalculate Option button to select [Bit Rate].

4. Touch [Acquire Clock Rate]. The frequency is displayed in the Clock Rate text box.

Confirm the waveform and signal level input to the Trigger Clk In connector when the frequency is not displayed.

5. When the clock frequency is not displayed at Clock Rate or the displayed frequency is not correct, touch the Clock Rate text box and input the frequency.

6. Touch the Divide Rate text box and input the divide rate. The bit rate is calculated by the divide rate and clock rate.

When using the MP2100A/MP2101A Sync Out as an external clock, the divide rate is set as follows.

Sync Output settings Divide Rate PPG1_1/1 CLK 1 PPG1_1/2_CLK 2 PPG1_1/4_CLK 4 PPG1_1/8 CLK 8 PPG1_1/16 CLK 16 PPG1_1/64_CLK 64 PPG2_1/1 CLK 1 PPG2_1/2 CLK 2 PPG2_1/4 CLK 4 PPG2_1/8 CLK 8 PPG2_1/16 CLK 16 PPG2_1/64 CLK 64 ED1_1/4 CLK 4 ED1_1/8 CLK 8 ED1_1/16 CLK 16 ED2_1/4 CLK 4 ED2_1/8 CLK 8 ED2_1/16 CLK 16

When setting Sync Output to PPG_1Ch_Pattern Sync or PPG_2Ch_Pattern Sync, the data cannot be collected.

7.7 Setting Data Collection Method

7-35

7

Observin

g Waveform

7.7 Setting Data Collection Method The data collection method is composed of the following types.

Data synchronized method: Eye mode, Pulse mode, Coherent eye mode

Cumulative display for waveform: None, Infinite, Limited, Persistency, Average

Note:

In this document, measurement of one data item on the screen is described as “data capture” while obtaining one screen of data is described as “data collection”.

To switch to Eye/Pulse/Coherent mode

1. Touch [Setup].

2. Touch the Sampling Mode button at the Setup dialog to set [Eye], [Pulse], or [Coherent Eye].

The Coherent Eye mode is used when calculating the waveform of Channel A and Channel B.

Figure 7.7-1 Eye Mode/Coherent Mode Display Example


7-36

Figure 7.7-2 Pulse Mode Display Example

Setting overwritten waveform display

When setting the display method to [Infinite], [Limited] or [Persistency], the acquired data is overwritten on the screen.


2. Select the single waveform data collection count from the following number of samples. For [Eye]: [509], [1021], [1350], [2039], [4093], [8191], [16381] For [Pulse], [Coherent Eye]: [512], [1024], [2048], [4096], [8192], [16384] When there is only a small amount of captured data, the screen refresh time is short.

3. Touch the Accumulation Type button, and set the items from the following lists: [Infinite]: Unlimited time to overwrite waveform [Limited]: The waveform is overwritten at the set time until it reaches the number of data or the numbers of waveforms. Data collection stops at the set time or when the data count is reached. [Persistency]: Deletes overwritten data after fixed time elapsed


7-37

7

Observin

g Waveform

4. When selecting [Limited] at step 3, set the at-end condition.

To end overwriting waveform when the set time is passed, set Limit Type to [Time]. Touch the Time text box to input the time.

To end overwriting waveform when the data count set at the screen is reached, set Limit Type to [Sample]. Touch the Samples text box to input the number of data.

To stop waveform overwriting when the set time has elapsed, set Limit Type to [Waveform]. Touch the Waveforms text box to input the number of waveforms.

5. When [Persistency] is selected at step 3, set the time for saving the overwritten data. Touch the Time text box to input the time.

Deleting overwritten waveform display


2. Touch the Accumulation Type button to select [None].

3. Touch the Number of samples button to select the number of data displayed on the screen from the following: For [Eye]: [509],[1021], [1350], [2039],[4093],[8191],[16381] For [Pulse],[Coherent Eye]: [512],[1024],[2048],[4096],[8192],[16384]

Figure 7.7-3 Accumulation Type Settings (None)


7-38

Figure 7.7-4 Accumulation Type Settings (Infinite)

Displaying averaging waveform

When setting the display method to [Averaging] at the pulse mode, the averaging process is performed. Averaging process is used to suppress waveform noise.


2. Touch the Accumulation Type button to select [Averaging].

3. Touch the Number of samples button to select the number of data displayed on the screen from the following: [512], [1024], [2048], [4096], [8192],[16384]

4. Touch the Averaging text box to set the number of waveforms to perform averaging.

In averaging, the mean value of the data count input at Averaging is calculated and the results are displayed on the screen. However, when 1 is input, no averaging is performed. The number of averaging waveforms is displayed on the screen while executing averaging. The waveform is captured ten times when the following condition is set, and ten averaging waveforms are displayed. Accumulation Type Average Averaging 100 wfms


7-39

7

Observin

g Waveform

Averaging 1 Averaging 100

Figure 7.7-5 Example of Averaging Process

The averaging is calculated using the following formula. Number of waveforms ≤Averaging setting count:

n

nSnAvennAve

11

Averaging setting count ≤ Number of waveforms:

M

nSnAveMnAve

11

Ave(n): Averaging value, S(n): Measurement value, M: Averaging setting count, n: Number of waveforms

The size of the noise is inversely proportional to the square root of the averaging setting count. For example, if M is set to 100, the noise amplitude is compressed to about 1/10 compared to when M is set to 1.


7-40

7.8 Setting Pattern Length When the Pulse mode is set as described in Section 7.7 Setting Data Collection Method, the pattern length can be set. In the Pulse mode, the pattern is synchronized by collecting data at the pattern length time cycle.

1. Touch [Time].

2. Touch the Tracking button at Pattern Length to set to [Off].

3. Touch the Length text box at Pattern Length.

4. Input the pattern length by the bit unit.

Note:

The settable pattern length is up to 1677216 (224).

When Text Pattern at PPG/ED is 2^31–1, [Tracking On] cannot be set to Tracking at Pattern Length.

When Pattern Length is set to [Tracking On], Test Pattern at PPG/ED cannot be set to 2^31–1.

When changing the PPG/ED pattern length settings using the MP2100A, the changed setting values can be set to the sampling scope automatically.

1. Touch [Time].

2. Touch the Tracking button at Pattern Length, and then set to [On].

3. Touch the Master button at Pattern Length.

4. Select the PPG and ED with equal pattern lengths.

7.9 Collecting Data

7-41

7

Observin

g Waveform

7.9 Collecting Data Once the data collection is started, the waveform is displayed on the screen.

Starting data collection

1. The waveform of the channel with the monitor signal input is displayed.

When monitoring the signal input to the Data In (A In) or Ch A In connector, touch the Channel A trace display button to set the button display to [CH A On].

When monitoring the signal input to the Data In (B In) or Ch B In connector, touch the Channel B trace display button to set the button display to [CH B On].

2. Touch the sampling start/stop button to display [Sampling at the button display.

The elapsed time, number of samples and number of waveforms are displayed in the title bar when [Accumulation Type] is set to [Limited].

When [Averaging] is set to 2 or more in the Pulse mode, the number of waveforms is displayed in the title bar.

The data collection can be started by touching all measurement start button as shown in Figure 4.1-1.

Stopping data collection

Touch the sampling start/stop button, and then set to [Sampling Hold]. When Accumulation Type at the Setup dialog is set to [Limited], the data collection is stopped once the at-end conditions are satisfied.

The data collection can be started by touching all measurement stop button as shown in Figure 4.1-1.


7-42

Discarding screen display

When temporarily deleting screen display:

Touch the Channel A trace display button, and then set the button display to [CH A Off]. Touch the Channel B trace display button, and then set the button display to [CH B Off]. The waveform is displayed when setting the button display to [CH A On] or [CH B On]. When discarding collected data:

Touch [Clear Display]. The waveform is deleted even when the button display is set to [CH A On] or [CH B On]. The discarded data cannot be displayed again.

7.10 Adjusting Screen Scale

7-43

7

Observin

g Waveform

7.10 Adjusting Screen Scale 7.10.1 Adjusting scale automatically

Measure the waveform amplitude and period, and then set to the easily viewable scale.

For Eye/Pulse/Coherent Mode

1. Touch [Auto Scale].

2. The waveform is displayed at the center of the screen.

1 level position

0 level position

Insertion

position

Figure 7.10.1-1 Waveform Display after Auto Scale

(Eye/Pulse/Coherent Mode)

When adjusting scale automatically, the two-bit waveform is displayed on the horizontal axis. The Eye pattern waveform crossing points are 2.5 and 7.5 scale divisions from the left side.

At the vertical axis, “one” level 2.5 gridlines above center of grid, “zero” level 2.5 gridlines below center of grid.

Note:

When both CH A and CH B are set to ON, the offset at the time axis is adjusted according to the channel signal selected at Active Channel Selection.


7-44

For Pulse Mode

1. Touch [Auto Scale].

2. The waveform is displayed at the screen center.

1 level position

0 level position

Figure 7.10.1-2 Waveform Display after Auto Scale (Pulse Mode)

When the pattern length is 127 bits or less, a 20-bit waveform is displayed. When the pattern length is 128 bits or more, a 50-bit waveform is displayed.

The 1 level is adjusted on the vertical scale to the 2.5th scale up from the screen center and the 0 level is adjusted to the 2.5th scale down from the screen center.


7-45

7

Observin

g Waveform

7.10.2 Adjusting Vertical-axis of Screen

To adjust voltage or optical power at center of vertical axis

1. Touch [Offset] at Amplitude on the left side of the waveform display area. The rotary knob icon is displayed in the button.

2. Input the power voltage or optical power at the screen center position using the rotary knob.

3. When using the trace A, the input value is displayed at the left center of the waveform display area. When using the trace B, the input value is displayed at the right center of the waveform display area.

To adjust voltage or optical power per scale:

1. Touch [Scale] at Amplitude in the right side of the waveform display area. The rotary knob icon is displayed in the button.

2. Input the voltage or optical power per scale using the rotary knob.

3. When using the trace A, the input value is displayed at the left upper corner of the waveform display area. When using the trace B, the input value is displayed at the right upper corner of the waveform display area.

The vertical-axis can be also adjusted by using the method for setting the Amplitude dialog.

1. Touch [Amplitude].

2. Touch the Offset text box.

3. Input the voltage or optical power at the screen center position.

4. Touch the Scale text box.

5. Input the voltage or optical power per scale.


7-46

Setting same vertical scale for two waveforms

The vertical scales at Channel A and Channel B can be set to the equal value using the MP2100A-001 or MP2102A-021.


2. Touch the Channel A/B Tracking button, and set to [On]. And then, the text box for Channel A is only available.

3. Touch the Scale, Offset, and Attenuation text boxes, and then set the value.

Note:

When the Channel A/B Tracking is set to [On], the CH B scale, offset, and attenuator value are changed to the CH A values.

Touch [Scale] and [Offset] at Amplitude on the right side of the screen, and then the value set using the rotary knob will be valid. In this case, the CH B scale and offset values are not displayed on the Amplitude dialog.


7-47

7

Observin

g Waveform

7.10.3 Adjusting Horizontal-axis of Screen Adjusting time at left edge of screen

1. Touch [Offset] at Time in the right side of the waveform display area. The rotary knob icon is displayed in the button.

2. Input the time at left edge of screen using the rotary knob.

3. The time entered is displayed at the left lower corner of the waveform display.

To switch the horizontal position units between UI (unit interval) and time (ps), touch [Time] and the Unit button. To adjust number of bits displayed on the screen

Procedure to set number of bits from Result window 1. Touch [Scale] at Time in the right side of the waveform display area.

The rotary knob icon is displayed in the button.

2. Input the number of bits per scale using the rotary knob.

3. The sum of the value at the bottom left of the screen and the input value is displayed at the bottom right.

Procedure to set number of bits from Time dialogue 1. Touch [Time].

2. Touch the [Scale/Offset] tab.

3. Touch Bit on Screen text box.

4. Input the number of bits.

To adjust the waveform position

1. Touch [Time].

2. Touch the [Scale/Offset] tab. Changing Offset can adjust the position of single waveform,

3. Touch the Skew text box and input the values.

The waveform moves right when a positive value is set. The waveform moves left when a negative value is set.


7-48

7.10.4 Adjusting External Attenuator

Adjusting attenuation of external attenuator

The attenuation amount of an external attenuator connected to the Data In (A In) and Data In (B In) connectors can be adjusted as described below.


2. Touch the Attenuation text box.

3. Input the attenuation.

The attenuation set at the error detector (ED1) can be set to the Channel A attenuation when using the MP2100A.


2. Touch the Channel A Attenuation Tracks ED1 button, and set to [On].

The n dB attenuation is calculated by the following formula:

Electrical input: 2010n

Optical input: 1010n


7-49

7

Observin

g Waveform

7.11 Measuring Waveform The waveform measurement methods are as follows.

For the explanation of the measurement items, refer to 1.4 “Glossary”.

Amplitude and time measurements Select the measurement items from the following:

Average power, Crossing%, Duty cycle distortion, Extinction rate, Eye amplitude, Eye height, Eye width, Fall time, Jitter p-p, Jitter RMS, One level, Rise time, SNR, Zero level, Optical amplitude

The extinction rate, average optical power, and optical amplitude can be measured when using the O/E converter.

Histogram Sets the screen field and displays the data distribution in the time or amplitude direction and the measurement results.

Mask test Sets the mask pattern and mask margin, and then measures the data count in the mask. The set data count can measure the mask margin within the mask.

The amplitude and time measurements are only available in the Eye mode.

Table 7.11-1 Measurement Method per Displayed Mode

Measurement Method Eye Mode Pulse Mode Coherent Mode

Measurement for amplitude and time – Histogram Mask test


7-50

7.11.1 Amplitude and Time Measurements When collecting data in the Eye pattern mode, up to 4 amplitude and time measurements can be performed.

Figure 7.11.1-1 Setting Example of Amplitude/Time Measurement


7-51

7

Observin

g Waveform

To set measurement items:

1. Touch [Measure] to display the Measure dialog.

2. Touch the Measure Item button.

3. Touch [Amplitude/Time], [Amplitude/Time&Mask], or [Amp/Histogram.

4. When selecting [Amplitude/Time&Mask] or [Amp/Histogram], touch the [Amp/Time] tab.

5. Touch [Add] at Item Selection. The screen for selecting the measurement items is displayed.

6. Touch the measurement item.

7. The screen for selecting the channel is displayed. Touch [Channel A] or [Channel B].

8. The item selected for the Item Selection list is added.

9. The measurement result is displayed in the button of the screen.

Up to 4 items can be selected. If you want to change the item, delete one of the selected items first.

If the added item is the same as an item selected already for the same channel, that item cannot be added using Item Selection. To display measurement area

The marker shows which part of the waveform is measured. 1. Touch [Measuring Area Marker] . The display changes when the

button is pressed. The measurement area is indicated by the marker (EYE Boundary).

2. The measurement number displayed in the measurement area can be set by touching the Item text box.

3. The measurement item in the measurement result display area is displayed in blue characters.


7-52

Figure 7.11.1-2 Display Example of EYE Boundary

To change EYE Boundary

The 1 and 0 level measurement area can be changed. 1. Touch the Offset in the Crossing text box to set the area center

position.

2. Touch the Width text box to set the area width.

Width Offset from Crossing

Figure 7.11.1-3 Setting Item of EYE Boundary


7-53

7

Observin

g Waveform

To set measurement method of rise/fall time

When measuring the rise time and fall time levels, select from amplitude 10/90% level or 20/80% level. 1. Touch the Rise/Fall Time button to display [10/90%] or [20/80%].

The bandwidth of the sampling scope is corrected with the measurement value of the Rise/Fall time, and the corrected bandwidth is displayed. 1. Touch [Rise/Fall Time Correction] to set the button display to [On].

2. Touch the Correction Factor text box.

3. Input the correction value in ps.

The calculation formula is as follows: 22 TcTmTd

Td: display value(ps), Tm: measurement value(ps), Tc: correction value (ps)

If the measurement value is larger than the correction value, the result displays N/A. "Corrected" is displayed in red at the Rise/Fall time when Rise/Fall Time Correction is set to [On].

Figure 7.11.1-4 Display Example of Measurement Result


7-54

To change display order

The display order of the measurement result is the same as that of Item Selection. The display order of Item Selection can be changed using the following procedures.

1. Touch [↑] or [↓] at Item Selection to highlight the item for changing the display order.

2. Touch [Move], and then the button display is changed to the in-use display.

3. Touch [↑] or [↓] to move the highlighted items.

4. Touch [Move], and then the button display is restored to the normal display.

To delete items

1. Touch [↑] or [↓] at Item Selection to highlight the deleting items.

2. Touch [Delete] to delete the item form the list.


7-55

7

Observin

g Waveform

7.11.2 Displaying Histogram The histogram display displays the data distribution in the set field to measure the mean, standard deviation, and dispersion width. To display histogram, set the axis, time, or amplitude for measuring histogram. And then, set the screen area to display histogram using the histogram marker. Also, the histogram marker position can be set by touching the screen or using the mouse.

Figure 7.11.2-1 Setting Example of Histogram Measurement


7-56


2. Touch the Active Channel Selection button, and then select the channel to be measured.


4. Touch [Histogram], or [Amp/Histogram].

5. When selecting [Amp/Histogram], touch the [Histogram] tab.

6. When measuring histogram for time direction, touch [Time] at [Axis]. When measuring histogram for amplitude direction, touch [Amplitude] at [Axis].

7. Input the value to the histogram marker X1, X2, Y1, and Y2, and then set the area. The area border to set the histogram marker is as shown in the following figure.

Y1

Y2

X1 X2

Toughing the screen and dragging the marker change the histogram marker position.

8. The measurement result of the data within the area is displayed. Mean: average value std Dev: standard deviation P-P: difference between maximum value and minimum value (Peak to Peak) Hits: data count within area

To display marker at screen center:

Touch [Center] at Histogram Marker to center the marker in the middle of screen.

When histogram measurement is turned on, depending upon the previous settings, the X and Y coordinates of the histogram window may be set beyond the boundaries of the current display screen. If this occurs, touching [Center] at Histogram Marker makes it easy to set the area.


7-57

7

Observin

g Waveform

Figure 7.11.2-1 Histogram Measurement Example (Amplitude)

Figure 7.11.2-2 Histogram Measurement Example (Time)


7-58

7.11.3 Executing Mask Test To execute the mask test, first select measurement channel and mask. There are two types of mask tests as follows:

Set the upper data error count and measure the mask margin.

Set the mask margin and measure the error data count.

Figure 7.11.3-1 Setting Example of Mask Test


7-59

7

Observin

g Waveform

To select channel and mask


2. Touch the Active Channel Selection button, and then select the channel to be measured.


4. Touch [Mask Test] or [Amplitude/Time&Mask].

5. When selecting [Amplitude/Time&Mask], touch the [Mask Test] tab.

6. Touch the [General] tab.

7. Touch the Eye Mask Select button to select the mask.

8. When selecting [User defined], the file selection dialog is opened. Touch the mask file and [OK].

For more information about the mask file, refer to D.2 “Mask File Specifications”. The selected mask or mask file is displayed in the [Current Mask] box of the measurement results. Refer to Figure 7.11.3-2 “Mask Test Example”.

Table 7.11.3-1 Mask List

Mask Name Bit Rate

1GFC 1.0625 Gbit/s 2GFC 2.125 Gbit/s 4GFC 4.25 Gbit/s 8GFC 8.5 Gbit/s 8GFC_Elect_Rx 8.5 Gbit/s 8GFC_Elect_Tx 8.5 Gbit/s 10GFC 10.52 Gbit/s 10GFC FEC 11.3 Gbit/s 1GbE 1.25 Gbit/s 2GbE 2.5 Gbit/s 10GbE_WAN 9.953 Gbit/s 10GbE_LAN/PHY 10.3125 Gbit/s 10GbE_FEC 11.10 Gbit/s OC48/STM16 2.488 Gbit/s OC192/STM64 9.953 Gbit/s OC192/STM64 FEC(G.975) 10.664 Gbit/s OTU-1 2.666057 Gbit/s


7-60

Table 7.11.3-1 Mask List (Cont’d)

Mask Name Bit Rate

OTU-2 1310nm 10.709 Gbit/s OTU-2 1310nm 10.709 Gbit/s OTU-2 1550nm 10.709 Gbit/s OTU-2 1550nm Expanded 10.709 Gbit/s User Defined *

*: This value varies depending on the selected file.

Table 7.11.3-2 Files That Can Be Selected When User Defined Is Selected

File Name Supported Standard Bit Rate

10GE-LX4.txt 10G Ethernet LX4 *1

10G_LAN.txt 10 LAN 10.3125 Gbit/s 10xGE.txt 10 x 1 Gbit/s Ethernet 12.5 Gbit/s 100BASE-BX_LX10.txt 100BASE-BX LX10 100 Mbit/s HDMI_TP1.txt*2 HDMI_TP2.txt*3

HDMI *1

InfiniBand.txt InfiniBand *1

OC12_STM4.txt OC-12/STM-4 622.08 Mbit/s OC192_STM64+FEC(G.709).txt OC-192/STM-64 ITU-T

G.709 FEC 10.709 Gbit/s

OC24_STM8.txt OC-24/STM-8 1.244 Gbit/s OC3_STM1.txt OC-3/STM-1 155.52 Mbit/s OC48_STM16+FEC(G.709).txt OC-48/STM-16 ITU-T

G.709 FEC 2.666 Gbit/s

SATA 1.5Gb TX250 Cyc.txt SATA 250 Cycle 1.5 Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gb TX5 Cyc.txt SATA 5 Cycle 1.5 Gbit/s XAUI-E Far.txt*4 XAUI-E Near.txt*5

XAUI Extender *1

*1: Unspecified

*2: Mask file for HDMI transmitter

*3: Mask file for HDMI receiver

*4: Mask file for XAUI Extender Far

*5: Mask file for XAUI Extender Near


7-61

7

Observin

g Waveform

To measure mask margin

1. Touch [Setup].

2. Touch the Sampling Mode button to set the display [Eye] or [Coherent Eye].

3. Touch [Sampling] to set the display Run.

4. When the trace is displayed, touch [Auto Scale]. Check that the eye pattern is displayed in the center of the screen.

5. Touch [Measure].

6. Touch the Active Channel Selection button to set the channel.


8. Touch [Mask Test] or [Amplitude/Time&Mask].

9. When selecting [Amplitude/Time&Mask], touch the [Mask Test] tab.

10. Touch the [Enhancement] tab.

11. Touch the Mask Area Restriction button to set to [Off].


13. Touch the Align Method button to set to [Zero/One/ Crossing].

14. Touch the Target Failed text box.

15. Input the upper limit of the data input to the mask area.

16. When performing the single measurement, touch the button on the right side of Mask Margin and set to [One Shot].

When performing the measurement continuously, touch the button on the right side of Mask Margin and set to [Continuous].

17. When selecting [One Shot], touch [Test] of Mask Margin to set Sampling to Hold and measure Mask Margin. On the other hand, when selecting [Continuous], set Sampling to Run to measure Mask Margin.

Despite the settings, the mask margin, which number of data inputting the mask area is under the Target Failed value, is measured.


7-62

To set Mask Margin and execute mask test

1. Touch [Setup].

2. Touch the Sampling Mode button to set the display [Eye] or [Coherent Eye].

3. Touch [Sampling] to set the display Run.

4. When the trace is displayed, touch [Auto Scale]. Check that the eye pattern is displayed in the center of the screen.

5. Touch [Measure].


7. Touch [Mask Test].


9. Touch the Mask Area Restriction button to set to [Off].


11. Touch the Align Method button to set to [Zero/One/ Crossing].

12. Touch the right side button of Mask Margin to set to [One Shot].

13 Touch the mask margin text box.

14. Input the mask margin in the range of –100 to 100.

15. The shape of the mask is changed, and the measurement result is displayed on the screen.

Note

When executing the Mask Test, run Auto Scale to set Bit On Screen to 2. The Mask Test measured value is assured when Bit On Screen is 2. If Bit On Screen is 3 or more, the optimum Mask position may not be detected because the vertical scale setting is not optimum.


7-63

7

Observin

g Waveform

Figure 7.11.3-2 Mask Test Example

The following values are displayed in the measurement result: Total Samples: Total data count displayed on the screen Total Waveforms: Total waveform count displayed on the

screen Mask Margin: Mask Margin measurement results or

settings Target Failed Samples: Data count set to measure Mask Margin Total Failed Samples: Total data count within three mask areas Top Mask Failed Samples: Data count in top mask area Center Mask Failed Samples: Data count in center mask area Bottom Mask Failed Samples: Data count in bottom mask area Current Mask: Present mask name


7-64

Adjusting mask position

To adjust mask position automatically

When Mask Alignment Algorithm is [Zero/One/Crossing], touch the Mask Alignment [Update].

When touching the Mask Alignment [Update], calculate [One/Zero Crossing] of the currently described waveform and optimize the mask position automatically.

The mask position is adjusted automatically if the Scale and Offset on the screen are changed. However, the mask position cannot be changed.

To adjust mask position manually

When Alignment Method is [User Defined], the mask position, width and amplitude can be adjusted using the marker.

1. Touch the right side button of and set [Display On] to display the marker.

X1 X2 Y1 Y2

2. Touch the X1 text box to set the mask position.

3. Touch the X text box to set the mask width.

4. Touch the Y1 text box to set the level 1.

5. Touch the Y text box to set the level 0.

Touching [Center] moves the marker without depending on the waveforms. In this case, the setting values of X1, ΔX, Y1, and ΔY are initialized.


7-65

7

Observin

g Waveform

Although the marker is not displayed at [Display Off], the marker position can be adjusted by changing the value in the text box. To limit mask area

To examine in which part of the mask at the center the error occurs when the error occurs in the mask test, the mask area can be limited. Setting width and angle can limit the mask area. If the mask area is limited, the error that occurs in an upper and lower mask area is not measured.

Top

Bottom

Center

Angle 0° Width 0.1 UI



0.1 UI

0.3 UI

Figure 7.11.3-3 Example of Limiting Mask Area

1. Touch [Measure].


3. Touch [Mask Test].


5. Touch the Mask Area Restriction button to set [On].

6. Touch the [Angle] text box to set the angle within the range of –90 to 90.

7. Touch the [Width] text box to set the width within the range of 0.01 to 1.00.


7-66

”Restriction enabled" is displayed in the measurement result display area.

Figure 7.11.3-4 Example of Area Limited Mask Test

7.12 Using Marker

7-67

7

Observin

g Waveform

7.12 Using Marker The marker is used to read the amplitude and time values of the waveform. Also, the level and time differences between two points can be measured.

There are two markers each for the x- and y-axes. Display of each marker can be set to on or off separately.

1. Touch [Marker] to display the marker panel. The marker panel can be moved in the EYE/Pulse Scope window.

2. To display the marker, touch the upper line buttons other than [All Off]. When the marker is displayed, the lower line buttons are invalid.

3. To move the marker, touch the lower line buttons other than [Center]. The selected marker button is changed to the in-use display, and then the icon is displayed.

4. Set the marker position using the rotary knob. The marker position and time/level differences are displayed.

Marker Panel

X1 Off/On, X2 Off/On, Y1 Off/On, Y2 Off/On

Sets marker display

X1, X2, Y1, Y2 Selects marker to be moved

Center Centers marker in the screen

All Off Hide all markers

When the measurement result is displayed, touch [ ↑ ] at the left side of [Marker] to switch the marker display.


7-68

Figure 7.12.3-1 Marker Display

7.13 Waveform Math Calculation

7-69

7

Observin

g Waveform

7.13 Waveform Math Calculation The calculated math results for the two CH A and CH B waveforms can be displayed as a different waveform. The calculated math results can be measured at Section 7.11 “Measuring Waveform”.

Note:

When calculating the EYE pattern waveform, set Sampling Mode to [Coherent Eye] and collect the data.

If Sampling Mode is set to [Eye] and data is collected, a computational error occurs.

Setting waveform calculation method and vertical scale

1. Touch [Amplitude] to display the Amplitude dialog.

2. Touch the Channel Math button to set the button display to [On].

3. Touch the Define Function button at Channel Offset.

4. Select the calculation method from the following: [CH A+CH B] [CH A–CH B] [CH B–CH A]

5. Touch the Scale text box at Channel Offset.

6. Input the voltage per vertical scale.

7. Touch the Offset text box at Channel Offset.

8. Input the voltage for the center of the vertical scale.

For the adjustment method of the time axis, refer to 7.10.3 “Adjusting Horizontal-axis Screen”. Even when the calculated waveform is displayed, [Auto Scale] can be displayed.

To close the waveform calculation display, touch the Channel Math button and set the button display to [Off].


7-70

7.14 Using Trace Memory The trace memory is a function to save the measurement waveform in the memory. The waveform saved in the trace memory calls the reference trace. To save the waveform in the trace memory



3. Touch the Ref.Trace Channel button and select the channel to be saved from the following. [Ch A & Ch B] [Ch A] [Ch B]

4. Touch [Set Reference].

5. The trace waveform is displayed in the screen.

Trace memory A

Trace memory B

Figure 7.14-1 Waveform Display of Trace Memory

To delete the trace memory waveform



3. Touch [Clear Reference] to delete both reference traces in Channel A and B.

7.15 Displaying a Label

7-71

7

Observin

g Waveform

7.15 Displaying a Label This section describes how to display an arbitrary string (label) in the EYE/Pulse Scope screen.

Label

Figure 7.15-1 Label Display

Displaying a label

1. Touch [Setup], and the Setup dialog box appears.

2. Touch [Utilities] tab.

3. Touch [Add] for NEW Label, and the software keyboard appears.

4. On the software keyboard, enter a string of up to 1024 characters.

5. Touch [OK］ on the software keyboard, and the label is displayed on the screen.

Note:

The location, width and color of the label cannot be changed.

Deleting the displayed label

1. Touch [Setup], and the Setup dialog box appears.

2. Touch [Utilities] tab.

3. Touch [Delete] for Delete Label, and the displayed label is deleted.


7-72

7.16 Saving Measurement Results The sampling scope results can be saved in the following file types:

Screen image The waveform display and measurement result display area are saved as a jpeg or png file.

Measurement result The waveform is saved as a text file, binary file or CSV file.

Measurement condition The setting values in the Amplitude, Measurement, Setup, and Time dialogs are saved in the file.

To save screen image

When saving the entire screen

1. Touch [Screen Copy] at the system menu. The file selection screen is displayed.

2. Touch the Drives button and the Directories field to set the save destination folder. The path to the save folder is displayed at the Save to field.

3. The file format to be saved is displayed in the right button of the file type. Touching the button can set the file format.

4. To set the file name, touch [Screen Keyboard] and input the file name.

5. When overwriting an existing file, touch the file name displayed at File List.


7-73

7

Observin

g Waveform

6. Touch [OK] to save the screen image. When overwriting a file, a confirmation dialog is displayed.

The path to the default folder is: C:\Program Files\Anritsu\MP2100A\MX21000A\UserData\Screen Copy The date and time are recorded in the default file name.

When saving the measurement screen:

1. Touch [Setup].

2. Touch [Utilities].

3. To save both waveform and measurement results as an image, switch the option for Waveform only to [Off]. To save only the waveform as an image, switch the option for Waveform only to [On].

4. To reverse the screen color, set Inverse background color to [On].

Inverse Off Inverse On

5. Touch [Capture]. The file selection screen same as the entire screen to be saved is displayed.

6. Set the file format, folder and file name and touch [OK].

7. The image png file is saved in the following path when the folder is set to the default.

C:\Program Files\Anritsu\MP2100A\MX21000A\UserData\Screen Copy


7-74

To save measurement condition or measurement result

1. Touch [Save] at the system menu.

2. Touch [EYE/Pulse Scope].

3. When saving the measurement condition, touch [Setting]. When saving the measurement result, touch [Result].

4. Input the file name.

5. Touch [OK] or press the rotary knob.

The measurement condition file is saved in the following folder. The extension for saved files is WFS. C:\Program Files\Anritsu\MP2100A\MX21000A\UserData\Setting

The measurement result file is saved in the following folder. The extension of the measurement data file is CSV and TXT. C:\Program Files\Anritsu\MP2100A\MX21000A\UserData\Result\CSV C:\Program Files\Anritsu\MP2100A\MX21000A\UserData\Result\TXT

Figure 7.16-1 Example of Image File

The measurement results file saves the number of samples per screen pixel.


7-75

7

Observin

g Waveform

Figure 7.16-2 File Example of Screen Data


7-76

Amplitude/Time Measurement [Results] One Level CH A 192.12 191.80 0.10 191.66 192.12 One Level CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Zero Level CH A -185.98 -185.63 0.10 -186.00 -185.43 Zero Level CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Eye Amplitude CH A 378.10 377.44 0.19 377.16 378.12 Eye Amplitude CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Eye Height CH A 330.00 329.46 0.19 329.13 330.03 Eye Height CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Crossing CH A 49.55 50.18 0.24 49.53 50.28 Crossing CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A SNR CH A 23.58 23.60 0.04 23.52 23.67 SNR CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Average Power (dBm) CH A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Average Power (dBm) CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Average Power (mW) CH A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Average Power (mW) CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Extinction Ratio CH A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Extinction Ratio CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Jitter P-P CH A 15.57 12.15 0.99 10.97 15.92 Jitter P-P CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Jitter RMS CH A 2.57 1.93 0.13 1.85 2.58 Jitter RMS CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Rise Time CH A 23.26 22.94 0.11 22.82 23.31 Rise Time CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Fall Time CH A 22.21 22.02 0.07 21.93 22.29 Fall Time CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Eye Width CH A 102.34 106.04 0.74 101.99 106.65 Eye Width CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A DCD CH A 1.80 1.73 0.39 0.75 2.71 DCD CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A OMA (mW) CH A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A OMA (mW) CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A OMA (dBm) CH A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A OMA (dBm) CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Waveform 665x497 CH A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.....(waveform data) CH B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.....(waveform data)

Figure 7.16-3 File Example of Amplitude/Time Measurement Data


7-77

7

Observin

g Waveform

Amplitude/Time and Mask Measurement - Channel A [Setups] Current Mask 1G Optical Fibre Channel Mask (1.0625 Gbps) [Results] One Level CH A 189.37 189.71 0.20 189.32 190.04 One Level CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Zero Level CH A -185.00 -185.35 0.20 -185.73 -184.89 Zero Level CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Eye Amplitude CH A 374.37 375.07 0.39 374.21 375.73 Eye Amplitude CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Eye Height CH A 326.99 327.54 0.37 326.40 328.27 Eye Height CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Crossing CH A 49.89 49.82 0.16 49.47 50.66 Crossing CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A SNR CH A 23.70 23.67 0.04 23.12 23.79 SNR CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Average Power (dBm) CH A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Average Power (dBm) CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Average Power (mW) CH A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Average Power (mW) CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Extinction Ratio CH A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Extinction Ratio CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Jitter P-P CH A 11.32 11.62 0.90 7.78 14.86 Jitter P-P CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Jitter RMS CH A 1.86 1.86 0.06 1.74 2.19 Jitter RMS CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Rise Time CH A 35.24 31.12 5.85 22.66 35.68 Rise Time CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Fall Time CH A 33.30 29.38 5.39 21.53 33.50 Fall Time CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Eye Width CH A 106.78 106.48 0.40 104.43 107.24 Eye Width CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A DCD CH A 1.50 1.04 0.42 0.00 2.26 DCD CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A OMA (mW) CH A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A OMA (mW) CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A OMA (dBm) CH A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A OMA (dBm) CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Total Samples 974729 Total Waveforms 119 Mask Margin 0 Target Failed Samples 1 Total Failed Samples 0 Top Mask Failed Samples 0 Center Mask Failed Samples 0 Bottom Mask Failed Samples 0 Waveform 665x497 CH A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.....(waveform data) CH B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.....(waveform data)

Figure 7.16-4 File Example of Histogram Measurement Data


7-78

Amplitude/Time and Histogram Measurement - Channel A [Setups] Axis Time X1 Marker 0.50UI X2 Marker 1.50UI Y1 Marker 9mV Y2 Marker -10mV [Results] One Level CH A 189.65 189.84 0.13 189.60 190.04 One Level CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Zero Level CH A -185.34 -185.48 0.14 -185.73 -185.12 Zero Level CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Eye Amplitude CH A 374.99 375.31 0.26 374.72 375.73 Eye Amplitude CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Eye Height CH A 327.54 327.74 0.27 326.40 328.27 Eye Height CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Crossing CH A 49.89 49.82 0.17 49.47 50.66 Crossing CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A SNR CH A 23.71 23.67 0.04 23.12 23.76 SNR CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Average Power (dBm) CH A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Average Power (dBm) CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Average Power (mW) CH A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Average Power (mW) CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Extinction Ratio CH A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Extinction Ratio CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Jitter P-P CH A 11.68 11.71 0.84 7.78 14.86 Jitter P-P CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Jitter RMS CH A 1.83 1.87 0.07 1.77 2.19 Jitter RMS CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Rise Time CH A 35.16 27.11 5.94 22.66 35.68 Rise Time CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Fall Time CH A 33.16 25.65 5.45 21.53 33.50 Fall Time CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Eye Width CH A 106.25 106.41 0.46 104.43 107.01 Eye Width CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A DCD CH A 1.80 1.06 0.45 0.00 2.11 DCD CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A OMA (mW) CH A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A OMA (mW) CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A OMA (dBm) CH A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A OMA (dBm) CH B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Mean 100.62 Std Dev 1.87 P-P 11.68 Hits 3835 Hit Point Detail 0.50UI 0 Hits 0.50UI 0 Hits 0.51UI 0 Hits 0.51UI 0 Hits 0.51UI 0 Hits : : (Hit Point data) Waveform 665x497 CH A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.....(waveform data) CH B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.....(waveform data)

Figure 7.16-5 File Example of Mask Measurement Data


7-79

7

Observin

g Waveform

Histogram Measurement - Channel A [Setups] Axis Amplitude X1 Marker 0.73UI X2 Marker 0.75UI Y1 Marker 287mV Y2 Marker -276mV [Results] Mean 5.27 Std Dev 188.49 P-P 423.91 Hits 11979 Hit Point Detail 287mV 0 Hits 284mV 0 Hits 281mV 0 Hits 279mV 0 Hits 276mV 0 Hits 273mV 0 Hits 270mV 0 Hits 268mV 0 Hits : : (Hit Point data) Waveform 665x497 CH A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.....(waveform data) CH B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.....(waveform data)

Figure 7.16-6 File Example of Histogram Measurement Data


7-80.

Mask Measurement - Channel A [Setups] Current Mask 8G Optical Fibre Channel Mask (8.5 Gbps) [Results] Total Samples 991111 Total Waveforms 121 Mask Margin 0 Target Failed Samples 1 Total Failed Samples 0 Top Mask Failed Samples 0 Center Mask Failed Samples 0 Bottom Mask Failed Samples 0 Waveform 665x497 CH A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.....(waveform data) CH B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.....(waveform data)

Figure 7.16-7 File Example of Mask Measurement Data

Chapter 8 Operating Optical Interface

8-1

8

Operatin

g Optical In

terface

This chapter explains how to use the optical interface option.

8.1 Optical Interface Types ................................................. 8-2 8.2 Operating Optical Transceiver ...................................... 8-6

8.2.1 Function List ..................................................... 8-6 8.2.2 Optical Transceiver Types ................................ 8-8 8.2.3 Connection between Panel Connector and

Optical Transceiver ........................................... 8-9 8.3 Operating O/E Converter ............................................ 8-10

8.3.1 Function List ................................................... 8-10 8.3.2 Calibration of O/E Module .............................. 8-14 8.3.3 Adjustment required

when changing the wavelength bands ........... 8-14


8-2

8.1 Optical Interface Types The following optical interface types are available.

O/E converter

Optical transceiver (XFP)

Optical transceiver (SFP+) O/E Converter

The O/E converter configured by the wide bandwidth photo diode and amplifier can convert the optical signal to the electrical signal. The block diagram of the MP2102A-023 O/E converter is as follows.

+V

Photodiode

Amplifier

O/E Data In

O/E MonitorOut

Low Pass Filter (Option 056/057)

Figure 8.1-1 O/E Converter Block Diagram

The O/E Monitor Output connector is not available on the MP2100A-003 and MP2100A-007 front panel. Here, the conversion efficiency means the ratio that the photodiode converts the optical signal to electrical signal. This efficiency varies depending on the wavelength. To measure the optical waveform amplitude correctly, it is necessary to calibrate the conversion efficiency. The value multiplied the photodiode conversion efficiency by amplifier gain is called the conversion gain.

8.1 Optical Interface Types

8-3

8

Operatin

g Optical In

terface

CAUTION

• The maximum optical power input to the O/E Data In is

+2 dBm (1.58 mW). Inputting an optical power

exceeding this level risks damaging the internal

circuits. Connect the optical attenuator to the O/E Data

In when measuring the optical signal exceeding +2

dBm.

• The impedance of the O/E Monitor Out connectors is 50

Ω. Measurement may not be performed correctly if a

coaxial cable with another impedance is used or if the

impedance of the DUT is not 50 Ω.


8-4

Optical Transceiver (XFP/SFP+)

Optical transceivers combine the following two functions in one module:

Tx for converting electrical signal into optical signal for transmission

Rx for converting optical signal into electrical signal for reception The format and pin layout of the optical transceiver for communication are standardized by the industry organization. So, just changing the optical transceiver makes the optical interface specifications easily. The MP2100A+MP2100A-050/051 and MP2101A+MP2101A-050/051 can install the optical transceiver conformed with the XFP (10 Gigabit small form factor pluggable module) or SFP+ (Enhanced small form factor pluggable module), using the options. For the references of the optical transceiver, refer to Appendix F “Bibliography”. The logic circuit is used in the Optical transceiver. This is the different from the O/E converter. The relationship between input signal and output signal is the nonlinearity because the waveform of the optical transceiver is shaped by the logic circuit.

+V

Photodiode

Limiter amp

Rx In

Rx +

Rx -

Buffer

Tx +

Tx -

Tx Out

+V

Limiter amp

Laser Diode

Laser Diode Driver

Figure 8.1-2 Optical Transceiver Block Diagram

8.1 Optical Interface Types

8-5

8

Operatin

g Optical In

terface

CAUTION

• Be sure that the optical power input to the Rx of the

optical transceiver is the specified max .value or less.

Inputting an optical power rather than this power risks

damaging the internal circuits.

• Use the appropriate optical fiber to the optical

transceiver. Measurement may not be performed

correctly if the optical fiber types (multi-mode fiber,

single mode fiber) are not applicable.

• The impedance of the Tx Data In and Rx Data Out

connectors is 50 Ω. Measurement may not be

performed correctly if a coaxial cable with another

impedance is used or if the impedance of the

connected devices is not 50 Ω.


8-6

8.2 Operating Optical Transceiver 8.2.1 Function List

The following items is set and displayed for the optical transceiver.

Table 8.2.1-1 Optical Transceiver Setting Items

Item Description

Wavelength Displays wavelength of light output from the optical transceiver. When the recommended optical transceiver is installed, one of the following wavelength is displayed. 850 nm, 1310 nm, 1550 nm

Output Outputs light to the Tx connector of the Optical transceiver. Touch the Output button, and then the display is changed to ON or Off. The optical output indication is as follows: Green: On Black: Off

LOS Indicates that the light is input to the RX connector of the Optical transceiver. Red: No input light (Loss of signal) Gray: Input light

Ready Indicates the optical transceiver installed status. Green: Available Black: Optical transceiver not installed or not found

XFP Rx Reference CLK

When the optical transceiver is XFP, select the reference clock supplied to XFP.

8.2 Operating Optical Transceiver

8-7

8

Operatin

g Optical In

terface

To display the optical transceiver setting screen, touch [ XFP/SFP+ ] at the top menu. The screen as shown in Figure 8.2.1-1 is displayed.

Reference clock source

Wavelength display

Optical output

Loss of signalindicator

Optical outputindicator

Optical transceiverinstalled statusindicator

Figure 8.2.1-1 Optical Transceiver Setting Panel (XFP)

Wavelength display

Optical output

Loss of signalindicator

Optical output indicator

Optical transceiverinstalled statusindicator

Figure 8.2.1-2 Optical Transceiver Setting Panel (SFP+)

The setting range of the optical transceiver is as follows.

Optical Output

Off On

XFP Rx Ref CLK Sync with PPG2 Sync with ED2


8-8

8.2.2 Optical Transceiver Types The recommended optical transceiver is listed in Table 8.2.2-1. For the specifications of the optical transceiver, refer to A.4 “Optical Transceiver Module Specifications”.

For how to install the optical transceiver, refer to Section 2.8 “Installing Optical Transceiver”.

Table 8.2.2-1 XFP

Model Name

Wavelength (nm)

Appropriate Optical Fiber

Bit Rate (kbit/s)

G0174A 850 MMF 9950000 to 11100000 G0194A 1310 SMF 9950000 to 11300000 G0195A 1550 SMF 9950000 to 10750000

Table 8.2.2-2 SFP+

Model Name

Wavelength (nm)

Appropriate Optical Fiber

Bit Rate (kbit/s)

G0238A 850 MMF 10312500 G0239A 1310 SMF 9953280 to 10312500

8.2 Operating Optical Transceiver

8-9

8

Operatin

g Optical In

terface

8.2.3 Connection between Panel Connector and Optical Transceiver The Tx Data In connector on the front panel connects to the TX+ of the optical transceiver module.

The Rx Data Out connector on the front panel connects to the RX + of the optical transceiver module.

TX+

TX–

RX+

RX–

TX Data In

Rx Data Out

SFP+/XFP

Figure 8.2.3-1 Connection Diagram between Panel Connector and

Optical Transceiver


8-10

8.3 Operating O/E Converter 8.3.1 Function List

The following items are set and displayed when installing the O/E converter.

Table 8.3.1-1 O/E Converter Setting Items

Item Description

Conversion Gain* Indicates the conversion ratio of the O/E. The setting range is from 1 to 9999 (V/W).

Filter On/Off When installing Opt-086, the internal low pass filter is set to On/Off.

Filter Selection When installing from Opt-056 to Opt-069, the internal low pass filter is set.

Extinction Ratio Correction

Sets whether to correct the Extinction Ratio measurement.

Extinction Ratio Correction Factor

Indicates the correction factor of Extinction Ratio The setting range is from –9.99 to 9.99%.

O/E Calibration Starts module calibration. Responsivity* Rate at which photodiode converts optical power to

current The setting range is from 0.001 to 999.999.

System Conversion Gain*

Indicates the conversion ratio between the power input to the O/E Data In and the voltage displayed on the Result window. It is found from the following formula: System Conversion Gain Conversion gain

Measurement internal loss×Filter loss When installing from Opt-056 to Opt-069, the loss is used for calculation. The loss varies with the filter types.

Wavelength Select the wavelength of input light from the following: 850 nm, 1310 nm, 1550 nm, User The Responsivity, Conversion Gain, or System Conversion Gain varies depending on the wavelength.

Calibration Automatically adjusts the Conversion Gain/ Responsivity /System Conversion Gain values. For adjustment, refer to 8.3.3 “Adjustment required when changing the wavelength bands”.

Input Power Sets optical signal power input to the device. The setting range is –2 to –10dBm.

*: Changes in the setting values of Conversion Gain, Responsivity and System Conversion Gain are not required when measuring an optical signal at a wavelength of 850 nm, 1310 nm or 1550 nm. For these wavelength bands, calibrated values have been set before shipment from the factory.

=

8.3 Operating O/E Converter

8-11

8

Operatin

g Optical In

terface

To measure an optical signal at the other wavelength than 850 nm, 1310 nm or 1550 nm, change the setting values of Conversion Gain, Responsivity and System Conversion Gain according to the changed wavelength. For how to change the setting values, refer to 8.3.3 “Adjustment required when changing the wavelength bands”.

To display the O/E converter setting screen, touch [O/E] at the top menu. The screen as shown in Figure 8.3.1-1 is displayed.

Figure 8.3.1-1 O/E Setting Panel

System conversion gain

Wavelength settings

Conversion responsivity

Filter settings

Extinction ratio Extinction ratio correction factor

Conversion gain

Calibration

Filter On/Off

Conversion gain calibration

Input power


8-12

The setting range of the O/E converter is as follows.

Conversion Gain 1 to 9999 V/W

Extinction Ratio Correction On

Extinction Ratio Correction Factor –9.99 to 9.99 %

Filter O/E Calibration

ResponsivityOff

Sync with PPG1

Sync with ED1

1 to 9999 V/W

No Filter

1GFC *1

2GFC *2

4GFC *2

8GFC *2,*3

10GFC *3

10GFC FEC *3

10GbE FEC *3

10GbE LAN/PHY *2,*3

10GbE WAN *2,*3

CPRI *4

Infiniband×4 *2,*3

OC-3/STM-1 *5

OC-12/STM-4 *6

OC-192/STM-64 *2,*3

G975 FEC *2,*4

OTU-1 *7

OTU-2 *3,*4

Responsivity 0.001 to 999.999 A/W

Sys Conversion Gain 1 to 7404 *8 V/W

Wavelength 1310 nm 1550 nm


8-13

8

Operatin

g Optical In

terface

850 nm User

Input Power –2 to –10 dBm

*1: When installing Option 064 065, 066, 067, 068 or 069 including the filter for 1.0625 Gbit/s as the product configuration.



*4: When installing Option 064, 065, 066, 067, 068 or 069 including the filter for 614.4 Gbit/s as the product configuration.




*8: Without Option When installing Option, sometimes the upper limit is lower than 7404


8-14

8.3.2 Calibration of O/E Module When light is not input to the O/E module, the output voltage is adjusted. The output voltage of the O/E module changes depending on the ambient temperature. Calibrate the MP2100A before using the O/E module. 1. Close the O/E Data In cap.

2. Touch [Calibrate Module].

3. The window confirming that the light is not input is displayed. Touch [OK].

4. The window indicating that the calibration is finished at about five seconds is displayed. Touch [OK].

8.3.3 Adjustment required when changing the wavelength bands To measure an optical signal at the other wavelength band than 850 nm, 1310 nm or 1550 nm, adjust the values of Conversion Gain, Responsivity and System Conversion Gain. Warm up the O/E module at least one hour because the output voltage varies depending on the ambient temperature. Additionally, be sure to calibrate the sampling oscilloscope before performing adjustment. <Adjusting Manually>

Adjustment method of Conversion Gain (System Conversion Gain)

1. Adjust the wavelength of the optical power meter to the optical signal.

2. Measure unmodulated optical signal power with the optical power meter.

3. Input the optical signal to the optical input connector of MP2100A-003 or MP2102A-023.

4. Measure the average of the optical signal power by using the Histogram function of the sampling oscilloscope.

5. Display the O/E setting panel.

6. Set Wavelength to User.

7. Adjust the Conversion Gain value so that the average of the optical signal power measured by the Histogram function of the sampling oscilloscope becomes equal to the value measured by the power meter. The System Conversion Gain value is automatically set by setting the Conversion Gain value.


8-15

8

Operatin

g Optical In

terface

Adjustment method of Responsivity

1. Adjust the wavelength of the optical power meter to the optical signal.



4. Measure the Average Power (mW) or Average Power (dBm) of the optical signal by using the Amplitude/Time function of the sampling oscilloscope.



7. Adjust the Responsivity value so that the Average Power value of the optical signal measured by the Amplitude/Time function of the sampling oscilloscope becomes equal to the value measured by the optical power meter.

<Adjusting Automatically by Auto Correction>

1. Adjust the wavelength of the optical power meter to that of the optical signal.





6. Set the Input Power to the value of the optical signal power measured by Step 2.

7. Press [Execute] to calibrate automatically.

8 When Auto Correction is completed, the values of Conversion Gain, Responsivity, and System Conversion Gain are adjusted so that they become equal to the values measured by the optical power meter.


8-16.

Chapter 9 Performance Test

9-1

9

Perform

ance Test

This chapter describes how to the performance of the BERTWave Series.

9.1 Performance Test for Pulse Pattern Generator ............ 9-2 9.1.1 Apparatus Required for Performance Test ...... 9-2 9.1.2 Operating Frequency Range ............................ 9-3 9.1.3 Waveform ......................................................... 9-4 9.1.4 Full Rate Clock Output ..................................... 9-6

9.2 Performance Test for Error Detector ............................ 9-7 9.2.1 Apparatus Required for Performance Test ...... 9-7 9.2.2 Operating Frequency ........................................ 9-8 9.2.3 Input Level ...................................................... 9-10 9.2.4 Pattern ............................................................ 9-13 9.2.5 Error Detection ............................................... 9-14

9.3 Performance Test for Sampling Scope ....................... 9-16 9.3.1 Apparatus Required for Performance Test .... 9-16 9.3.2 Amplitude Accuracy ........................................ 9-17

9.4 Performance Test for Optical Interface

(O/E Converter)........................................................... 9-20 9.4.1 Apparatus Required for Performance Test .... 9-20 9.4.2 Optical Power Meter ....................................... 9-21


9-2

9.1 Performance Test for Pulse Pattern Generator The pulse pattern generator is required to test the following items.

Operation frequency range

Waveform

Full rate clock output (with Opt-052/152)

CAUTION Connect a 50 Ω terminator to unused input/output

connectors.

9.1.1 Apparatus Required for Performance Test The following table shows the required equipment for performance test.

Before starting performance tests, warm up the MP2100A/MP2101A and the measuring instruments for at least 1 hour.

Table 9.1.1-1 Equipment for Performance Test

Product Name Required Performance Recommended

Equipment

Sampling oscilloscope

Electrical interface Bandwidth: 20 GHz or more

MP2100A or MP2102A (Anritsu)

Frequency counter

Frequency range: 500 MHz to 20 GHz Accuracy: 0.1 ppm max.

MF2412C (Anritsu)

9.1 Performance Test for Pulse Pattern Generator

9-3

9

Perform

ance Test

9.1.2 Operating Frequency Range Procedure:

1. Connect the Sync Output connector to the input connector of the frequency counter.

2. Connect the PPG1 Data Out and PPG1 Data Out to the coaxial terminator.

3. Touch [PPG/ED1 Ch1]. 4. Set Sync Output to [PPG1_1/8 Clk]. 5. Set Reference Clock to [Internal]. 6. Select [Variable] at Bit Rate and input 11320000 kbit/s. When Opt-090 is added, input12500000 kbit/s. 7. Set [Offset] at Bit Rate to 0 ppm. 8. Set Data/XData to [On]. 9. Read the setting value of the frequency counter. 10. Check that the read value multiplied by 8 is within the following

range. When the Option 090 is not installed: 11320000±1132 kHz When the Option 090 is installed: 12500000±1250 kHz

11. Set Bit Rate to 8500000 kbit/s. When Opt-090 is added, input 8000000 kbit/s.

12. Read the value measured by the frequency counter. 13. Check that the read value multiplied by a factor of 8 is within the

following limited values. Without Option 090: 8500000±850 kHz With Option 090: 8000000±800 kHz

Frequency counter

Sync Out Input

707 500 002.3 Hz

Figure 9.1.2-1 Operation Frequency Range Test Setup


9-4

9.1.3 Waveform Procedure:

1. Connect the Sync Output connector and the trigger input connector of the sampling oscilloscope using a coaxial cable.

2. Connect the PPG1 Data Out connector and the input connector of the sampling oscilloscope using a coaxial cable.

3. Connect the coaxial terminator to the PPG1 Data Out connector.

4. Touch [PPG/ED Ch1].

5. Connect Sync Output to [PPG1_1/16 Clk].

6. Set Reference Clock to [Internal].

7. Select [Variable] at Bit Rate and input 11320000 kbit/s.

8. Set External Attenuation to 0 dB.

9. Set Test Pattern to [ PRBS 2^23–1 ].

10. Set Data/XData to [ On ].

11. Set Amplitude to 0.1 Vp-p.

12. Measure the amplitude using the sampling oscilloscope.


14. Measure the amplitude using the sampling oscilloscope.

15. Connect the PPG1 Data Out connector to the input connector of the sampling oscilloscope.


17. Repeat steps 11 to 14.

9.1 Performance Test for Pulse Pattern Generator

9-5

9

Perform

ance Test

The following measurement added when selecting Ch2.


2. Connect the PPG2 Data Out connector to the coaxial terminator.


4. Set Sync Output to [PPG2_1/16 Clk].

5. Repeat steps from 6 to 14 at Ch1.



8. Repeat steps from 11 to 14 at Ch1.

MP2102


Sync Out Trigger Input

PPG1 Data Out

Input

Figure 9.1.3-1 Waveform Test Connection Figure


9-6

9.1.4 Full Rate Clock Output When Opt-052/152 is installed, the signal output at Full Rate Clock Output can be tested.

Procedure:

1. Connect the PPG1 Data Output connector and sampling oscilloscope trigger input connector using a coaxial cable.

2. Connect Clock Output and the sampling oscilloscope input connector using a coaxial cable.

3. Connect a coaxial terminator to the PPG1 Data Out connector.


5. Set Test Pattern to [Programmable Pattern] and select [11110000.dat].

6. Set Sync Output to [PPG1_1/8Clk].

7. Set Reference Clock to [Internal].

8. Select [Variable] for Bit Rate and input 10000000 kbit/s.

9. Set Data/XData to [On].


11. Measure the Amplitude, Rise Time, Fall Time, Duty, and Jitter (RMS) at the sampling oscilloscope.

MP2102


CLK Out

Trigger Input

PPG1 Data Out

Input

Figure 9.1.4-1 Full Rate Clock Output Test Connection Setup

9.2 Performance Test for Error Detector

9-7

9

Perform

ance Test

9.2 Performance Test for Error Detector The ED is required to test the following performance.

Operating frequency

Input level

Pattern

Error detection Before testing the performance of the ED, confirm that the performance of the tested pulse pattern generator satisfies the specifications.

9.2.1 Apparatus Required for Performance Test The following table lists the equipment for performance test.

Before starting performance tests, warm up the MP2100A/MP2101A and the measuring instruments for at least 1 hour.


Product Name

Required Performance Recommended

Equipment


Bit rate: 4.25 to 11.32 Gbit/s Amplitude: 0.1 to 0.8 V

MP2100A, MP2101A (Anritsu)

E/O Converter

Bit rate: 10.3125 GHz Extinction ratio: 8.2 dB or more VECP 0.5 dB or less

MP2100A-050, MP2101A-050 (Anritsu)

Variable Optical Attenuator

For single mode fiber Waveform: 1200 to 1600 nm Insertion loss: 3 dB or less Attenuation: 0 to 30 dB Resolution: 0.1 dB or less

8163B+81570A (Agilent Technology)

For multi-mode fiber Waveform: 800 to 900 nm Insertion loss: 3 dB or less Attenuation: 0 to 30 dB Resolution: 0.1 dB or less



9-8

9.2.2 Operating Frequency Procedure:

1. Connect the PPG1 Data Out and the ED1 Data In using a coaxial cable.

2. Connect the PPG1 Data Out and ED1 Data In to the coaxial terminator.

3. Touch [PPG/ED Ch1] → [PPG]. Set the value as follows: Amplitude: 0.1 V Bit Rate: Variable, 11320000 kbit/s Data/XData Out: On Reference Clock: Internal Offset: 100 ppm Test Pattern: PRBS 2^31–1, Pos

4. Touch [ED], and then set the value as follows: Bit Rate: Variable, 11320000 kbit/s Data Input condition: Electrical Single-Ended Data Gating Cycle: Single Gating Period: 10 s Test Pattern: PRBS 2^31–1, Pos Threshold: 0 mV

5. Touch [Start] at All Measure.

6. Record the FREQ (kHz) of the ED Result and error count (EC) after measurement.

7. Set Offset to –100 set at step 3.

8. Touch [Start] at All Measure.


10. Connect the PPG1 Data Out and ED1 Data In using a coaxial cable.


12. Touch [PPG/ED Ch1] → [PPG], and set the value as follows. Offset: 100 ppm

13. Touch [ED], and set the value as follows. Data Input condition: Electrical Single-Ended XData



9-9

9

Perform

ance Test

When using MP2100A-005 and MP2101A-012: 1. Connect the PPG2 Data connector and ED2 Data connector using a

coaxial cable.

2. Connect the PPG2 Data Out and ED2 Data In to the coaxial terminator .

3. Touch [PPG/ED Ch2], and then repeat steps 3 to 10.



6. Touch [PPG], and set the value as follows. Offset: 100 ppm

7. Touch [ED], and set the value as follows. Data Input condition: Electrical Single-Ended XData


PPG1 Data Out

ED1 Data In

PPG1 Data Out

ED1 Data In

Coaxial Terminator

Coaxial Terminator

Figure 9.2.2-1 Operating Frequency Test Connection Setup

PPG2 Data Out

ED2 DataIn

PPG2 Data Out

ED2 DataIn

Coaxial Terminator

Coaxial Terminator

Figure 9.2.2-2 Operating Frequency Test Connection Setup (MP2100A-005, MP2101A-012)


9-10

9.2.3 Input Level Procedure:



3. Touch [PPG], and then set the value as follows: Amplitude: 0.1 V Bit Rate: Variable, 11320000 kbit/s Data/XData Out: On Error Addition: Off Reference Clock: Internal Offset: 0 ppm Test Pattern: PRBS 2^31–1, Pos

4. Touch [ED], and set the value as follows. Bit Rate: Variable, 11320000 kbit/s Data Input condition: Electrical Single-Ended Data Gating Cycle: Single Gating Time: 10 s Test Pattern: PRBS 2^31–1, Pos Threshold: 0 mV

5. Touch [Start] at Measure.



8. Connect the PPG1 Data Out and ED1 Data In connectors to the coaxial terminator.

9. Set the [ED] Data Input condition to [Electrical Single-Ended XData].


11. Record the ED Result FREQ (kHz) and EC error count.

12. Set the amplitude of the pulse pattern generator to 0.8 Vp-p.


*: When using the MP2100A-003 or MP2100A-007, omit steps 7 to 11.


9-11

9

Perform

ance Test

When using MP2100A-005 and MP2101A-012:



3. Touch [PPG/ED Ch2], and repeat the steps 3 to 13.

For the input level for test connection figure for the electrical interface, refer to Figure 9.2.2-1 and Figure 9.2.2-2.

Procedure (using MP2100A-003)

1. Connect the PPG1 Data Out and E/O converter Data connectors using a coaxial cable.

2. Connect the PPG1 Data Out and E/O converter Data connectors using a coaxial cable.

3. Connect the optical output connector of the E/O converter and the input connector of the variable optical attenuator using an optical fiber.

4. Connect the output connector of the variable optical attenuator and the optical power meter using an optical fiber.

5. Touch [PPG/ED Ch1], and then set [PPG] as follows. Amplitude: recommended values for E/O converter Bit Rate: 10GbE LAN/PHY Data/XData Out: On Error Addition: Off Reference Clock: Internal Offset: 0 ppm Sync Output: PPG1_1/16 Clk Test Pattern: PRBS 2^31–1, Pos

6. Set [ED] as follows. Bit Rate: 10GbE LAN/PHY Data Input condition: Optical Gating Cycle: Single Gating Period: 10 s Test Pattern: PRBS 2^31–1, Pos Threshold: 0 mV

7. Match [O/E] for Wavelength with the E/O converter wavelength.

8. Adjust the variable optical attenuator to set the optical input to –9 dBm.

9. Connect the output connector of the variable optical attenuator and the O/E Data In (B In) using an optical fiber.

10. Touch [PPG/ED Ch1] → [Start].


9-12

11. After measurement, record the ED Result FREQ (kHz) and error count.

E/O converter Variable attenuator

Coaxial cable

Optical fiber

PPG1 Data Out

PPG1 Data Out

Data Data

Optical Output

O/E Data In (B In)

Optical Output

Optical Input

Optical power meter

Figure 9.2.3-1 Input Level Test Connection Setup (MP2100A-003)

When using the MP2100A-050 or MP2100A-051 as the E/O converter, read steps 1 to 3 on the previous page as follows: 1. Connect the PPG1 Data Out and Tx Data In connectors using a

coaxial cable.

2. Connect the Optical Transceiver Tx connector and the variable attenuator input connector using an optical fiber.

Variable attenuator

Optical fiber O/E Data In (B In)

Optical Output

Optical Input

PPG1 Data Out

Tx Data In

Optical power meter

Figure 9.2.3-2 Input Level Test Connection Setup (MP2100A-003)

(When Using Opt-050/051)


9-13

9

Perform

ance Test

9.2.4 Pattern Procedure



3. Touch [PPG/ED Ch1] and set [PPG] as follows: Amplitude: 0.5 V Bit Rate: Variable, 11320000 kbit/s Data/XData Out: On Error Addition: Off Reference Clock: Internal Offset: 0 ppm Test Pattern: PRBS 2^31–1, Pos

4. Set [ED] as follows: Bit Rate: Variable, 11320000 kbit/s Data Input condition: Electrical Single-Ended Data Gating Cycle: Single Gating Period: 10 s Test Pattern: PRBS 2^31–1, Pos Threshold: 0 mV


6. After measurement, confirm that the error count of the ED Result is 0.

7. Change Test Pattern for [PPG] and [ED] in succession to [PRBS 2^7–1], [PRBS 2^9–1], [PRBS 2^15–1], and [PRBS 2^23–1], and repeat steps 5 to 7 each time.



10. Set [ED] at Data Input condition to [Electrical Single-Ended XData] at Data Input condition.


*: When using the MP2100A-003 or MP2100A-007, omit steps 9 to 12.


9-14




3. Touch [PPG/ED Ch2], and repeat the steps 3 to 12.

The pattern test setup is the same as shown in Figure 9.2.2-1 and Figure 9.2.2-2.

9.2.5 Error Detection Procedure

1. Connect the PPG1 Data Out connector and the ED1 Data In using a coaxial cable.


3. Touch [PPG/ED Ch1], and the set [PPG] as follows: Amplitude: 0.1 V Bit Rate: Variable, 10000000 kbit/s Data/XData Out: On Error Addition: On, Single Reference Clock: Internal Offset: 0 ppm Test Pattern: PRBS 2^31–1, Pos

4. Set [ED] as follows: Bit Rate: Variable, 10000000 kbit/s Data Input condition: Electrical Single-Ended Data Gating Cycle: Single Gating Period: 10 s Test Pattern: PRBS 2^31–1, Pos Threshold: 0 mV


6. Touch [PPG] at [Insert Error] once.

7. After measurement, confirm that the bit error rate of the ED Result is 1E-11 and the error count is 1.

8. Set [ED] to [Electrical Single-Ended XData] at Data Input condition.

9. Connect the PPG1 Data Out connector and ED1 Data In using a coaxial cable.



* When using the MP2100A-003 or MP2100A-007, omit steps 8 to 11.


9-15

9

Perform

ance Test

The error detection test connection is the same as Figure 9.2.2-1 and Figure 9.2.2-2.




3. Touch [PPG/ED Ch2], and set [PPG] to the previous step 3.





The error detection test connection is the same as Figure 9.2.2-1 and Figure 9.2.2-2.


9-16

9.3 Performance Test for Sampling Scope A sampling scope is required to test the following performance.

Amplitude accuracy

9.3.1 Apparatus Required for Performance Test The following table lists the equipment required for the performance test.

Before starting performance tests, warm up the MP2100A /MP2102A and measuring instruments for at least 1 hour.


Product Name


Equipment


Clock frequency: 10 GHz Amplitude: 0.5 Vp-p

MP1800A, MU181000A MU181020A (Anritsu)

DC Power Source

Power voltage: ±2.5 V Power current: ±50 mA Setting accuracy: 1% or less With current limiting function

2400 (Keithley Instruments)

9.3 Performance Test for Sampling Scope

9-17

9

Perform

ance Test

9.3.2 Amplitude Accuracy Procedure:

1. Connect the Trigger Input and the clock output connector of the PPG using a coaxial cable.

2. Set the clock output the PPG as follows: Amplitude: 0.5 Vp-p Frequency: 10 GHz

3. Touch [Setup], and set as follows: Sampling Mode: EYE Accumulation Type: None Clock Recovery: Off Divide Ratio: 1

4. Touch [Time], and set as follows: Unit: UI Bit On Screen: 2 Offset: 0 Data Clock Rate – Tracking: Off Clock Rate: 10 000 000 kHz Divide Ratio: 1

5. Touch [Amplitude], and set as follows: Channel Math: Off Channel A/B Tracking: Off Scale – A: 50 mV/div Offset – A: 0 mV Attenuation – A: 0 dB

6. Touch [Measure], and set as follows: Active Channel Selection: Channel A Measure Item: Histogram Histogram – Axis: Amplitude X1: 0 X2: 2 Y1: –250 mV Y2: 250 mV

7. Set the Current Limit of DC Power Source to 20 mA.

8. Set the DC voltage to 0 V.

9. Connect the DC Power Source to Ch A In. Connect the center conductor of the coaxial cable to plus and the shield to minus.

10. Touch [CH A] to set to On.

11. Touch [Sampling] to set to Run.


9-18

12. Record the average value (Mean) of the histogram measurement result.

13. Set the DC voltage to 200 mV.

14. Record the average value of the histogram measurement result.

15. Set the DC voltage to –200 mV.


When using the MP2100A-001 and MP2102A-021, test the amplitude accuracy for Ch B after measuring the amplitude control of Ch A.

1. Touch [Amplitude], and set as follows: Channel Math: Off Channel A/B Tracking: Off Scale – B: 50 mV/div Offset – B: 0 mV Attenuation – B: 0 dB

2. Touch [Measure], and set as follows: Active Channel Selection: Channel B

3. Set the DC voltage to 0 V.

4. Connect the DC Power Source to Ch B In. Connect the center conductor of the coaxial cable to plus and the shield to minus.

5. Touch [CH B] to set to ON.

6. Touch [Sampling] to set to Run.

7. Record the average voltage (Mean) of the histogram measurement result.

8. Set the DC voltage to 200 mV.


10. Set the DC voltage to –200 mV.

11. Record the average voltage of the histogram measurement result.

9.3 Performance Test for Sampling Scope

9-19

9

Perform

ance Test

Coaxial Cable

+

-

MP2102A


DC Power Source

Figure 9.3.2-1 Amplitude Accuracy Test Connection Setup


9-20

9.4 Performance Test for Optical Interface (O/E

Converter) An O/E converter is required to test the following performance.

Optical power meter

9.4.1 Apparatus Required for Performance Test The following table list the equipment required for the performance test.

Before starting performance tests, warm up the MP2100A /MP2102A and the measuring instruments for at least 1 hour.

Table 9.4.1-1 Equipment for O/E Converter Performance Test

Product Name


Equipment

Light source Wavelength: 850, 1310, 1550 nm

Output level range: +3 dBm min.

Level accuracy: ±0.05 dB

Optical power meter

Wavelength range: 750 to 1700 nm

Level range: –40 to +10 dBm (100 nW to 10 mW)

Level accuracy: 5% Linearity: ±0.05 dB min.

Variable optical attenuator

For single-mode fiber Wavelength: 1200 to 1600 nm Insertion loss: 3 dB max. Attenuation: 0 to 30 dB Resolution: 0.1 dB max.


For multimode fiber Attenuation: 800 to 900 nm Insertion loss: 3 dB max. Attenuation: 0 to 30 dB Resolution: 0.1 dB max.


Pulse Pattern Generator or Signal Generator

Clock frequency: 100 MHz Amplitude: 0.5 Vp-p

MG3740A (Anritsu)

9.4 Performance Test for Optical Interface (O/E Converter)

9-21

9

Perform

ance Test

9.4.2 Optical Power Meter Procedure (MP2100A-003, MP2100A-007, MP2102A-023)

1. Connect the signal generator output and Trigger Clk In using a coaxial cable.

2. Set the signal generator as follows: Frequency: 100 MHz Amplitude: 0.5 Vp-p (at sine-wave –2.0 dBm)

3. Connect the output connector of the light source and the input connector of the variable optical attenuator using an optical fiber.

4. Connect the output connector of the variable optical attenuator and the optical power meter using an optical fiber.

5. Match the optical power meter wavelength with the light source wavelength.

6. Set the light source output to On.

7. Adjust the variable optical attenuation to set the optical power meter display to around –1 dBm (0.8 mW).

8. Record the optical power meter display P (dBm).

9. Disconnect the optical fiber from the optical power meter and connect it to the O/E Data In connector.

10. Touch [O/E].

11. Touch the Wavelength button to set the value equal to the wavelength of the light source.

12. Touch [EYE/Pulse Scope], and then set the value as follows: CH_A: Off CH_B: On

13. Set [Sampling] to Run.

14. Touch [Measure] and [Amplitude/ Time].

15. Add [Average Power (dBm)] in the Item Selection.

16. Record the displayed Average Power (dBm).

17. Change the light source wavelength and repeat steps 3 to 16.


9-22.

Coaxial cable Pulse pattern generator or Signal generator

Optical fiber

Optical power meter

Light Source

Variable optical attenuator

Optical Output

Optical Input

Figure 9.4.2-1 Optical Power Meter Test Connection Setup

(MP2100A-003, MP2100A-007, MP2102A-023)

Chapter 10 Maintenance

10-1

10

Main

tenan

ce

This chapter describes maintenance, storage and disposal procedures.

10.1 Daily Maintenance ...................................................... 10-2 10.2 Replacement of Optical Connector ............................. 10-3 10.3 Optical Connector/Optical Adapter Cleaning .............. 10-5 10.4 Displaying Software Version ....................................... 10-8 10.5 Updating Software .................................................... 10-10 10.6 Touch Panel Position Calibration.............................. 10-11 10.7 Cautions on Storage ................................................. 10-13 10.8 Transporting and Disposal ........................................ 10-14


10-2

10.1 Daily Maintenance Before daily maintenance of the BERTWave, be sure to turn the power off and unplug it from the AC outlet.

Panel surface dirt

When surface dirt is noticeable, after the BERTWave has been used in a dusty environment, or when the BERTWave has not been used for an extended period of time, wipe its surface with a cloth moistened in detergent and wrung enough.

Screen surface dirt

During maintenance work, avoid using organic solvent, such as benzene and thinner; otherwise such chemicals may damage the surface of screen. Lightly wipe this surface with a dry, soft waste cloth or soft cloth slightly moistened in ethanol.

Loose screws

Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten screws.

10.2 Replacement of Optical Connector

10-3

10

Main

tenan

ce

10.2 Replacement of Optical Connector The standard optical connector is the FC type. The optical connector of the plug-in unit and pull-out type optical sensor can be removed and replaced with another connector (sold separately), and its interior can be cleaned. For information, Figure 10.2-1 shows the connector type.

Figure 10.2-1 Connector Type

WARNING Do not look into the connection surface of the optical fiber

cable of the light source optical connector or the end face

of the optical fiber cable connected to the light source as

invisible laser light output may cause visual deficit and

other problems.

CAUTION Before replacing the optical fiber cable, be sure not to

damage the connector and connection surface with

connector.


10-4

To remove the optical connector:

1. Open the cover.

2. Pull up the connector lever toward you.

3. Check that the latch has been released, and then, gently pull the connector out straight toward you.

Latch

Figure 10.2-2 How to Remove the Optical Connector

10.3 Optical Connector/Optical Adapter Cleaning

10-5

10

Main

tenan

ce

10.3 Optical Connector/Optical Adapter Cleaning Cleaning the Ferrule End Surface

Use an approved adapter cleaner to clean the ferrule end surface in the optical connector. The ferrule in the optical connectors needs periodic cleaning. Although the following procedures use the FC connector and adapter as an example, use the same methods when cleaning other connector and adapter types.

1. Remove the currently connected adapter by raising the adapter lever (you will hear a “click” when the latch disengages) and then gently pull the adapter straight towards you.

Adapter lever

Latch

2 Moisten an adapter cleaner with isopropyl alcohol and then use it to clean the end surface and sides of the ferrule.

Adapter cleaner


10-6

3. Press the tip of a new (dry) adapter cleaner into the ferrule end surface and then wipe in one direction 2 or 3 times to dry the surface.

4. Clean the adapter interior with adapter cleaner. (Refer to “Cleaning the optical adapter” below.)

5. Attach the adapter in the reverse order. Be careful not to scratch the ferrule end surface.

Cleaning the Optical Adapter

Use an approved adapter cleaner to clean the optical fiber cable optical adapter. Although the following procedures use the FC connector and adapter as an example, use the same methods when cleaning other connector and adapter types.

Insert adapter cleaner into the split sleeve of the optical adapter. Rotate the adapter cleaner in one direction while moving it back and forth.

Note：

Check the ferrule diameter and use a cleaner only for the 1.25 mm or 2.5 mm adapter.

10.3 Optical Connector/Optical Adapter Cleaning

10-7

10

Main

tenan

ce

Cleaning the Optical Fiber Cable Ferrule End Surface

Use an approved ferrule cleaner to clean the optical fiber cable ferrule end surface. Although the following procedures use the FC connector and adapter as an example, use the same methods when cleaning other connector and adapter types.

1. Pull the ferrule cleaner lever to expose the cleaning surface.

Ferrule cleaner Lever

Cleaning

surface

2. Hold the lever in the opened position, press the optical connector ferrule end into the cleaning surface, and then rub in one direction as shown in the following figure.


10-8

10.4 Displaying Software Version Confirm the software version using the following procedures. 1. Touch [Setup Utility] at the selector screen, and then the Setup

Utility screen opens.

2. Touch [Information], and then the Information screen is displayed. When the button display is Software, the version of the Windows application software is displayed.

When MX210001A Jitter Analysis Software or MX210002A Transmission Analysis Software is added, its software version is displayed as well.

3. Touch [Software], and then the button display is changed to Firmware/FPGA. The software version saved in the hardware is displayed. The displayed Module Name varies depending on the model name and options.

10.4 Displaying Software Version

10-9

10

Main

tenan

ce

4. Touch [Exit], and then the software version display screen is closed.


10-10

10.5 Updating Software To update the software, install the new software in the BERTWave. For how to install the software, refer to the document attached to the software. Start the BERTWave after installing the software, and then the version mismatch warning is displayed. At this time, update the software referring the following procedures. 1. Touch [Setup Utility] at the selector screen, and then the Setup

Utility screen opens.

2. Touch [Update], and then the Update screen is displayed.

3. Touch [Load], and then the software upgrading is started. If the software to update does not exist, the [Load] button is invalid.

4. When the software update procedure is finished, the Reboot screen is displayed.

5. After closing the Reboot screen, touch [Exit].

10.6 Touch Panel Position Calibration

10-11

10

Main

tenan

ce

10.6 Touch Panel Position Calibration Touch panel position may be misaligned depending on the changes of ambient environment (temperature/humidity). If the touch panel position is misaligned, calibrate the position using the following procedures. When calibrating the detecting position, use the sharp-nose stick but do not scratch the panel surface.

1. The Windows Control Panel is displayed.

2. Touch [Touch Panel] twice. The property window of the touch panel is displayed.

3. Touch [Calibration]. The screen to input the position is displayed.


10-12

4. Touch the center of the brown cross using the sharp-noise stick. The next cross to be touch is displayed in brown.

5. Touch the four crosses, and then the property window of the touch panel is displayed.

6. Touch the [OK] button.

10.7 Cautions on Storage

10-13

10

Main

tenan

ce

10.7 Cautions on Storage Wipe off dust, fingerprint marks, stains, spots, etc. from the surface of the BERTWave before storing it.

Fit the attached coaxial connector cover to the coaxial connector on the front panel. Also, put the cap on the optical connector.

Put the power cord, CD-ROM and other accessories in the accessory box and store it with the main frame.

Avoid storing the BERTWave in these places:

In direct sunlight for extended periods

Outdoors

In excessively dusty locations

In liquids, such as water, oil, organic solvents, and medical fluids, or places where these liquids may adhere

In salty air or where chemically active gases (sulfur dioxide, hydrogen sulfide, chlorine, ammonia, nitrogen oxide, or hydrogen chloride etc.) are present

Where toppling over may occur

In the presence of lubricating oil mists

In places at an altitude of more than 2,000 m

In the presence of frequent vibration and mechanical shock, such as in cars, ships, and airplanes

Places with temperatures and relative humidity in the following ranges: Temperature: lower than –20°C or higher than 60°C Humidity: 90% or more

Recommended storage conditions

It is recommended that the BERTWave be stored in a place that meets the ambient conditions suggested above, plus the following conditions, if it is not to be used for a long period of time:

Temperature: 5 to 45°C

Humidity: 40 to 80%

Little temperature and humidity fluctuations within one day


10-14.

10.8 Transporting and Disposal The following describes precautions for transporting and disposing of the BERTWave.

Repackaging

Repack the BERTWave in the packing material (box) in which it was delivered. If the packing material has been thrown away or damaged, repack the BERTWave in the following manner:

1. Prepare a corrugated cardboard, wooden, or aluminum box large enough to pack cushioning material in around the BERTWave.

2. Wrap the BERTWave in plastic or a similar material to avoid water droplets and dust.

3. Put the BERTWave in the box.

4. Then, pack the BERTWave in cushioning material so it does not move in the box.

5. Secure the outside of the box with packing cord, adhesive tape, bands, or other similar materials.

Transporting

Avoiding vibrations as much as possible and meet the recommended storage conditions during transport. Disposal

Follow the instructions of your local waste disposal office when disposing of the BERTWave. Before disposing of the BERTWave, dismantle or physically destroy any memory media it contains to ensure that any data saved in memory cannot be recovered by third parties.

Appendix A Specifications

A-1

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix

A.1 MP2100A BERTWave Specifications Table A.1-1 Configuration

Model Name Product Name

—Main Frame—

MP2100A BERTWave

—Standard Accessories—

Power cord 1

J1137 Terminator 2*3

J1341A Open (Coaxial connect cover) 5*1,*3 4*2,*3

J1359A Coaxial adapter (K-P, K-J, SMA compatible) 2*1 1*2

MX210000A BERTWave Control Software

(CD-ROM, including Operation Manual)

1

—Options—

MP2100A-001*4 Dual Electrical Receiver


MP2100A-005 Extended PPG/ED Channel

MP2100A-007/107*4 1ch BERT and Optical/Single-ended Electrical Scope

MP2100A-030/130 GPIB

MP2100A-037*5,*6 FC connector

MP2100A-038*5,*6 ST connector

MP2100A-039*5,*6 DIN47256 connector

MP2100A-040*5,*6 SC connector

MP2100A-050*7 XFP slot

MP2100A-051*7 SFP+ slot

*1: When selecting Option 001

*2: When selecting Option 003 or Option 007

*3: Two added when installing Option 005.

*4: Select one of Option 001, 003 or 007.

*5: Can be installed when selecting Option 003 or Option 007


*7: Either one of Option 050 or 051 can be installed.


A-2

Table A.1-1 Configuration (Cont'd)


—Options—

MP2100A-052/152 Full Rate Clock Output

MP2100A-055*8 Clock Recovery for EYE/Pulse Scope



MP2100A-061*5,*9 High Bit Rate Filter

MP2100A-062*5,*9 2 High Bit Rate Filter Bank

MP2100A-063*5,*9 3 to 4 High Bit Rate Filter Bank







MP2100A-070*5,*10 LPF for 156M (L)

MP2100A-071*5,*10 LPF for 622M (L)

MP2100A-072*5,*10 LPF for 1.0G (L)

MP2100A-073*5,*10 LPF for 1.2G (L)

MP2100A-076/176*5,*11 LPF for 2.1G (H)

MP2100A-077/177*5,*11 LPF for 2.5G (H)

MP2100A-078/178*5,*11 LPF for 2.6G (H)

MP2100A-079/179*5,*11 LPF for 3.1G (H)

*8: Clock recovery to analyze Ch B waveform is not available for Option 007.

*9: Either one of Option 056, 057 or 061 to 069 can be installed.

*10: Can be installed in Option 064 to 069.

*11: Can be installed in Option 061 to 063 or Option 066 to 069.

A.1 MP2100A BERTWave Specifications

A-3

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix

Table A.1-1 Configuration (Cont'd)


—Options—

MP2100A-080/180*5,*11 LPF for 4.2G (H)

MP2100A-081/181*5,*11 LPF for 5.0G (H)

MP2100A-082/182*5,*11 LPF for 6.2G (H)

MP2100A-083/183*5,*11 LPF for 8.5G (H)

MP2100A-084/184*5,*11,*12 LPF for 9.9G to 10.3G (H)

MP2100A-085/185*5,*11 LPF for 10.5G to 11.3G (H)

MP2100A-086/186*5,*11,*12 LPF for Multi 10G (H)

MP2100A-090 Bit rate Extension for PPG/ED

MP2100A-091/191 ED High Sensitivity


Option No. 107, 130, 152, 176 through 186, and 191 are retrofit option. Installing these options requires returning MP2100A to factory.


A-4

Table A.1-2 Pulse Pattern Generator

Item Specifications

Bit Rate Standard Name Bit rate (kbit/s) Variable 8500000 to 11320000

8000000 to 12500000*1

Variable 1/2 4250000 to 5660000

4000000 to 6250000*1

Variable 1/4 2125000 to 2830000

2000000 to 3125000*1

Variable 1/8 1062500 to 1415000

1000000 to 1562500*1

Variable 1/16 531250 to 707500

500000 to 781250*1

Variable 1/32 265625 to 353750

250000 to 390625*1

Variable 1/64 132813 to 176875

125000 to 195312*1

1GFC 1062500

2GFC 2125000

4GFC 4250000

8GFC 8500000

10GFC 10518750

10GFC FEC 11316800

1GbE 1250000

2GbE 2500000

10GbE WAN 9953280

10GbE LAN/PHY 10312500

10GbE OTU-1e 11049107

10GbE OTU-2e 11095728

Infiniband 2500000

Infiniband x 2 5000000


*1: Option 090 only


A-5

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix

Table A.1-2 Pulse Pattern Generator (Cont'd)

Item Specifications

Bit Rate (Cont'd) Standard Name Bit rate (kbit/s)

OC-3/STM-1 155520

OC-12/STM-4 622080

OC-24 1244160

OC-48/STM-16 2488320

OTU-1 2666057

OC-192/STM-64 9953280

G.975 FEC 10664228

OTU-2 10709225

CPRI 614400

CPRI x 2 1228800

CPRI x 4 2457600

CPRI x 5*1 3072000

CPRI x 10*1 6144000

OBSAI*1 768000

OBSAI x 2*1 1536000

OBSAI x 4*1 3072000

OBSAI x 8*1 6144000

Internal reference clock accuracy

±10 ppm*2,*4

Bit rate offset ±100 ppm*3

External 10 MHz input*3 Connector: BNC jack Termination: 50 , AC coupling Amplitude: 0.7 to 2 Vp-p Waveform: Square or sine wave

External reference clock input

Connector: SMA jack Termination: 50 , AC coupling Amplitude: 0.2 to 1.5 Vp-p Waveform: Square or sine wave

*2: 1 hour after power-on

*3: When using internal clock

*4: MP2100A-001/003/007: Common for ED1 MP2100A-005: Common for PPG1, PPG2, ED1, and ED2


A-6


Item Specifications

Sync output Frequency:

Sync signal

source

Pulse Pattern Generator Error Detector

Divide ratio

Bit rate

Divide ratio

1/1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/16 1/64 Pattern

Sync.

1/4 1/8 1/16

Rate 1/64

Rate 1/32

Rate 1/16

Rate 1/8

Rate 1/4

Rate 1/2

Rate 1/1

Connector: SMA jack

Termination: 50 Ω

Low level (VOL): –0.5 to –0.3 V

High level (VOH): –0.1 to 0 V

Amplitude: 0.4 Vp-p*5

Data output Number of Channels:

MP2100A-001,MP2100A-003, MP2100-007: 1

MP2100A-001+005, MP2100A-003+005, MP2100A-007+005: 2

Connector: SMA jack

Amplitude: 0.1 to 0.8 Vp-p, 10 mV resolution

Accuracy: ±20 mV ±20% for settings

Relative display*6: available

Termination: AC coupling, 50 Ω

Rise/Fall time*5,*7: 25 ps

Jitter: 3 ps rms*5

Skew: ±15 ps max.

*5: Typical values

*6: Multiplexing values by amplitude and external attenuation factor

*7: Time changing between 20% to 80% amplitude


A-7

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix


Item Specifications

Full Rate Clock Output (MP2100A-052/152)

Standard Accessory J1341A Open (coaxial connector cover) 1

Bit rate

Rate setting Output signal frequency

1/1 1/1 PPG clock, 1/1 ED clock


1/4 1/4 PPG clock

1/8 1/8 PPG clock

1/16 No output

1/32 No output

1/64 No output

Number of outputs: 1 (single end) Amplitude: 300 to 750 mVp-p Duty: 50% ±15% Rise/Fall time (20 to 80%): 30 ps*5*7 RMS jitter: 2 ps rms *5,*8,*9

2 ps rms *5,*8,*10

Connector: SMA jack Impedance: 50 , AC coupling Signal source: PPG1 *11, ED1, PPG2 *12, *13, ED2 *12

Alarm: PLL Unlock detection

*8: When Reference Clock is Internal, and when Sync Clock is 1/8

*9: Clock frequency: 10 GHz

*10: Clock frequency is 12.5 GHz, when installing Option 090.

*11: Excluding when Sync Output is set to PPG1 Pattern Sync.

*12: Option 005 only



A-8


Item Specifications


0 to 30 dB, 1 dB resolution

Error insertion Insertion method: Single, Repeat Error rate: 1E–n (n: 2 to 12)

Test pattern Pseudorandom (PRBS) pattern:

Pattern length: 2^7–1, 2^9–1, 2^15–1, 2^23–1, 2^31–1

Logic invertible

Programmable Pattern:

Pattern length: 2 to 1305600 bit, editable by text editor and sample

file available


A-9

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix

Table A.1-3 Error Detector

Item Specification

Bit rate Standard name Bit rate (kbit/s)

Variable 8500000 to 11320000

8000000 to 12500000*1

Variable 1/2 4250000 to 6150000

4000000 to 6250000*1

Variable 1/4*1 2000000 to 3125000

Variable 1/8*1 1000000 to 1562500

Variable 1/16*1 500000 to 781250

Variable 1/32*1 250000 to 390625

Variable 1/64*1 125000 to 195312

1GFC*1 1062500

2GFC*1 2125000

4GFC 4250000

8GFC 8500000

10GFC 10518750

10GFC FEC 11316800

1GbE*1 1250000

2GbE*1 2500000

10GbE WAN 9953280


10GbE OTU-1e 11049107

10GbE OTU-2e 11095728

Infiniband*1 2500000



OC-3/STM-1*1 155520

OC-12/STM-4*1 622080

OC-24*1 1244160

OC-48/STM-16*1 2488320

*1: Option 090 only


A-10

Table A.1-3 Error Detector (Cont'd)

Item Specification

Bit rate (Cont'd) Standard name Bit rate (kbit/s)

OTU-1 2666057

OC-192/STM-64 9953280

G.975 FEC 10664228

OTU-2 10709225

CPRI x 2*1 1228800

CPRI x 4*1 2457600

CPRI x 5*1 3072000

CPRI x 10*1 6144000

OBSAI*1 768000

OBSAI x 2*1 1536000

OBSAI x 4*1 3072000

OBSAI x 8*1 6144000

Offset tolerance ±100 ppm*2 Internal reference clock accuracy

±10 ppm*3

External 10 MHz input*4

Connector: BNC Termination: AC coupling, 50 Amplitude: 0.7 to 2 Vp-p Waveform: Square or sine wave

Test pattern Pseudorandom (PRBS) pattern: Pattern length: 2^7–1, 2^9–1, 2^15–1, 2^23–1, 2^31–1 Logic invertible

Programmable Pattern: Pattern length: 2 to 1305600 bits, editable by text editor and sample file available

*2: Data input signal bit rate deviation for set bit rate

*3: 1 hour after power-on MP2100A-005: Common for ED1 and ED2

*4: MP2100A-001, 003, 007: common for PPG1 and ED1 MP2100A-005: Common for PPG1, PPG2, ED1, and ED2


A-11

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix


Item Specifications

Data input

Number of Channel

MP2100A-001, MP2100A-003, MP2100A-007: 1 MP2100A-001+005, MP2100A-003+005, MP2100A-007+005: 2

Electrical input*5

Connector: K jack

Termination: Single-end, differential*6

Data format: NRZ, mark ratio 50%

Amplitude MP2100A-001: 0.1 to 0.8 Vp-p*7,*8

MP2100A-003: 0.25 to 0.8 Vp-p*7,*9

Coupling method: DC coupling, termination voltage 0 V

Consecutive identical digit immunity: 72 bits or more*10

Optical input*11

Data format: NRZ, Mark rate 50% Sensitivity: –9 dBm*12,*13

Threshold value*14 –85 to 85 mV, 1 mV resolution*15



*5: The ED1 Data In connector is common for the sampling scope CH_A. MP2100A-001: The ED1 Data In connector is common for the CH_B. MP2100A-007: The ED1 Data In connector is not installed.

*6: MP2100A-001 ED1 and MP2100A-005 ED2 only

*7: The pattern without option 005: PRBS 2^31–1 and mark rate: 1/2 Terminal: bit rate at single end: 10.3125 Gbit/s at 20 to 30°C

*8: Bit rate: 8.5 to 11.32 Gbit/s and divide ratio

*9: Bit rate: 8.0 to 8.5 Gbit/s, 11.32 to 12.5 Gbit/s, and their divide ratio

*10: Bit rate: 9.95328 Gbit/s, Pattern: Frame format equal to STM-64 Mark ratio: 1/2, Termination: single end, at 20 to 30°C

*11: MP2100A-003 O/E Data In only The O/E Data In connector is common for the sampling scope CH_B. Specifications other than items listed above are the same as the optical input specifications in Table A.1-4.

*12: Under following conditions: Bit rate: 10.3125 Gbit/s, Extinction rate: 8.2 dB min., VECP 0.5 dB max. Pattern: PRBS 2^31–1, Mark rate: 50%, 20 to 30°C


A-12

*13: The displayed threshold value is the value corrected by the external attenuation factor.

The calculation formula is as follows:

Maximum value = 85 x 10^(factor /20)

Minimum value = –85 x 10^(factor/20)

Resolution = 1.0 x 10^(factor/20)

*14: Termination: Single, at 0 dB external attenuation factor


A-13

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix


Item Specification

Measurement function

Alarm Indicator: Pattern asynchronous (Sync loss),

Frequency asynchronous (CR Unlock)*15

Bit error detection

Detection method: total error

Bit error rate: 0.0001E–18 to 1.0000E–00

Bit error count: 0 to 9999999,1.0000E07 to 9.9999E17

Regenerating clock detection

Clock count: 0 to 9999999,1.0000E07 to 9.9999E17

Frequency: Bit rate setting ±100 ppm, Accuracy: ±10 ppm*16

Measurement method

Measurement time: 1 seconds to 9 days 23 hours 59 minutes 59

seconds

Measurement frequency: single, repeat, untimed

Display update interval*17: 0.1 seconds, set time at measurement time

Auto sync control: On, Off

Threshold value at bit error rate:

INT, 1E–2, 1E–3, 1E–4, 1E–5, 1E–6, 1E–7, 1E–8

Sync control: Frame detection On*18, Off

Frame length: 64 bits

Frame position: 1 to (Pattern Length – Frame Length + 1)

1 bit resolution

*15: This can be detected when the Option 090 is added only in the case of Rate = 1/1 and 1/2.


*17: This can be set when measurement cycle is single or repeat

*18: This can be set when test pattern is Programmable Pattern and data length is 128 bits or more.


A-14


Item Specifications

Jitter resistance*19 Modulation

frequency

Jitter tolerance

10 Hz to 2 kHz 15.2UI

2 to 17.9 kHz 15.2 to 1.7UI

17.9 to 400 kHz 1.7UI

400 kHz to 4 MHz 1.7 to 0.17UI

4 to 8 MHz 0.17UI

8 to 27.2 MHz 0.17 to 0.05UI

27.2 to 80 MHz 0.05UI

0.01E-3 17.9E-3 0.4 4 8 27.2 80 2E-3

UI

MHz

15.2

1.7

0.17

0.05

Modulation frequency

Jitte

r to

lera

nce

*19: When inputting 9.95328 Gbit/s, pattern is set to PRBS 2^31–1, and single-end and amplitude are set to 0.1 Vp-p.


A-15

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix


Item Specifications

ED High Sensitivity

(MP2100A-091/191) Jitter specifications*20

Total Jitter: TJ [UI] 10.3125 Gbps: 0.65 4.25 Gbps: 0.325 2.125 Gbps: 0.325

Deterministic Jitter: DJ(d-d)[UI] 10.3125 Gbps: 0.45 4.25 Gbps: 0.225 2.125 Gbps: 0.225

Sinusoidal Jitter: SJ(d-d)[UI] 10.3125 Gbps: 0.22 4.25 Gbps: 0.11 2.125 Gbps: 0.11

EYE mask specifications*21

0 V 1

0

Time (UI)

Received voltage

Y

-Y

X 1-X

X: (UI) 10.3125 Gbps: 0.325 4.25 Gbps: 0.1625 2.125 Gbps: 0.1625

Y: (mV) Bit Rate CH1 CH2

10.3125 Gbps 50 25

4.25 Gbps 50 25

2.125 Gbps 50 25

*20: Specified under following conditions; design warranted at 20 to 30°C

Single-end input; JTPAT pattern; jitter amplitude when BER at 10-12; TJ value including DJ; DJ value including SJ; 4-MHz SJ modulation frequency

*21: Specified under following conditions

Single-end input, Y-axis voltage at BER ≤10-12


A-16

Table A.1-4 Sampling Scope

Item Specifications

Function Waveform display: Eye pattern, Pulse pattern

Statistical Processing:*1 Histogram, Mask test

For supported mask:

1GFC

2GFC

4GFC

8GFC

8GFC_Elect_Tx

8GFC_Elect_Rx

10GFC

10GFC FEC

1GbE

2GbE

10GbE_WAN

10GbE LAN/PHY

10GbE FEC

OC48/STM16

OTU-1

OC192/STM64

OC192/STM64 FEC (G.975)

OTU-2 1310 nm

OTU-2 1550 nm

OTU-2 1550 nm Expanded

OTU-2 Amplified

User defined

Mask file

Text file with extension (msk,pcm)

*1: Processing can be performed for the NRZ waveform.


A-17

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix

Table A.1-4 Sampling Scope (Cont'd)

Item Specifications

Horizontal system Clock Trigger Input

Connector: SMA jack

Termination: 50

Frequency: 0.1 to 12.5 GHz

Sensitivity: 100 mVp-p*2

Absolute maximum input: 2 Vp-p*3

Jitter, RMS: 5 to 12.5 GHz: 1.35 ps max., 0.85 ps*2

1 to 5 GHz: 1 ps*2

0.1 to 1 GHz: 2 ps*2

Scale

Eye pattern display: 1 UI or more at full scale

Pulse pattern display: 1 bit or more at full scale

Vertical system Electrical input

Input connector: K

Termination: 50

CH_A input: common for ED_1 Data In input

CH_B input: common for ED_1 Data In input*4

Absolute maximum input ±2 V*3

Input range

Offset: ±500 mV max.

Dynamic range: ±400 mV max.

Bandwidth (–3 dB): DC to 20 GHz min.

DC to 25 GHz*2

Flatness: ±1 dB*2

RMS noise: 3.5 mV max.

2 mV*2

*2: Typical values

*3: Design guaranteed

*4: MP2100A-001 only


A-18


Item Specifications

Vertical system Amplitude accuracy*5

±amplitude accuracy ±2% for reading value*6

The following figure shows the amplitude accuracy after

calibration.

*5: After internal calibration

*6: Calculation example: At 400 mV amplitude reading value and 50 mV offset voltage


A-19

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix

Offset voltage50mV

Scale 50mV/div.

1 level 200mV

0 Level –200mV

Differences at offset values 250mV


Amplitude measurement value 400mVp-p

In this example, the difference between 1 level voltage (200 mV) and

offset voltage (50 mV) is 150 mV. At a scale of 50 mV/div for a voltage

difference of 150 mV, the amplitude accuracy is 8 mV. At 1 level accuracy,

the difference is calculated as follows:

200 x 2% + 8 = 12 ±12 mV

The difference between 0 level voltage (–200 mV) and offset voltage (50

mV) is 250 mV.

At the 50 mV/div scale for a voltage difference of 250 mV, the amplitude

accuracy is 11 mV. At 0 level accuracy, the difference is calculated as

follows:

200 x 2% + 11 = 15 ±15 mV


A-20


Item Specifications

Vertical system Optical input*7

Connector FC*8, SC*9

Suitable fiber multi-mode fiber (62.5 m)*10

Wavelength range 750 to 1650 nm

Bandwidth*11 DC to 9.0 GHz

Conversion efficiency 850 nm: 0.25 A/W*2 1310 nm: 0.475 A/W*2 1550 nm: 0.45 A/W*2

Conversion gain 850 nm: 112.5 V/W*2 1310 nm: 210 V/W*2 1550 nm: 200 V/W*2

Optical noise*2

MP2100A-003 (Unit:Wrms) Wavelength 850 nm 1310, 1550

nm When using a filter of Option 070 to 073 4.2 2.4 When using a filter of Option 076 to 080 3.6 2.0 When using a filter of Option 081 to 083 5.2 3.0 When using a filter of Option 084 or 085 6.5 3.7 When using a filter of Option 086 3.4 2.0

MP2100A-007 (Unit:Wrms) Wavelength 850 nm 1310, 1550


*7: MP2100A-003 or MP2100A-007 CH_B only

*8: Option 037

*9: Option 040

*10: Single mode fiber acceptable

*11: No internal filter, Frequency that electrical output level goes –3 dB down, typical value


A-21

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix


Item Specifications

Vertical system (Cont'd)

Optical input (Cont'd) Sensitivity*2,*12

Option MP2100A-003 MP2100A-007When using a filter other than Option 086

–9 dBm –12 dBm

When using a filter of Option 086

–11 dBm –14 dBm

No filter option –12 dBm –15 dBm

Maximum input power*13: Average power –1 dBm (794 W)

Peak power +2 dBm (1.58 mW)

Absolute maximum power: Peak power +5 dBm (3.16 mW)

Optical power measurement: Range –18 to 0 dBm

Accuracy: ±0.35 dB*2 –12 dBm or more

±0.6 dB*2 less than –12 dBm

Optical return loss –30 dB*2

Digital system Sampling speed: 100 ksa/second*2

*12: Mask test available range

*13: Level deteriorating linearity


A-22


Item Specifications

Clock Recovery (MP2100A-055)

Standard accessory

J1341A Open (Coaxial connector cover) 1

Data input

Connector: common for Ch A and Ch B*14

Clock output

Connector: SMA jack

Termination: AC coupling, 50 Ω

Amplitude: 0.1 to 2.7 GHz: 270 to 540 mVp-p

8.5 to 12.5 GHz: 500 to 1500 mVp-p

Frequency: 8.5 to 12.5 GHz, 0.1 to 2.7 GHz

Jitter (RMS): 8.5 to 12.5 GHz: 20 mUI or less*15, 10 mUI*2,15

0.1 to 2.7 GHz: 5 mUI or less

Loop bandwidth: 8.5 to 12.5 GHz Band:

1, 2, 4, 8 MHz*2

0.1 to 2.7 GHz Band

2488.32 MHz: 200 kHz*2

622 MHz: 50 kHz*2

156 MHz: 20 kHz*2

Filter bank (8.5G/10G/10.5G) (MP2100A-056)

3 dB cutoff frequency 8.5 Gbit/s: 6.38 GHz*2 Low-pass filter

10 Gbit/s: 7.6 GHz*2

Low-pass filter 10GbE WAN (10 GBase-W) &

OC-192/STM-64, 10GE LAN(10 GBase-R) , 8GFC

10.5 Gbit/s: 8.2 GHz*2

Low-pass filter 10GFC, OC-192/STM-64 FEC (G.975),

OTU-2, 10GFC FEC,10GbE FEC

*14: When using MP2100A-007, Ch B cannot be used as the data input for Clock Recovery

*15: Loop bandwidth: 4 MHz


A-23

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix


Item Specifications

Filter bank (2G/4G/8.5G/10G)

(MP2100A-057)

3 dB cutoff frequency 2 Gbit/s: 1.6 GHz*2 Low-pass filter 2GFC

4 Gbit/s: 3.2 GHz*2 Low-pass filter 4GFC

8.5 Gbit/s: 6.38 GHz*2 Low-pass filter


Low-pass filter 10GbE WAN (10GBase-W) &

OC-192/STM-64,10GE LAN(10 GBase-R), 8GFC

High Bit Rate Filter (MP2100A-061)

Filter configuration One of MP2100A-076 to 086 can be installed.

2 High Bit Rate Filter Bank (MP2100A-062)

Filter configuration Two of MP2100A-076 to 086 can be installed.

3 to 4 High Bit Rate Filter Bank (MP2100A-063)

Filter configuration Three or four of MP2100A-076 to 086 can be installed.


A-24


Item Specifications

1 to 2 Low Bit Rate Filter Bank (MP2100A-064)

Filter configuration One or two of MP2100A-070 to 073 can be installed.


Filter configuration Three or four of MP2100A-070 to 073 can be installed.

1 High Bit Rate/1 to 2 Low Bit Rate Filter Bank (MP2100A-066)

Filter configuration One of MP2100A-076 to 086 and one or two of MP2100A-070 to 073 can be installed.

1 to 2 High Bit Rate/3 to 4 Low Bit Rate Filter Bank (MP2100A-067)

Filter configuration One or two of MP2100A-076 to 086 and three or four of MP2100A-070 to 073 can be installed.


Filter configuration Two or three of MP2100A-076 to 086 and one or two of MP2100A-070 to 073 can be installed.

3 High Bit Rate/3 Low Bit Rate Filter Bank (MP2100A-069)

Filter configuration Three of MP2100A-076 to 086 and three of MP2100A-070 to 073 can be installed.

LPF for 156M (L) (MP2100A-070)

3 dB cutoff frequency 155 Mbit/s: 116 MHz*2 Low-pass filter for OC-3/STM-1

LPF for 622M (L) (MP2100A-071)

3 dB cutoff frequency 622 Mbit/s: 470 MHz*2 Low-pass filter for OC-12/STM-4, CPRI

LPF for 1.0G (L) (MP2100A-072)

3 dB cutoff frequency 1062.5 Mbit/s: 800 MHz*2 Low-pass filter for 1GFC

LPF) for 1.2G (L (MP2100A-073)

3 dB cutoff frequency

1.2 Gbit/s: 940 MHz*2 Low-pass filter for 1GbE,OC-24,CPRI x 2

LPF for 2.1G (H) (MP2100A-076/176)

3 dB cutoff frequency 2.1 Gbit/s: 1.6 GHz*2 Low-pass filter for 2GFC

LPF for 2.5G (H) (MP2100A-077/177)

3 dB cutoff frequency 2.5 Gbit/s: 1.87 GHz*2 Low-pass filter for CPRI x 4, OC-48/STM-16, 2GbE, Infiniband


A-25

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix


Item Specifications

LPF for 2.6G (H) (MP2100A-078/178)

3 dB cutoff frequency 2.6 Gbit/s: 2.0 GHz*2 Low-pass filter for OTU-1

LPF for 3.1G (H) (MP2100A-079/179)

3 dB cutoff frequency 3.1 Gbit/s: 2.37 GHz*2 Low-pass filter for CPRI x 5, 10GBASE-LX4, 10GFC-LX4

LPF for 4.2G (H) (MP2100A-080/180)


LPF for 5.0G (H) (MP2100A-081/181)

3 dB cutoff frequency 5.0 Gbit/s: 3.75 GHz*2 Low-pass filter for Infiniband x 2, CPRI x 8

LPF for 6.2G (H) (MP2100A-082/182)

3 dB cutoff frequency 6.2 Gbit/s: 4.61 GHz*2 Low-pass filter for CPRI x 10, XAUI Optical x 2

LPF for 8.5G (H) (MP2100A-083/183)

3 dB cutoff frequency 8.5 Gbit/s: 6.3GHz*2 Low-pass filter

LPF for 9.9G to (H) 10.3G (MP2100A-084/184)

3 dB cutoff frequency 9.9 to 10.3 Gbit/s: 7.6 GHz*2 Low-pass filter for 8GFC, 10GbE WAN, 10GbE LAN/PHY, OC-192/STM-64, Infiniband x 4

LPF for 10.5G (H) to 11.3G (MP2100A-085/185)

3 dB cutoff frequency 10.5 to 11.3Gbit/s: 8.2 GHz*2 Low-pass filter for 10GFC, G.975 FEC, OTU-2, 10GbE FEC, 10GFC FEC

LPF for Multi 10G (H) (MP2100A-086/186)

3 dB cutoff frequency 9.9 to 10.7Gbit/s: 7.5 GHz*2 Low-pass filter for 8GFC, 10GbE WAN, 10GbE LAN/PHY, OC-192/STM-64, Infiniband x 4, 10GFC, G.975 FEC, OTU-2


A-26

Table A.1-5 Slot for Optical Transceiver

Item Specifications

XFP Slot (MP2100A-050)

Standard accessory


Transmission data input

Connector: SMA jack

Termination: AC coupling, Single end

Impedance: 50 *1

Input amplitude: 0.2 to 0.4 Vp-p

Waveform: NRZ

Received data output

Connector: SMA jack

Termination: AC coupling

Impedance: 50 *1

Output amplitude: 0.10 to 1.0 Vp-p*2

Waveform: NRZ

Functions

Status indicator for module availability

Module information display: wavelength*3, LOS, optical output

Optical output control: On, Off

*1: Nominal value

*2: When the input optical power is in the range of recommended XFP module input optical power

*3: When installing G0174A, G0194, or G0195A


A-27

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix

Table A.1-5 Slot for Optical Transceiver (Cont'd)

Item Specifications

SFP+Slot (MP2100A-051)

Standard accessory



Connector: SMA jack


Terminator voltage: 0 V

Impedance: 50 *1

Input amplitude: 0.6 to 0.8 Vp-p (at G0238A)

0.25 to 0.35 Vp-p (at G0239A)

Waveform: NRZ


Connector: SMA jack


Terminator voltage: 0 V

Impedance: 50 *1


Waveform: NRZ

Functions


Module information display: wavelength, LOS, optical output


*4: When the input optical power is in the range of the recommended SFP+ module input optical power

*5: When G0238A or G0239A is installed


A-28

Table A.1-6 General Performance

Item Specifications

Panel Input functions: Rotary encoder, touch panel, power switch

Display 12.1 inch LCD: WXGA (1280 x 768, or 1280 x 800)

LED: Disk access, standby, power

Function Measurement buzzer, panel lock

Peripheral Devices connection

VGA output (SVGA), USB 2.0 x 5

Remote interface Ethernet x 2 (10/100/1000BASE-T)

GPIB x 1*1

OS Windows XP Embedded Standard 2009 Service Pack 3*2

Internal storage devices

Flash Memory Drive, 8 GB or more

Power source Power voltage: AC 100 to 120 V, 200 to 240 V (Auto switch: 100/200 V) *3

Frequency: 50 Hz to 60 Hz

Power consumption: 300 VA or less

Environment performance

Operating temperature: +5 to +40°C

Storage temperature: –20 to +60°C

EMC: EN61326-1, EN61000-3-2

LVD: EN61010-1

Size and mass Dimensions: 221.5 (H) x 341 (W) x 180 (D) mm (excluding protrusions) Weight: 7 kg max. (MP2100A-003, others excluding options)

*1: Option 030/130 required

*2: Operation not warranted when software installed after factory shipment

*3: Operating voltage: within the range of +10% to –15% from the rated voltage

A.2 MP2101A BERTWave PE Specifications

A-29

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix


Table A.2-1 Configuration

Model Name Product name

—Main Frame—

MP2101A BERTWave PE

—Standard Accessories—

Power cord 1


4*2

J1341A Open (Coaxial connector cover) 4*1

6*2

MX210000A BERTWave Control Software

(CD-ROM, including Operation Manual)

1

—Options—

MP2101A-011*3 1CH PPG/ED

MP2101A-012*3 2CH PPG/ED

MP2101A-030/130 GPIB

MP2101A-050*4 XFP slot

MP2101A-051*4 SFP+ slot

MP2101A-052/152 Full Rate Clock Output

MP2101A-090 Bit rate Extension for PPG/ED

MP2101A-091/191 ED High Sensitivity



*3: Select either Option 011 or 012.

*4: Either one of Option 050 or 051 can be installed.

Option No. 130, 152, and 191 are retrofit option. Installing these options requires returning MP2101A to factory.


A-30

Table A.2-2 Pulse Pattern Generator

Item Specifications

Bit Rate Standard Name Bit rate (kbit/s) Variable 8500000 to 11320000

8000000 to 12500000*1

Variable 1/2 4250000 to 5660000

4000000 to 6250000*1

Variable 1/4 2125000 to 2830000

2000000 to 3125000*1

Variable 1/8 1062500 to 1415000

1000000 to 1562500*1

Variable 1/16 531250 to 707500

500000 to 781250*1

Variable 1/32 265625 to 353750

250000 to 390625*1

Variable 1/64 132813 to 176875

125000 to 195312*1

1GFC 1062500

2GFC 2125000

8GFC 8500000

10GFC 10518750

10GFC FEC 11316800

1GbE 1250000

2GbE 2500000

10GbE WAN 9953280


10GbE OTU-1e 11049107

10GbE OTU-2e 11095728

Infiniband 2500000



*1: Option 090 only


A-31

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix


Item Specifications

Bit Rate Standard Name Bit rate (kbit/s)

OC-3/STM-1 155520

OC-12/STM-4 622080

OC-48/STM-16 2488320

OTU-1 2666057

OC-192/STM-64 9953280

G.975 FEC 10664228

OTU-2 10709225

CPRI 614400

CPRI x 2 1228800

CPRI x 4 2457600

CPRI x 5*1 3072000

CPRI x 10*1 6144000

OBSAI*1 768000

OBSAI x 2*1 1536000

OBSAI x 3*1 3072000


±10 ppm*2,*4

Bit rate offset ±100 ppm*3


Connector: BNC jack

Termination: 50 , AC coupling

Amplitude: 0.7 to 2 Vp-p, AC coupling

Waveform: Square or sine wave

External reference clock input

Connector: SMA jack

Termination: 50 , AC coupling

Amplitude: 0.2 to 1.5 Vp-p

Waveform: Square or sine wave


*3: When using internal clock

*4: MP2101A-011: Common for ED1 MP2101A-012: common for PPG1, PPG2, ED1, or ED2


A-32


Item Specifications

Sync output Frequency:

Sync signal

source

Pulse Pattern Generator Error Detector

Divide ratio

Bit rate

Divide ratio

1/1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/16 1/64 Pattern

Sync.

1/4 1/8 1/16

Rate 1/64

Rate 1/32

Rate 1/16

Rate 1/8

Rate 1/4

Rate 1/2

Rate 1/1

Connector: SMA jack

Impedance: 50

Low level(VOL): –0.5 to –0.3 V

High level(VOH): –0.1 to 0 V

Amplitude: 0.4 Vp-p*5

Data output Number of Channel: MP2101A-011: 1, MP2101A-012: 2

Connector: SMA jack

Amplitude: 0.1 to 0.8 Vp-p, 10 mV resolution

Accuracy: ±20 mV ±20% for settings

Relative display*6: available

Termination: AC coupling, 50

Rise/Fall time: 25 ps*5,*7

Jitter: 3 ps rms*5

Skew ±15 ps or less

*5: Typical values

*6: Multiplexing values by amplitude and external attenuation factor

*7: Time changing between 20 to 80 % amplitude


A-33

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix


Item Specifications

Full Rate Clock Output (MP2101A-052/152)

Standard Accessory J1341A Open (coaxial connector cover) 1

Bit rate

Rate setting Output signal frequency



1/4 1/4 PPG clock

1/8 1/8 PPG clock

1/16 No output

1/32 No output

1/64 No output

Number of outputs: 1 (single end)

Amplitude: 300 to 750 mVp-p

Duty: 50% ±15%

Rising and falling time (20 to 80%): 30 ps*5,*7

RMS jitter: 2 ps rms *5,*8,*9

2 ps rms *5,*8,*10

Connector: SMA jack

Impedance: 50 , AC coupling

Signal source: PPG1*11,ED1,PPG2 *12,*13,ED2 *12

Alarm: PLL Unlock detection

*8: When Reference Clock is Internal, and when Sync Clock is 1/8

*9: Clock frequency: 10 GHz

*10: Clock frequency is 12.5 GHz, when installing Option 090.


*12: Option 012 only



A-34


Item Specifications



Error insertion Insertion method: Single, Repeat

Error rate: 1E–n (n: 2 to 12)


Pattern length: 2^7–1, 2^9–1, 2^15–1, 2^23–1, 2^31–1

Logic invertible

Programmable Pattern:

Pattern length: 2 to 1305600 bit, editable by text editor and sample

file available


A-35

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix

Table A.2-3 Error Detector

Item Specifications

Bit rate Standard name Bit rate (kbit/s) Variable 8500000 to 11320000

8000000 to 12500000*1

Variable 1/2 4250000 to 6150000

4000000 to 6250000*1

Variable 1/4*1 2000000 to 3125000

Variable 1/8*1 1000000 to 1562500

Variable 1/16*1 500000 to 781250

Variable 1/32*1 250000 to 390625

Variable 1/64*1 125000 to 195312

1GFC*1 1062500

2GFC*1 2125000

4GFC 4250000

8GFC 8500000

10GFC 10518750

10GFC FEC 11316800

1GbE*1 1250000

2GbE*1 2500000

10GbE WAN 9953280


10GbE OTU-1e 11049107

10GbE OTU-2e 11095728

Infiniband*1 2500000



OC-3/STM-1*1 155520

OC-12/STM-4*1 622080

OC-24*1 1244160

OC-48/STM-16*1 2488320

*1: Option 090 only


A-36


Item Specifications

Bit rate (Cont'd) Specification Name Bit Rate (kbit/s)

OTU-1 2666057

OC-192/STM-64 9953280

G.975 FEC 10664228

OTU-2 10709225

CPRI*1 614400

CPRI x 2*1 1228800

CPRI x 4*1 2457600

CPRI x 5*1 3072000

CPRI x 10*1 6144000

OBSAI*1 768000

OBSAI x 2*1 1536000

OBSAI x 3*1 3072000

Offset tolerance ±100 ppm*2


±10 ppm*3


Connector: BNC


Amplitude: 0.7 to 2 Vp-p

Waveform: Square waveform or sine wave

*2: Data input signal bit rate deviation for set bit rate

*3: 1 hour after power-on MP2101A-012: common for ED1 and ED2

*4: MP2101A-011: common for PPG1 and ED1 MP2101A-012: common for PPG1, PPG2, ED1, and ED2


A-37

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix


Item Specifications


Pattern length: 2^7–1, 2^9–1, 2^15–1, 2^23–1, 2^31–1

Logic invertible

Programmable pattern:

Pattern length: 2 to 1305600 bit, editable by text editor and

sample file available

Data input Number of Channel

MP2101A-011: 1

MP2101A-012: 2

Electrical input

Connector: SMA jack

Termination: Single-end, differential

Data format: NRZ, Mark ratio 50%

Amplitude 0.1 to 0.8 Vp-p*5,*6

0.25 to 0.8 Vp-p*5,*7

Coupling method: DC coupling, termination voltage 0 V

Consecutive identical digit immunity: 72 bit or more*8

Threshold value*9 –85 mV to 85 mV, 1 mV resolution*10

External attenuation factor 0 to 30 dB , 1 dB resolution

*5: Pattern: PRBS 2^31–1, Mark ratio: 1/2, Termination: single end, Bit rate: 10.3125 Gbit/s, at 20 to 30°C

*6: Bit rate: 5 to 11.32 Gbit/s and its divide ratio

*7: Bit rate: 8.0 to 8.5 Gbit/s, 11.32 to 12.5Gbit/s and their divide ratio

*8: Bit rate: 9.95328 Gbit/s, Pattern: Frame format equal to STM-64 Mark ratio: 1/2, Termination: single end at 20 to 30°C

*9: The displayed threshold value is the value corrected by the external attenuation factor.

The calculation formula is as follows:

Maximum value = 85 x 10^(factor /20) Minimum value = –85 x 10^(factor /20) Resolution = 1.0 x 10^(factor /20)

*10: Termination: single end, when external attenuation is 0 dB.


A-38


Item Specifications

Measurement functions

Alarm Indicator: Pattern asynchronous (Sync loss), Frequency

asynchronous (CR Unlock)*11

Bit error detection

Detection method: total error

Bit error rate: 0.0001E–18 to 1.0000E–00

Bit error count: 0 to 9999999, 1.0000E07 to 9.9999E17

Regenerating clock detection

Clock count: 0 to 9999999, 1.0000E07 to 9.9999E17

Frequency: Bit rate setting ±100 ppm, Accuracy: ±10 ppm*12

Measurement method

Measurement time: 1 seconds to 9 days 23 hours 59 minutes 59

seconds

Measurement frequency: single, repeat, untimed

Display update interval*13: 0.1 seconds, set time at measurement time

Auto sync control: On, Off

Threshold value at bit error rate: INT, 1E–2, 1E–3, 1E–4, 1E–5,

1E–6, 1E–7, 1E–8

Sync control: frame detection On*14, Off

Frame length: 64 bits

Frame position: 1 to (Pattern Length - Frame Length + 1)

1 bit resolution

*11: This can be detected when the Option 090 is added only in the case of Rate = 1/1 and 1/2.


*13: This can be set when measurement cycle is single or repeat.

*14: This can be set when test pattern is Programmable Pattern and data length is 128 bits or more.


A-39

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix

Table A.2-3 Error Detection (Cont'd)

Item Specifications

Jitter resistance*15 Modulation

frequency

Jitter tolerance

10 Hz to 2 kHz 15.2UI

2 to 17.9 kHz 15.2 to 1.7UI

17.9 to 400 kHz 1.7UI

400 kHz to 4 MHz 1.7 to 0.17UI

4 to 8 MHz 0.17UI

8 to 27.2 MHz 0.17 to 0.05UI

27.2 to 80 MHz 0.05UI

0.01E-3 17.9E-3 0.4 4 8 27.2 80 2E-3

UI

MHz

15.2

1.7

0.17

0.05

Modulation frequency

Jitte

r re

sist

anc

e

*15: When inputting 9.95328 Gbit/s, pattern is set to PRBS 2^31–1 and single-end and amplitude are set to 0.1 Vp-p


A-40


Item Specifications

ED High Sensitivity

(MP2101A-091/191) Jitter specifications*16

Total Jitter: TJ [UI] 10.3125 Gbps: 0.65 4.25 Gbps: 0.325 2.125 Gbps: 0.325

Deterministic Jitter: DJ(d-d) [UI] 10.3125 Gbps: 0.45 4.25 Gbps: 0.225 2.125 Gbps: 0.225

Sinusoidal Jitter: SJ(d-d)[UI] 10.3125 Gbps: 0.22 4.25 Gbps: 0.11 2.125 Gbps: 0.11

EYE mask specifications*17

0 V 1

0

Time (UI)

Received voltage

Y

-Y

X 1-X

X :(UI) 10.3125 Gbps: 0.325 4.25 Gbps: 0.1625 2.125 Gbps: 0.1625

Y :(mV) Bit rate CH1 CH2

10.3125 Gbps 25 25

4.25 Gbps 25 25

2.125 Gbps 25 25

*16: Specified under following conditions; design warranted at 20 to 30°C

Single-end input; JTPAT pattern; jitter amplitude when BER at 10-12; TJ value including DJ; DJ value including SJ; 4-MHz SJ modulation frequency

*17: Specified under following conditions

Single-end input, Y-axis voltage at BER ≤10-12


A-41

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix

Table A.2-4 Slot for Optical Transceiver

Item Specifications

XFP Slot (MP2101A-050)

Standard accessory

J1341A Open(Coaxial connector cover) 2


Connector: SMA jack

Termination: AC coupling, single end

Impedance: 50 *1

Input amplitude: 0.2 to 0.4 Vp-p

Waveform: NRZ


Connector: SMA jack


Impedance: 50 *1


Waveform: NRZ

Functions




*1: Nominal value

*2: When the input optical power is in the range of the recommended XFP module optical power

*3: When G0174A, G0194, or G0195A is installed


A-42

Table A.2-4 Slot for Optical Transceiver (Cont'd)

Item Specifications

SFP+ Slot (MP2101A-051)

Standard accessory

J1341A Open(Coaxial connector cover) 2


Connector: SMA jack


Termination voltage 0 V

Impedance: 50 *1

Input amplitude: 0.6 to 0.8 Vp-p (at G0238A)

0.25 to 0.35 Vp-p (at G0239A)

Waveform: NRZ


Connector: SMA jack


Impedance: 50 *1

Termination voltage 0 V


Waveform: NRZ

Functions




*4: When input optical power is within the range of the recommended SFP+ module optical power

*5: When G0238A, or G0239A is installed


A-43

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix


Item Specifications

Panel Input functions: rotary encoder, touch panel, power switch

measurement buzzer, panel lock

Display 12.1 inch LCD: WXGA (1280 x 768, or 1280 x 800)

LED: disk access, standby, power

Functions Measurement buzzer, panel lock

Peripheral devices connection

VGA Output (SVGA), USB 2.0 x 5

Remote interface

Ethernet x 2 (10/100/1000BASE-T)

GPIB x 1*1




Power source Voltage: AC 100 to 120 V, 200 to 240 V (Auto switch: 100/200 V) *3






EMC: EN61326-1, EN61000-3-2

LVD: EN61010-1

Size and mass Dimension 221.5 (H) x 341 (W) x 180 (D) mm

(excluding protrusions)

Weight 7 kg or less (excluding options)





A-44

A.3 MP2102A BERTWave SS Specifications Table A.3-1 Configuration


–Main Frame–

MP2102A BERTWave SS

–Standard Accessories–

Power cord 1


J1341A Open (Coaxial connector cover) 2*2 3*1

J1359A Coaxial adapter (K-P, K-J, SMA) 2*1 1*2

MX210000A BERTWave Control Software (CD-ROM, including Operation Manual)

1

–Options–

MP2102A-021*3 Dual Electrical Receiver

MP2102A-023*3 Optical/Electrical Single-ended Receiver

MP2102A-030/130 GPIB

MP2102A-037*4,*5 FC connector

MP2102A-038*4,*5 ST connector

MP2102A-039*4,*5 DIN 47256 connector

MP2102A-040*4,*5 SC connector

MP2102A-055 Clock Recovery





*3: When selecting either one of Option 021 or 023

*4: Can be installed when selecting Option 023


*6: Either one of Option 056, 057 or 061 to 069 can be installed.

A.3 MP2102A BERTWave SS Specifications

A-45

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix

Table A.3-1 Configuration


–Options–

MP2102A-061*4,*6 High Bit Rate Filter

MP2102A-062*4,*6 2 High Bit Rate Filter Bank

MP2102A-063*4,*6 3 to 4 High Bit Rate Filter Bank







MP2102A-070*4,*7 LPF for 156M (L)

MP2102A-071*4,*7 LPF for 622M (L)

MP2102A-072*4,*7 LPF for 1.0G (L)

MP2102A-073*4,*7 LPF for 1.2G (L)

MP2102A-076/176*4,*8 LPF for 2.1G (H)

MP2102A-077/177*4,*8 LPF for 2.5G (H)

MP2102A-078/178*4,*8 LPF for 2.6G (H)

MP2102A-079/179*4,*8 LPF for 3.1G (H)

MP2102A-080/180*4,*8 LPF for 4.2G (H)

MP2102A-081/181*4,*8 LPF for 5.0G (H)

MP2102A-082/182*4,*8 LPF for 6.2G (H)

MP2102A-083/183*4,*8 LPF for 8.5G (H)

MP2102A-084/184*4,*8,*9 LPF for 9.9G to 10.3G (H)

MP2102A-085/185*4,*8 LPF for 10.5G to 11.3G (H)

MP2102A-086/186*4,*8,*9 LPF for Multi 10G (H)

*7: Can be installed in Option 064 to 069.

*8: Can be installed in Option 061 to 063 or Option 066 to 069.


Option No. 130, and 176 through 186 are retrofit option. Installing these options requires returning MP2102A to factory.


A-46

Table A.3-2 Sampling Scope

Item Specifications

Functions Waveform display: eye pattern, pulse pattern

Statistics processing*1: histogram, mask test

Applicable mask

1GFC

2GFC

4GFC

8GFC

8GFC_Elect_Tx

8GFC_Elect_Rx

10GFC

10GFC FEC

1GbE

2GbE

10GbE_WAN

10GbE LAN/PHY

10GbE FEC

OC48/STM16

OTU-1

OC192/STM64

OC192/STM64 FEC (G.975)

OTU-2 1310 nm

OTU-2 1550 nm

OTU-2 1550 nm Expanded

OTU-2 Amplified

User Defined

Mask file

Text file with extension (msk,pcm)

*1: Processing is performed for the NRZ waveform.


A-47

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix


Item Specifications

Horizontal system Clock trigger input

Connector: SMA jack

Termination: 50

Frequency 0.1 to 12.5 GHz

Sensitivity 100 mVp-p*2

Absolute maximum rating: 2 Vp-p*3

Jitter, RMS 5 to 12.5 GHz: 1.35 ps or less,

0.85 ps*2

1 to 5 GHz: 1 ps*2

0.1 to 1 GHz: 2 ps*2

Scale

Eye pattern display: full scale 1UI or more

Pulse pattern display: full scale 1 bit or more

Vertical system Electrical input

Input connector: K

Termination: 50

CH_A

CH_B*4

Absolute maximum input ±2 V*3

Input range

Offset: ±500 mV or more

Dynamic range: ±400 mV or more

Bandwidth (–3 dB): DC to 20 GHz or more,

DC to 25 GHz*2

Flatness: ±1 dB*2

RMS noise: 3.5 mV or less

2 mV*2

*2: Typical value

*3: Design guaranteed

*4: MP2102A-021 only


A-48


Item Specifications

Vertical system Amplitude accuracy*5

±amplitude accuracy ±2% for reading value*6

The following figure indicates the amplitude accuracy after

calibration.

*5: After internal calibration

*6: Calculation example: when the amplitude reading is 400 mV and the offset voltage is 50 mV

Offset voltage50mV

Scale 50mV/div.

1 level 200mV

0 level –200mV



Amplitude measurement value 400mVp-p


A-49

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix

In this example, the difference between 1 level voltage (200 mV) and

offset voltage (50 mV) is 150 mV. At the scale 50 mV/div graph for the

voltage difference 150 mV, the amplitude accuracy is 8 mV.

At 1 level accuracy, the difference is calculated as follows:

200 x 2% + 8 = 12 ±12 mV

The difference between 0 level voltage (–200 mV) and offset voltage (50

mV) is 250 mV.

At the scale 50 mV/div graph for the voltage difference 250 mV, the

amplitude accuracy is 11 mV. At 10 level accuracy, the difference is

calculated as follows:

200 x 2% + 11 = 15 ±15 mV


A-50


Item Specifications

Vertical system Optical input*7

Connector FC*8, SC*9

Suitable fiber multi-mode fiber (62.5 m)*10

Wavelength range 750 to 1650 nm

Bandwidth*11 DC to 9.0 GHz

Conversion efficiency 850 nm: 0.25 A/W*2 1310 nm: 0.475 A/W*2 1550 nm: 0.45 A/W*2

Conversion gain 850 nm: 112.5 V/W*2 1310 nm: 210 V/W*2 1550 nm: 200 V/W*2

Optical noise*2

With MP2102A-055 (Unit:Wrms) Wavelength 850 nm 1310, 1550


Without MP2102A-055 (Unit:Wrms) Wavelength 850 nm 1310, 1550


*7: MP2102A-023 for CH_B only

*8: Option 037

*9: Option 040

*10: Single mode fiber acceptable

*11: No internal filter, frequency that electrical output level goes –3 dB down, typical value


A-51

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix


Item Specifications

Vertical system (Cont'd)

Optical input (Cont'd) Sensitivity*2,*12

Option With MP2102A-055

Without MP2102A-055

When using a filter other than Option 086

–9 dBm –12 dBm

When using a filter of Option 086

–11 dBm –14 dBm

No filter option –12 dBm –15 dBm Maximum input power*13 : Average power –1 dBm (794 W)

Peak power +2 dBm (1.58 mW )

Absolute maximum power: Peak power +5 dBm (3.16 mW )

Optical power measurement Range: –18 to 0 dBm

Accuracy ±0.35 dB*2: –12 dBm or more

±0.6 dB*2: less than –12 dBm

Optical return loss –30 dB*2

Digital system Sampling speed: 100 ksa/second typ. *2

*12: Mask test available range

*13: Level deteriorating linearity


A-52


Item Specifications

Clock Recovery (MP2102A-055)

Standard accessory


Data input

Connector: SMA jack


Sensitivity: 100 mVp-p*2

Clock output

Connector: SMA jack


Amplitude: 0.1 to 2.7 GHz: 270 to 540 mVp-p

8.5 to 12.5 GHz: 500 to 1500 mVp-p

Frequency: 8.5 to 12.5 GHz, 0.1 to 2.7 GHz

Jitter (RMS): 8.5 to 12.5 GHz: 20 mUI or less*14, 10 mUI*2, *14

0.1 to 2.7 GHz: 5 mUI or less

Loop bandwidth: 8.5 to 12.5 GHz Band:

1, 2, 4, 8 MHz*2

0.1 to 2.7 GHz Band:

2488.32 MHz: 200 kHz*2

622 MHz: 50 kHz*2

156 MHz: 20 kHz*2


A-53

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix


Item Specifications

Filter bank (8.5G/10G/10.5G)

(MP2102A-056)

3 dB cutoff frequency 8.5 Gbit/s: 6.38 GHz*2 Low-pass filter 8GFC


Low-pass filter 10GbE WAN (10 GBase-W) &

OC-192/STM-64, 10GE LAN(10 GBase-R)

10.7 Gbit/s: 8.2 GHz*2

Low-pass filter 10GFC, OC-192/STM-64 FEC (G.975),

OTU-2, 10GFC EFC, 10GbE FEC

Filter bank (2G/4G/8.5G/10G)

(MP2102A-057)

3 dB cutoff frequency 2 Gbit/s: 1.6 GHz*2 Low-pass filter 2GFC

4 Gbit/s: 3.2 GHz*2 Low-pass filter 4GFC

8.5 Gbit/s: 6.38 GHz*2 Low-pass filter 8GFC


Low-pass filter 10GbE WAN (10GBase-W) &

OC-192/STM-64,10GE LAN(10 GBase-R)

High Bit Rate Filter (MP2102A-061)

Filter configuration: One of MP2102A-076 to 086 can be installed.

2 High Bit Rate Filter Bank (MP2102A-062)

Filter configuration: Two of MP2102A-076 to 086 can be installed.

3 to 4 High Bit Rate Filter Bank (MP2102A-063)

Filter configuration: Three or four of MP2102A-076 to 086 can be installed.


Filter configuration: One or two of MP2102A-070 to 073 can be installed.

*14: Loop bandwidth: 4 MHz


A-54


Item Specifications


Filter configuration: Three or four of MP2102A-070 to 073 can be installed.

1 High Bit Rate/1 to 2 Low Bit Rate Filter Bank (MP2102A-066)

Filter configuration: One of MP2100A-076 to 086 and one or two of MP2100A-070 to 073 can

be installed.


Filter configuration:

One or two of MP2102A-076 to 086 and three or four of MP2102A-070 to

073 can be installed.


Filter configuration: Two or three of MP2102A-076 to 086 and one or two of MP2102A-070 to

073 can be installed.

3 High Bit Rate/3 Low Bit Rate Filter Bank (MP2102A-069)

Filter configuration: Three of MP2102A-076 to 086 and three of MP2102A-070 to 073 can be

installed.

LPF for 156M (L) (MP2102A-070)

3 dB cutoff frequency 155 Mbit/s: 116 MHz*2 Low-pass filter for OC-3/STM-1

LPF for 622M (L) (MP2102A-071)

3 dB cutoff frequency 622 Mbit/s: 470 MHz*2 Low-pass filter for OC-12/STM-4, CPRI

LPF for 1.0G (L) (MP2102A-072)

3 dB cutoff frequency 1062.5 Mbit/s: 800MHz*2 Low-pass filter for 1GFC

LPF for 1.2G (L) (MP2102A-073)

3 dB cutoff frequency 1.2 Gbit/s: 940 MHz*2 Low-pass filter for 1GbE, OC-24, CPRI x 2

LPF for 2.1G (H) (MP2102A-076/176)

3 dB cutoff frequency 2.1Gbit/s: 1.6 GHz*2 Low-pass filter for 2GFC

LPF for 2.5G (H) (MP2102A-077/177)

3 dB cutoff frequency 2.5 Gbit/s: 1.87 GHz*2 Low-pass filter for

CPRI x 4, OC-48/STM-16, 2GbE, Infiniband

LPF for 2.6G (H) (MP2102A-078/178)

3 dB cutoff frequency 2.6 Gbit/s: 2.0 GHz*2 Low-pass filter for OTU-1


A-55

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix


Item Specifications

LPF for 3.1G (H) (MP2102A-079/179)

3 dB cutoff frequency 3.1 Gbit/s: 2.37 GHz*2 Low-pass filter for CPRI x 5, 10GBASE-LX4, 10GFC-LX4

LPF for 4.2G (H) (MP2102A-080/180)


LPF for 5.0G (H) (MP2102A-081/181)

3 dB cutoff frequency 5.0 Gbit/s: 3.75 GHz*2 Low-pass filter for Infiniband x 2, CPRI x 8

LPF for 6.2G (H) (MP2102A-082/182)

3 dB cutoff frequency 6.2 Gbit/s: 4.61 GHz*2 Low-pass filter for CPRI x 10, XAUI Optical x 2

LPF for 8.5G (H) (MP2102A-083/183)

3 dB cutoff frequency 8.5 Gbit/s: 6.3 GHz*2 Low-pass filter

LPF for 9.9G to 10.3G (H) (MP2102A-084/184)

3 dB cutoff frequency 9.9 to 10.3 Gbit/s: 7.6 GHz*2 Low-pass filter for 8GFC, 10GbE WAN, 10GbE LAN/PHY, OC-192/STM-64, Infiniband x 4

LPF for 10.5G to 11.3G (H) (MP2102A-085/185)

3 dB cutoff frequency 10.5 to 11.3 Gbit/s: 8.2 GHz*2 Low-pass filter for 10GFC, G.975 FEC, OTU-2, 10GbE FEC, 10GFC FEC

LPF for Multi 10G (H) (MP2102A-086/186)

3 dB cutoff frequency 9.9 to 10.7Gbit/s: 7.5 GHz*2 Low-pass filter for 8GFC, 10GbE WAN, 10GbE LAN/PHY, OC-192/STM-64, Infiniband x 4, 10GFC, G.975 FEC, OTU-2


A-56


Item Specifications

Panel Input functions: rotary encoder, touch panel, power switch

measurement buzzer, panel lock

Display 12.1 inch LCD: WXGA (1280 x 768, 1280 x 800)

LED: disk access, standby, power

Functions Measurement buzzer, panel lock Peripheral devices connection

VGA OUTPUT (SVGA), USB 2.0 x 5

Remote interface

Ethernet x 2 (10/100/1000BASE-T)

GPIB x 1*1




Power source Voltage: AC 100 to 120 V, 200 to 240 V (Auto switch: 100/200 V) *3






EMC: EN61326-1, EN61000-3-2

LVD: EN61010-1

Size and mass Dimension 221.5 (H) x 341 (W) x 180 (D) mm (excluding protrusions)

Weight 7 kg or less (excluding options)




A.4 Optical Transceiver Module Specifications

A-57

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix

A.4 Optical Transceiver Module Specifications Table A.4-1 850 nm XFP

Item Specifications

Model/Product Name G0174A 850 nm XFP Module

Bit rate 9.95 to 11.10 Gbit/s

Transmitter*1 Output –4.0 to –1.08 dBm

Laser safety class IEC60825-1: Class 1

21 CFR 1040.10 Laser safety notice 50

Center wavelength 840 to 860 nm

RMS Spectrum width

0.45 nm or less

Extinction Ratio 3.0 dB or more*2

Suitable optical fiber

GI (50/125 m), GI (62.5/125 m)

Connector LC/PC

Eye mask pattern X1, X2, X3, Y1, Y2, Y3

0.25, 0.40, 0.45, 0.25, 0.28, 0.40*2

Nor

mal

ized

Am

plitu

de

Normalized Time (Unit Interval)

X2 0 1-X2 1 X1 1-X1 X3 1-X3

0

1-Y1

Y1

1

Y2

1-Y2

1+Y3

-Y3

0.5


A-58

Table A. 4-1 850 nm XFP (Cont'd)

Item Specifications

Receiver*1 Wavelength range 840 to 860 nm

Sensitivity –9.9 dBm or less*3

Maximum input –1.0 dBm*3


GI (50/125 m), GI (62.5/125 m)

Connector LC/PC

*1: NRZ signal: PRBS2^23–1, mark ratio: 1/2, bit rate: 10.3125 Gbit/s

*2: Uses 10.3125 Gbit/s filter

*3: Average power: BER ≤10–12, 20 to 30°C


A-59

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix

Table A.4-2 1310 nm XFP

Item Specifications


Bit rate 9.95328, 10.3125, 10.51875, 10.66423, 10.70923, 11.09

Gbit/s





SMSR 30.0 dB or more

Extinction Ratio 6 dB or more*2


Single mode fiber (ITU-T G.652)

Connector LC/PC


0.25, 0.40, 0.45, 0.25, 0.28, 0.40,*2

Nor

mal

ized

Am

plitu

de


X2 0 1-X2 1 X1 1-X1 X3 1-X3

0

1-Y1

Y1

1

Y2

1-Y2

1+Y3

-Y3

0.5


A-60

Table A. 4-2 1310 nm XFP

Item Specifications


Sensitivity –11 dBm or less*3

Maximum input +0.5 dBm*3



Connector LC/PC



*3: Average power: BER ≤10–12, 20 to 30°C


A-61

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix

Table A.4-3 1550 nm XFP

Item Specifications


Bit rate 9.95328, 10.3125, 10.51875, 10.66423, 10.70923, 11.09

Gbit/s

Transmitter*1 Output –1.0 to +2.0 dBm








Connector LC/PC


0.25, 0.40, 0.45, 0.25, 0.28, 0.40*2

Nor

mal

ized

Am

plitu

de


X2 0 1-X2 1 X1 1-X1 X3 1-X3

0

1-Y1

Y1

1

Y2

1-Y2

1+Y3

-Y3

0.5


A-62

Table A.4-3 1550 nm XFP (Cont'd)

Item Specifications


Sensitivity –14 dBm or less*3,*4

Maximum input –1.0 dBm*3



Connector LC/PC



*3: Average power: BER ≤10-12

*4: 20 to 30°C


A-63

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix

Table A.4-4 850 nm SFP+

Item Specifications

Model/Product Name G0238A 850 nm SFP+ Module

Bit rate 10.3125 Gbit/s





RMS Spectrum width

0.45 nm or less



GI (50/125 m), GI (62.5/125 m)

Connector LC/PC


0.25, 0.40, 0.45, 0.25, 0.28, 0.40*2

Nor

mal

ized

Am

plitu

de


X2 0 1-X2 1 X1 1-X1 X3 1-X3

0

1-Y1

Y1

1

Y2

1-Y2

1+Y3

-Y3

0.5


A-64


Item Specifications



Maximum input 0.5 dBm*4


GI (50/125 m), GI (62.5/125 m)

Connector LC/PC

LOS detection level –12.0 dBm or less, –20.0 dBm*5

*1: NRZ signal: PRBS2^23–1, mark rate: 1/2, bit rate: 10.3125 Gbit/s,


*3: Optical Modulation Amplitude, BER ≤10–12, at 20 to 30°C

*4: Average power, BER ≤10–12, at 20 to 30°C

*5: Typical values


A-65

Appen

dix A

Ap

pen

dix


Item Specifications

Model/Product Name G0239A 1310 nm SFP+ Module

Bit rate 9.95328 to 10.3125 Gbit/s

Transmitter*1 Output –8.2 to 0.5 dBm








Connector LC/PC


0.25, 0.40, 0.45, 0.25, 0.28, 0.40*2

Nor

mal

ized

Am

plitu

de


X2 0 1-X2 1 X1 1-X1 X3 1-X3

0

1-Y1

Y1

1

Y2

1-Y2

1+Y3

-Y3

0.5


A-66.

Table A.4-5 1310 nm SFP+ (Cont'd)

Item Specifications



Maximum input 0.5 dBm*4



Connector LC/PC

LOS detection level –30.0 dBm or more

*1: NRZ signal: PRBS2^23–1, mark rate:1/2, bit rate: 10.3125 Gbit/s,


*3: Optical Modulation Amplitude, BER ≤10–12, at 20 to 30°C

*4: Average power, BER ≤10–12, at 20 to 30°C

Appendix B Initial Values

B-1

Appen

dix B

Ap

pen

dix

Table B-1 Initial Values of PPG

Item Initial Value Remarks

Amplitude 0.40 Vp-p Bit Rate Standard Variable Bit Rate 8500000 kbit/s Bit Rate Offset 0 ppm Data/Xdata Off Error Addition Off Error Addition Rate Repeat Error Rate 1E–2 External ATT 0 dB External CLK 10 MHz Logic Pos Reference CLK Internal Sync Output PPG1_1/8Clk Test Pattern PRBS 2^9–1 Programmable Pattern

“--------------“


B-2

Table B-2 Initial Values of ED


Auto SYNC On Auto SYNC Threshold INT Bit Rate Standard Variable Bit Rate 8500000 kbit/s Data Input Condition Electrical

Single-Ended-Data

Data Input Condition Threshold

0 mV

ED Result “Total” Start Time Stop External ATT 0 dB Frame Position 1 Gating Cycle Repeat Gating Current On Gating Period 0 Day 0 H 0 M 1 S Logic Pos SYNC Control Off Sync Output PPG1_1/8Clk Test Pattern PRBS 2^9–1 Tracking On Programmable Pattern “--------------“


B-3

Appen

dix B

Ap

pen

dix

Table B-3 Initial Values of Sampling Scope (EYE/Pulse Scope)


Amplitude Attenuation A 0 dB Attenuation B 0 dB Channel A

Attenuation Tracks ED1

Off

Channel A/B Tracking

Off

Channel Math Off Define Function CHA+CHB Scale 2500 mV/div. Offset 0 mV Offset A 0 mV Offset B 0 mV Scale A 100 mV/div. Scale B 250 mV/div. CH A On CH B On Marker Disp Off X1 Off X2 Off Y1 Off Y2 Off


B-4

Table B-3 Initial Values of Sampling Scope (EYE/Pulse Scope) (Cont'd)


Measure Active Channel

Selection Channel A

Measurement Item Off Amplitude/Time Correction

Factor 0 ps

Item 1 Item Selection (ch.A) Jitter p-p

(ch.A) Jitter RMS (ch.A) Crossing (ch.A) Eye Amplitude

Measure Area Marker

Off

Offset form Crossing

0.50 UI

Rise/Fall Time 20/80% Rise/Fall Time

Correction Off

Width 0.20 UI Histogram Axis Amplitude X1 0.50 X2 1.50 Y1 500

mV *1 W *2

Y2 –500

mV *1 W *2

*1: Electrical interface

*2: Optical interface


B-5

Appen

dix B

Ap

pen

dix



Measure (Cont'd) Measurement Item Off Mask Test Align

Marker Display Off

X1 0.50

X 1.00

Y1 338.31

Y 673.90

Align Method

Zero/One Crossing

Eye Mask Select

1GFC

Mask Area Restriction

Off

Angle 0 Width 0.10 UI Mask

Margin One Shot

Mask Margin

0 %

Target Failed

1


B-6



Setup Accumulation Type Persistency Averaging 10 CRU Band Off CRU Loop BW 1 MHz Inverse Background

color Off

Limit Type Time Number of sample 8191 Ref. Trace Memory ChA & ChB Samples 10 million Sampling Mode Eye Time 10.0 sec Waveforms 100 Time Bits on Screen 2 Clock Rate 8500000 kHz Bit Rate 8500000 kbit/s Divide Ratio 8 Length 511 Master

(Data Clock Rate) PPG1

Master (Pattern Length)

PPG1

Offset 0 Recalculate Option Clock Rate Skew A 0.0

B 0.0

Tracking (Data Clock Rate)

Off

Tracking (Pattern Length)

Off

Unit UI


B-7

Appen

dix B

Ap

pen

dix

Table B-4 Initial Values of Optical Transceiver (XFP/SFP+)


Output Off XFP RX Ref CLK * Sync with PPG1

*: Option 050 installed only

Table B-5 Initial Values of O/E Converter


Filter On/Off On Conversion Gain 0 Extinction Ratio Correction

Off

Extinction Ratio Correction Factor

*1

Filter *2 Responsivity *1 System Conversion Gain *1 Wavelength 1550 *1 Input Power –7.00 dBm

*1: The initial value of this item is adjusted to go with the wavelength of 1550nm at factory.

*2: This indicates the lowest bit rate filter in the filters installed.

Table B-6 Initial Values of Setup Utility


Remote Control Active Interface Ethernet Protect OFF GPIB * Address 1 Remote High

Speed Response Checked

Ethernet IP Address 192 168 100 101 Local Area Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Connection Gateway IP Address 192 168 100 102 Local Area Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Connection 2 Gateway Port Number 5001 Information Software

*: When Option 030/130 installed

Appendix B Specifications

B-8.

Appendix C Keyboard and Mouse Operations

C-1

Appen

dix C

Ap

pen

dix

The operation of the rotary knob, arrow keys displayed on the screen, numeric input panel, and buttons in dialogue boxes and the corresponding keyboard and mouse operations are explained below.

Table C-1 Correspondence between Rotary Knob Operation and

Keyboard

Rotary Knob Operation Keyboard

Rotary Knob Counterclockwise rotation

Shift + Tab

Rotary Knob Clockwise rotation

Tab

Pressing Rotary Knob Enter

Table C-2 Correspondence between Panel Keys and Keyboard

Panel Key Keyboard

0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 + + – – .(Period) . (Period) ↑ > → ↓ < ← OK Enter Cancel ESC <<,BKSP Back Space

Panel operations using the keyboard at the Setup Utility are not supported.

Appendix C Keyboard and Mouse Operations

C-2.

Table C-3 Corresponding to Mouse Operation

Mouse Operation Corresponding Operation

Left button click Save same as touching touch panel Right button click No operation Wheel Same as turning rotary knob

↑Forwards: Clockwise ↓Backwards: Counterclockwise

Appendix D Pattern Files

D-1

Appen

dix D

Ap

pen

dix

D.1 Pattern File Specifications The specifications for data files read as PPG or ED are as follows:

Table D.1-1 Specifications for Data Pattern File

Item Specifications

Save destination folder

C:\Program Files\Anritsu\MP2100A \MX210000A\UserData\Pattern

File extension ppf Data length (bits) 2 to 1305600 Description method Hexadecimal or binary

Data description specifications

Data pattern as text file

Comma-separated (,) data length, description method and data

Decimal data length description

HEX descriptor for hexadecimal and BIN for binary

HEX not case sensitive

2-byte characters not supported

Ignores spaces, line breaks and tabs

Errors occur under following conditions: One or less commas (,) included in file Data longer than 10000000 bits 2-byte characters included in file

Ignores data after third comma when 3 or more commas (,) included in file

Displays warning when reading 1305601 or more bits of data In this case, pattern only uses data from header to bit 1305600.

Pads missing part with 0s when described data bit count smaller than data length

Uses data up to data length for pattern when described data bit count larger than data length

Sets data to all 0s when data description omitted

Appendix D Keyboard and Mouse Operations

D-2

Hexadecimal description specifications

Hexadecimal description only as integer values with no decimals

Data length in multiples of 4

Supports mixture of upper- and lower-case characters A to F (case insensitive)

File read error when data includes characters other than A, B, C, D, E, F, a, b, c, d, e, and f

Binary description specifications

Binary description only as integer values with no decimals

File read error if data includes characters other than 0 and 1

Example of pattern file

Figure D.1-1 Example of Pattern File Described by Hexadecimal Number

Figure D.1-2 Example of Pattern File Described by Binary Number


D-3

Appen

dix D

Ap

pen

dix

D.2 Mask file Specifications The mask file specifications reading with Sampling Scope is as follows.

Table D.2-1 Mask File Specifications

Item Specification

Save folder C:\Program Files\Anritsu\MP2100A \MX210000A\UserData\Mask

File extension txt

The mask file is the test format file. The mask margin 0,–100 and 100% of the top mask of the coordinate value are described to the file.

x

y

01

1

Middle

Top

Bottom

Figure D.2-1 Coordinate System of Mask


D-4

The following items are described in the mask file.

Table D.2-2 Details of Mask File

Item Parameter to be set Description

Version Masks Version#1 Make sure that the version is written.

Mask name Mask name Mask name displayed on the measurement screen.

Mask type Relative Mask Fixed Mask

Relative: Sets coordinate of amplitude direction by rate. The Mask coordinate varies with the amplitude of input signal. Fixed: Sets coordinate of amplitude direction at the fixed value. The Mask coordinate does not vary with the amplitude of input signal.

Coordinates in the top

TOP X Y X_min Y_min X_max Y_max

Specifies each X and Y coordinate in the area of Top/Middle/Bottom. As for X_min and Y_min, set the coordinate at –100% of Mask Margin. As for X_max, and Y_max, set the coordinate at 100% of Mask Margin. The coordinate can be set up to 10 points. If it is not used, set “–1”.

Coordinates in the middle

MIDDLE X Y X_min Y_min X_max Y_max

Coordinates in the bottom

BOTTOM X Y Y_min X_max Y_max


D-5

Appen

dix D

Ap

pen

dix

Example of mask file

>>>>>>>>>> START >>>>>>>>>> Masks Version#1 <1GFC ; 1G Optical Fibre Channel Mask (1.0625 Gbps)> Relative Mask;

Top X Y X_min Y_min X_max Y_max 0 99 0 99 0 99 0 1.3 0 1.6 0 1 1 1.3 1 1.6 1 1 1 99 1 99 1 999 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 Middle X Y X_min Y_min X_max Y_max 0.215 0.5 0.5 0.5 0 0.5 0.4 0.8 0.5 0.5 0.4 1 0.6 0.8 0.5 0.5 0.6 1 0.785 0.5 0.5 0.5 1 0.5 0.6 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.6 0 0.4 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.4 0 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 Bottom X Y X_min Y_min X_max Y_max 0 -99 0 -99 0 -99 0 -0.2 0 -0.4 0 0 1 -0.2 1 -0.4 1 0 1 -99 1 -99 1 -99 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 >>>>>>>>>> END >>>>>>>>>>

Figure D.2-2 Coordinate System of Mask

Appendix D Pattern Files

D-6.

Appendix E Performance Test Result Form

E-1

Appen

dix E

Ap

pen

dix

Document number:

Test Location:

Date:

Test person in charge:

Product name:

Serial number:

Software version:

Option:

Power voltage: V

Power frequency: Hz

Ambient temperature °C

Relative humidity %

Instruments used: Model name Serial number

Model name Serial number



Remarks


E-2

E.1 Pulse Pattern Generator

Frequency Range: 8500000 to 11320000 kbit/s ±100 ppm

8000000 to 12500000 kbit/s ±100 ppm (Option 090)

Table E.1-1 Operating Frequency Range

Bit Rate Setting Value

Minimum Value

Measured Value

Maximum Value

Measurement Uncertainty

Pass/Fail

12500000 kbit/s 12498750 kHz

kHz

12501250kHz Pass/Fail

11320000 kbit/s 11318868 kHz

kHz

11321132kHz Pass/Fail

8500000 kbit/s 8499150 kHz

kHz

8500850 kHz Pass/Fail

8000000 kbit/s 7999200 kHz

kHz

8000800 kHz Pass/Fail

Level Accuracy: ±20% ±20 mV

Table E.1-2 Level Accuracy

Connector Amplitude

Setting Value

Minimum Value

Measured Value

Maximum Value


Pass/Fail

PPG1 Data Out

0.1 Vp-p 0.06 Vp-p Vp-p 0.14 Vp-p Pass/Fail


PPG1 Data Out



PPG2 Data Out



PPG2 Data Out




E-3

Appen

dix E

Ap

pen

dix

Table E.1-3 Full Rate Clock Output (MP2100A-052/152, MP2101A-052/152)

Item Minimum

Value Measured

Value Maximum

Value Measurement Uncertainty

Pass/Fail

Amplitude 300 mVp-p mV 750 mVp-p Pass/Fail

Rise Time 0 ps ps 30 ps Pass/Fail

Fall Time 0 ps ps 30 ps Pass/Fail

Duty 35 % % 65 % Pass/Fail

Jitter (rms) 0 ps Pass/Fail


E-4

E.2 Error Detector Frequency Range

Variable: 8500000 to 11320000 kbit/s ±100 ppm

8000000 to 12500000 kbit/s ±100 ppm (Option 090)

When connecting the PPG output connector, no bit error occurs during the 10-seconds measurement.

Table E.2-1 Operating Frequency Range

Connector Bit Rate

Setting Value Offset

Setting ValueMeasured Frequency

Error Count Pass/Fail

ED1 Data In 11320000 kbit/s +100 ppm kHz Pass/Fail

11320000 kbit/s –100 ppm kHz Pass/Fail








E-5

Appen

dix E

Ap

pen

dix

Table E.2-2 Operating Frequency Range (Option 090)

Connector Bit Rate

Setting Value Offset

Setting ValueMeasured Frequency

Error Count Pass/Fail










E-6

Input Level Range: 0.1 to 0.8 Vp-p

Table E.2-3 Range of Input Level

Connector Input LevelMeasured Frequency

Error Count

Pass/Fail

ED1 Data In

0.1 Vp-p kHz Pass/Fail


ED1 Data In



ED2 Data In



ED2 Data In



O/E Data In

–9 dBm kHz Pass/Fail


E-7

Appen

dix E

Ap

pen

dix

Pattern Specifications

Test Pattern: 2^7–1, 2^9–1, 2^15–1, 2^23–1, 2^31–1 Input Level: 0.1 Vp-p, Bit rate: 11320000 kbit/s (no bit error occurs when inputting single end)

Table E.2-4 Pattern

Connector Pattern Error Count

Pass/Fail

ED1 Data In

2^7–1 Pass/Fail

2^9–1 Pass/Fail

2^15–1 Pass/Fail

2^23–1 Pass/Fail

2^31–1 Pass/Fail

ED1 Data In

2^7–1 Pass/Fail

2^9–1 Pass/Fail

2^15–1 Pass/Fail

2^23–1 Pass/Fail

2^31–1 Pass/Fail


E-8

Table E.2-4 Pattern (Cont'd)

Connector Pattern Error Count

Pass/Fail

ED2 Data In

2^7–1 Pass/Fail

2^9–1 Pass/Fail

2^15–1 Pass/Fail

2^23–1 Pass/Fail

2^31–1 Pass/Fail

ED2 Data In

2^7–1 Pass/Fail

2^9–1 Pass/Fail

2^15–1 Pass/Fail

2^23–1 Pass/Fail

2^31–1 Pass/Fail


E-9

Appen

dix E

Ap

pen

dix

Error Detector (ED)

Input Level: 0.1 Vp-p Bit Rate: 10000000 kbit/s (single error detects when inputting the single end) The calculation value of the bit error rate corresponds to the error count (EC) and clock count (CC).

Table E.2-5 Error Detector

Connector Bit Error

Rate Error Count

Pass/Fail

ED1 Data In Pass/Fail





E-10

E.3 Sampling Scope Amplitude Accuracy

Table E.3-1 Level Accuracy

Connector Setting Voltage

Minimum Value

Measured Value

Maximum Value


Pass/Fail

Ch A +200 mV +186.5 mV mV +213.5 mV Pass/Fail

–200 mV –213.5 mV mV –186.5 mV Pass/Fail

Ch B +200 mV +186.5 mV mV +213.5 mV Pass/Fail

–200 mV –213.5 mV mV –186.5 mV Pass/Fail


E-11

Appen

dix E

Ap

pen

dix

E.4 Optical Interface Optical Power Meter: ±0.35 dB or less (–12 dBm or more)

Table E.4-1 Accuracy of Optical Power Meter (MP2100A-003, MP2102A-023)

Wavelength Reading of

Optical Power Meter

Average Power(dBm)

Measurement Value

Minimum Value

Level Difference

Maximum Value

Pass/Fail

850 nm dBm dBm –0.35 dB dB +0.35 dB Pass/Fail




E-12.

Appendix F Bibliography

F-1

Appen

dix F

Ap

pen

dix

(1) IEC60825-1 Safety of laser products. Part 1: Equipment classification,

requirements and user's guide

(2) IEC61010-1 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement,

control, and laboratory use - Part 1:General requirements

(3) IEC61280-2-1 Fibre optic communication subsystem basic test procedures -

Part 2-1: Test procedures for digital systems - Receiver sensitivity and overload

measurement

(4) IEC61280-2-2 Fibre optic communication subsystem test procedures - Part 2-2:

Digital systems Optical eye pattern, waveform and extinction ratio

measurement

(5) IEC62150-2 Fibre optic active components and devices - Test and measurement

procedures - Part 2: ATM-PON transceivers

(6) IEEE 802.3 Local and metropolitan area networks— Specific requirements

Part 3: Carrier sense multiple access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD)

Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications

(7) ISO/IEC 14165-115 Information technology - Fibre channel - Part 115:

Physical interfaces (FC-PI)

(8) ITU-T G.651.1 Characteristics of a 50/125 μm multimode graded index optical

fibre cable for the optical access network

(9) ITU-T G.652 Characteristics of a single-mode optical fibre and cable

(10) ITU-T G.707 Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy

(SDH)

(11) ITU-T G.709 Interfaces for Optical Transport Network (OTN)

(12) ITU-T G.957 Optical interfaces for equipments and systems relating to the

synchronous digital hierarchy

(13) ITU-T O.150 General requirements for instrumentation for performance

measurements on digital transmission equipment

(14) ITU-T O.151 Error performance measuring equipment operating at the

primary rate and above

(15) ANSI INCITS 352-2002 Information technology - Fibre Channel - Physical

Interfaces (FC-PI)

(16) InfiniBand Architecture Release 1.2.1 Volume 2 Physical Specifications

Appendix F Bibliography

F-2.

(17) SFF Committee INF-8074i SFP (Small Form-factor Pluggable Transceiver)

Revision 1.0

(18) SFF Committee INF-8077i 10 Gigabit Small Form Factor Pluggable Module

Revision 4.5

(19) SFF Committee SFF-8431 Enhanced Small Form Factor Pluggable Module

SFP+ Revision 4.1

(20) Common Public Radio Interface CPRI Specification V4.0

(21) Open Base Station Architecture Initiative Reference Point 3 Specification

Version 4.2

(22) Anritsu Corporation Understanding Eye Pattern Measurements Application

Note

http://www.anritsu.com/en-US/Downloads/Application-Notes/Application-Note

/DWL7861.aspx

(23) Anritsu Corporation EYE/Pulse Scope User Defined Mask Files

http://www.anritsu.com/en-US/Downloads/Product-Introductions/Product-Intro

duction/DWL8755.aspx

Index

Index-1

Ind

ex

０

0 Level ............................................................ 1-14

１

1 Level ............................................................ 1-14 1/16 Clk .......................................................... 5-14 10MHz ............................................................ 5-14 1310 nm SFP+ ............................................... A-65 1310 nm XFP ................................................. A-59 1550 nm XFP ................................................. A-61

８

850 nm SFP+ ................................................. A-63 850 nm XFP ................................................... A-57

Ａ

Abbreviation .................................................. 1-25 About Eco label ................................................. xvi About This Manual ............................................. I Accumulation Type ....................................... 7-36 Acquire Clock Rate ...................... 7-31, 7-32, 7-34 Add ................................................................. 7-71 Adjusting External Attenuator .................... 7-48 Adjusting Horizontal-axis Screen ................ 7-47 Adjusting mask position ............................... 7-64 Adjusting Screen Scale ................................. 7-43 Adjusting time at left side of screen ............. 7-47 Adjusting Vertical-axis Screen ..................... 7-45 Alignment Marker ......................................... 7-64 All Off ............................................................. 7-67 Amp/Histogram .................................... 7-51, 7-56 Amplitude ............................................. 7-45, 7-56 Amplitude and time measurements ............. 7-49 Amplitude and Time Measurements ........... 7-50 Amplitude dialog ............................................. 7-8 Amplitude/Time ............................................. 7-51 Amplitude/Time&Mask ....................... 7-51, 7-59 Angle .............................................................. 7-65 Arrow Key Entry Panel................................... 4-6 Attenuation .................................................... 7-48 Attenuator Factor .......................................... 6-16 Auto Popup .................................................... 4-13 Auto Scale ............................................. 7-43, 7-44

averaging........................................................ 7-38 Averaging ....................................................... 7-38 Averaging process .......................................... 7-38 Axis ................................................................. 7-56

Ｂ

Basic Procedure of Generating Pulse Signal 5-10 BERTWave Types ............................................ 1-2 Bit Error Rate ................................................ 1-23 Bit Rate .......................................................... 1-24 Block ............................................................... 4-15 Bottom Mask Failed Samples ....................... 7-63 Buzzer Off ...................................................... 4-13

Ｃ

Calibrating attenuation of external attenuator..................................................................... 7-48

Calibrating Sampling Scope ......................... 7-24 Calibration ................................................... 10-11 Capture .......................................................... 7-73 Cautions against computer virus infection ...... xx Cautions on Handling Optical Fiber Cables 2-14 Cautions on Storage .................................... 10-13 CE Conformity Marking ................................. xxi Center ........................................... 7-56, 7-64, 7-67 Center Mask Failed Samples ........................ 7-63 CH1 External ................................................. 5-12 CH2 External ................................................. 5-12 Channel Math ................................................ 7-69 Channel Offset ............................................... 7-69 Cleaning the Ferrule End Surface ............... 10-5 Cleaning the Optical Adapter ....................... 10-6 Cleaning the Optical Fiber Cable Ferrule End

Surface ........................................................ 10-7 Clear Reference ............................................. 7-70 Coherent Eye ................................................. 7-69 Collecting Data .............................................. 7-41 Configuring Power Options .......................... 2-29 Connecting Peripheral Devices .................... 2-12 Connecting Power Cord ................................. 2-11 Connecting Remote Control Devices ............ 2-13 Correction Factor ........................................... 7-53

Index

Index-2

Correspondence between Panel Keys and Keyboard ...................................................... C-1

Correspondence between Rotary Knob Operation and Keyboard ............................. C-1

CR UnLock ..................................................... 6-28 Crossed-out Wheeled Bin Symbol ................... xvi CRU Band ............................................. 7-31, 7-32 CRU loop BW ........................................ 7-31, 7-32 C-Tick Conformity Marking ......................... xxiii Current Mask ................................................ 7-63

Ｄ

Daily Maintenance ........................................ 10-2 Data Clock Rate............................................. 7-33 Data Input Condition .................................... 7-31 Data Input Method .......................................... 4-6 Default Name/Root ........................................ 4-12 Define Function ............................................. 7-69 Delete ............................................................. 7-71 Deleting overwritten waveform display ....... 7-37 Differential 50 Ohm ...................................... 6-16 Discarding screen display ............................. 7-42 Displaying alarm ........................................... 4-13 Displaying Histogram ................................... 7-55 Displaying Software Version ........................ 10-8 Displaying the device internal signal connection

.................................................................... 4-15 Displaying Time and Status ......................... 4-18 Displaying Windows Desktop ....................... 2-25 Disposal ........................................................ 10-14 Duty Cycle Distortion ................................... 1-21

Ｅ

Equipment Certificate ..................................... xiv Performance Test Result Form

Error Detector .............................................. E-4 Ethernet cable ............................................... 2-12 Exit ................................................................. 4-15 Explanation of Technical Terms .................. 1-14 External ......................................................... 5-12 External Attenuation .................................... 6-16 Extinction Ratio ............................................ 1-20 Eye Amplitude ............................................... 1-16 EYE Boundary ............................................... 7-51

Eye Crossing Percentage .............................. 1-16 Eye Height ..................................................... 1-16 Eye Mask........................................................ 1-18 Eye Mask Select ............................................ 7-59 Eye Pattern .................................................... 1-17 Eye Width ...................................................... 1-18 Eye/Pulse Scope Fatal Temperature ............ 4-19 EYE/Pulse Scope Screen ................................. 7-2 Eye/Pulse Scope Temperature ...................... 4-19

Ｆ

Fall Time ........................................................ 1-22 Features ........................................................... 1-9 File Compatibility with Previous Product ... 5-24 Firmware/FPGA ............................................ 10-8 Function List ................................................... 6-2

Ｈ

Histogram ............................................. 7-49, 7-56 Histogram Marker ......................................... 7-56 Hits ................................................................. 7-56

Ｉ

Indication Labels on Product ............................ ix Infinite ............................................................ 7-36 Information .................................................... 10-8 Initial Values of O/E Converter ...................... B-7 Initial Values of Optical Transceiver

(XFP/SFP+) .................................................. B-7 Initial Values of Paulse Pattern Generator ... B-1 Initial Values of Sampling Scope

............................................... B-3, B-4, B-5, B-6 Initial Values of Setup Utility ........................ B-7 Initialize ......................................................... 4-13 Initializing measurement conditions ........... 4-13 Inserting Bit Error ........................................ 5-25 Inserting bit errors one bit at a time using

screen operation ......................................... 5-25 Inserting fixed proportion of bit errors ........ 5-25 Insertion Error ............................................... 1-22 Installation ...................................................... 2-3 Intended Use .................................................. 1-10 Internal .......................................................... 5-12 Introduction of BERTWave Series ................. 1-2

Index

Index-3

Ind

ex

Inverse background color .............................. 7-73 Item Selection ................................................ 7-51

Ｊ

Jitter ............................................................... 1-19

Ｌ

Laser Radiation Markings .................................. x Laser Safety Classifications ........................... viii Length ............................................................ 7-40 Lifetime of Parts ............................................... xix Limit Type ..................................................... 7-37 Limited ........................................................... 7-36 List of Setting Items ....................................... 5-2 Load .............................................................. 10-10 Local/Panel Unlock ....................................... 4-14 Locking the panel operation ......................... 4-14

Ｍ

Manual Notation System ................................. III Marker ........................................................... 7-67 Mask Area Restriction .................................. 7-65 Mask File Specifications ................................. D-3 Mask Margin ........................................ 1-24, 7-63 Mask test ....................................................... 7-49 Mask Test ...................................................... 7-59 Mean............................................................... 7-56 Measure Dialog ................................................ 7-6 Measurement method ................................... 6-27 Measurement Result ..................................... 6-29 Measuring Area Display ............................... 7-51 Minimize ........................................................ 4-15 Minimizing the screen display ..................... 4-15 MP2100A BERTWave Specifications ............. A-1 MP2101A BERTWave PE Specifications ..... A-29 MP2102A BERTWave SS Specifications ..... A-44

Ｎ

Negative Logic (NEG) ................................... 5-22 Notes On Export Management ........................ xix Notice ................................................................. xx Number of samples............................... 7-37, 7-38 Numeric value entry panel ............................. 4-7

Ｏ

Offset .............................................................. 7-69 Offset from Crossing ..................................... 7-52 OK................................................................... 7-73 OMA ............................................................... 1-22 Omission Error .............................................. 1-22 One Level ....................................................... 1-14 Open ............................................................... 4-11 Operating O/E Converter .............................. 8-10 Operating Optical Transceiver ....................... 8-6 Optical ............................................................ 6-16 Optical amplitude .......................................... 1-22 Optical Connector/Optical Adapter Cleaning

..................................................................... 10-5 Performance Test Result Form

Optical Interface ........................................ E-11 Optical Interface Types ................................... 8-2 Optical Power Meter ..................................... 9-21 optical transceiver ......................................... 2-17 Optical Transceiver Module Specifications . A-57 Optional Accessories ....................................... 1-8 Options ............................................................. 1-3

Ｐ

Panel Lock ...................................................... 4-14 panel locking .................................................. 4-14 Pattern ........................................................... 5-27 Pattern Sync .................................................. 6-20 Performance Test for Error Detector ............. 9-7 Performance Test for Optical Interface (O/E

Converter) .................................................. 9-20 Performance Test for Sampling Scope ......... 9-16 Persistency ..................................................... 7-36 Positive Logic (POS) ...................................... 5-22 Power .............................................................. 4-19 Power Requirements ..................................... 2-10 Power-off ........................................................ 2-23 Power-on ........................................................ 2-21 p-p ................................................................... 1-15 P-P .................................................................. 7-56 PPG/ED Fatal Temperature ......................... 4-19 PPG/ED Illegal Mode .................................... 4-19 PPG/ED PLL Unlock ..................................... 4-19

Index

Index-4

PRBS .............................................................. 1-15 Preventing Damage ....................................... 2-33 Procedure ｏｆ Measuring Bit Error Rate ..... 6-13 Procedures at System Alarm ........................ 4-19 Programmable Pattern ................................. 5-21 Performace Test Result Form

Pulse Pattern Generator ............................. E-2

Ｒ

Reading measurement conditions from file . 4-11 Rear Panel ....................................................... 2-8 Reboot .......................................................... 10-10 Recommended storage conditions .............. 10-13 Ref.Trace Channel ......................................... 7-70 reference trace ............................................... 7-70 Repackaging ................................................ 10-14 Repeat ............................................................ 6-26 Replacement of Optical Connector ............... 10-3 Result Window ................................................ 7-3 Rise/Fall Time ............................................... 7-53 Rise/Fall Time Correction ............................. 7-53 RMS ................................................................ 1-15

Ｓ

Sample ........................................................... 7-37 Performance Test Result Form

Sampling Scope .......................................... E-10 Sampling Scope ............................................. 1-19 Save ................................................................ 4-10 Saving a screen to the image file .................. 4-12 Saving measurement conditions and

measurement results ............................... 4-10 Saving Measurement Result ........................ 7-72 Scale ............................................................... 7-69 Screen Configuration ...................................... 4-2 Screen Copy ................................................... 4-12 Selector Screen .............................................. 2-21 self test ........................................................... 7-27 Set Reference ................................................. 7-70 Setting Bit Rate ............................................. 7-33 Setting buzzer ................................................ 4-13 Setting Clock Rate and Divide Rate ............ 7-34 Setting Clock Recovery Unit ......................... 7-30 Setting Control Panel ........................... 2-25, 2-26

Setting Interface for Remote Control ........... 2-30 Setting Item List ........................................... 7-12 Setting Measurement Conditions ................. 6-26 Setting Output Waveform ............................. 5-16 Setting overwritten waveform display ......... 7-36 Setting Pattern Length ................................. 7-40 Setting Patterns ............................................ 5-20 Setting Reference Clock ................................ 5-11 Setting Restrictions ................................ 5-9, 6-11 Setting same vertical scale for two waveforms

..................................................................... 7-46 Setting Sync Output ...................................... 5-26 Setting System Menu ...................................... 4-9 Setup Dialog .................................................... 7-4 Side Panel ........................................................ 2-9 Simotenous Measurement Start and Stop

at Multi-channels ....................................... 4-17 Single .............................................................. 6-26 Single-End Data ............................................ 6-16 Single-End XData .......................................... 6-16 SNR ................................................................ 1-16 Software ......................................................... 10-8 Software Keyboard .......................................... 4-8 Specifications for Data Pattern File .............. D-1 Starting data collection ................................. 7-41 std Dev ........................................................... 7-56 Stopping data collection ................................ 7-41 Sync Lｏss ....................................................... 6-28 Sync Threshold .............................................. 6-20 Synchronized ................................................. 5-12 System Alarm ................................................ 4-13 system alarm factor ....................................... 4-19 System Menu ................................................... 4-9

Ｔ

Target Failed Samples .................................. 7-63 Technical Terms ............................................ 1-14 Terminating applications .............................. 4-15 Testing Mask ................................................. 7-58 Threshold Level ............................................. 6-16 Time .............................................. 7-37, 7-47, 7-56 Time Dialog .................................................... 7-10 To adjust center power voltage or optical power

at vertical axis ............................................ 7-45

Index

Index-5

Ind

ex

To adjust number of bits displayed on the screen .......................................................... 7-47

To adjust the waveform position .................. 7-47 To change display order ................................ 7-54 To change EYE Boundary ............................. 7-52 To delete items .............................................. 7-54 To display date and time .............................. 4-18 To display measurement area ...................... 7-51 To display status ........................................... 4-18 To limit mask area ........................................ 7-65 To measure mask margin ............................. 7-61 To measure measurement items: ................. 7-51 To select channel and mask .......................... 7-59 To set Mask Margin and execute mask test 7-62 To set measurement method of rise/fall time

.................................................................... 7-53 To switch to Eye/Pulse/Coherent mode ........ 7-35 Top Mask Failed Samples ............................. 7-63 Total Error ..................................................... 1-22 Total Failed Samples .................................... 7-63 Total Samples ................................................ 7-63 Total Waveforms ........................................... 7-63 Touch Panel ................................................. 10-11 Touch Panel Position Correction ................ 10-11 Tracking Off ................................................... 7-40 Transporting ................................................ 10-14 Transporting and Destroy .......................... 10-14 Turning Power On/Off .................................. 2-21

Ｕ

Unlocking the panel ...................................... 4-14 Unpacking ........................................................ 2-2 Untimed ......................................................... 6-26 Update ................................................. 7-64, 10-10 Updating Software ...................................... 10-10 User defined ................................................... 7-59 Using External Monitor ................................ 2-27 Using Marker ................................................ 7-67 Using Trace Memory ..................................... 7-70 Utilities ................................................. 7-70, 7-71

Ｗ

Waveform ....................................................... 7-37 Waveform only ............................................... 7-73 Width ..................................................... 7-52, 7-65

Ｚ

Zero Level ....................................................... 1-14

Index

Index-6.

MP2100A BERTWave MP2101A BERTWave PE MP2102A BERTWave SS Operation …€¦ · 05/02/2010 ·...

Documents

Transcript of MP2100A BERTWave MP2101A BERTWave PE MP2102A BERTWave SS Operation …€¦ · 05/02/2010 ·...